FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

PGDF-102

BLOCK 1:
BASICS OF FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

Ahmedabad
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Knowledge Management and

Research Organization
Pune
Editorial Panel

Author
Prof. Asmita Rai

Language Editor
Ms. Renuka Suryavanshi

Graphic and Creative Panel

Ms. K. Jamdal
Ms. Lata Dawange
Ms. Pinaz Driver
Ms. Tejashree Bhosale
Mr. Kiran Shinde
Mr. Prashant Tikone
Mr. Akshay Mirajkar

Copyright © 2015 Knowledge Management and Research Organization.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, transmitted or utilized
in any form or by a means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording or by any information storage or retrieval system without written
permission from us.

Acknowledgment
Every attempt has been made to trace the copyright holders of material reproduced
in this book. Should an infringement have occurred, we apologize for the same and
will be pleased to make necessary correction/amendment in future edition of this
book.
The content is developed by taking reference of online and print publications that
are mentioned in Bibliography. The content developed represents the breadth of
research excellence in this multidisciplinary academic field. Some of the
information, illustrations and examples are taken "as is" and as available in the
references mentioned in Bibliography for academic purpose and better
understanding by learner.'
ROLE OF SELF INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL IN DISTANCE LEARNING

The need to plan effective instruction is imperative for a successful

distance teaching repertoire. This is due to the fact that the instructional
designer, the tutor, the author (s) and the student are often separated by
distance and may never meet in person. This is an increasingly common
scenario in distance education instruction. As much as possible, teaching by
distance should stimulate the student's intellectual involvement and
contain all the necessary learning instructional activities that are capable of
guiding the student through the course objectives. Therefore, the course /
self-instructional material are completely equipped with everything that
the syllabus prescribes.
To ensure effective instruction, a number of instructional design
ideas are used and these help students to acquire knowledge, intellectual
skills, motor skills and necessary attitudinal changes. In this respect,
students' assessment and course evaluation are incorporated in the text.
The nature of instructional activities used in distance education self-
instructional materials depends on the domain of learning that they
reinforce in the text, that is, the cognitive, psychomotor and affective. These
are further interpreted in the acquisition of knowledge, intellectual skills
and motor skills. Students may be encouraged to gain, apply and
communicate (orally or in writing) the knowledge acquired. Intellectual-
skills objectives may be met by designing instructions that make use of
students' prior knowledge and experiences in the discourse as the
foundation on which newly acquired knowledge is built.
The provision of exercises in the form of assignments, projects and
tutorial feedback is necessary. Instructional activities that teach motor skills
need to be graphically demonstrated and the correct practices provided
during tutorials. Instructional activities for inculcating change in attitude
and behavior should create interest and demonstrate need and benefits
gained by adopting the required change. Information on the adoption and
procedures for practice of new attitudes may then be introduced.
Teaching and learning at a distance eliminates interactive
communication cues, such as pauses, intonation and gestures, associated
with the face-to-face method of teaching. This is particularly so with the
exclusive use of print media. Instructional activities built into the
instructional repertoire provide this missing interaction between the
student and the teacher. Therefore, the use of instructional activities to
affect better distance teaching is not optional, but mandatory.
Our team of successful writers and authors has tried to reduce this.
 Divide and to bring this Self Instructional Material as the best teaching
and communication tool. Instructional activities are varied in order to assess
the different facets of the domains of learning.
Distance education teaching repertoire involves extensive use of self-
instructional materials, be they print or otherwise. These materials are
designed to achieve certain pre-determined learning outcomes, namely goals
and objectives that are contained in an instructional plan. Since the teaching
process is affected over a distance, there is need to ensure that students actively
participate in their learning by performing specific tasks that help them to
understand the relevant concepts. Therefore, a set of exercises is built into the
teaching repertoire in order to link what students and tutors do in the
framework of the course outline. These could be in the form of students'
assignments, a research project or a science practical exercise. Examples of
instructional activities in distance education are too numerous to list.
Instructional activities, when used in this context, help to motivate students,
guide and measure students' performance (continuous assessment)
PREFACE
We have put in lots of hard work to make this book as user-friendly
as possible, but we have not sacrificed quality. Experts were involved in
preparing the materials. However, concepts are explained in easy language
for you. We have included may tables and examples for easy understanding.
We sincerely hope this book will help you in every way you expect.
All the best for your studies from our team!
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Contents

BLOCK 1: BASICS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Finance, Financial Management, Scope of Financial Management,
Finance and Management Functions, Objectives of Financial
Management, Role and Functions of Finance Manager, Changing
Role of Finance Manger, Organization of Finance Function, Liquidity
and Profitability, Financial Management and Accounting, Financial
Management and Economics, Financial Management-Science or Art,
Significance of Financial Management, Strategic Financial
Management, Techniques of Financial Management
UNIT 2 SOURCES OF LONG -TERM FINANCE
Introduction, Types of Capital, Equity Capital, Preference Capital,
Debenture capital, Term Loan, Convertibles, Warrants, Leasing,
Hire-Purchase, Initial Public offer, Rights Issue, Private Placement

BLOCK 2: COST OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE

UNIT 1 COST OF CAPITAL

Concept of Cash Capital, Elements of Cost of Capital, Classification of
Cost of Capital, Opportunity Cost of Capital, Trading on Equity
UNIT 2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE THEORIES
Introduction to Capital Structure, Factors affecting capital structure,
Features of an optimal capital structure, Capital Structure Theories,
CAPM and Capital Structure, Adjusted Present Value
BLOCK 3: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND INVESTMENT

UNIT 1 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-I

Introduction, Meaning and Definition of Working Capital, Types of
Working Capital, Factors Affecting Working Capital / Determinants
of Working Capital, Operating Working Capital Cycle, Working
Capital Requirements, Estimating Working Capital Needs and
Financing Current Assets, Capital Structure Decisions, Leverages
UNIT 2 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-II
Inventory Management, Purpose of holding inventories, Types of
Inventories, Inventory Management Techniques, Pricing of
inventories, Receivables Management, Purpose of receivables, Cost
of maintaining receivables, Monitoring Receivable, Cash
Management, Reasons for holding cash, Factors for efficient cash
management
UNIT 3 INVESTMENTS AND FUND
Meaning of Capital Budgeting, Principles of Capital Budgeting, Kinds
of Capital Budgeting Proposals, Kinds of Capital Budgeting
Decisions, Capital Budgeting Techniques, Estimation of Cash flow for
new Projects, Sources of long Term Funds

BLOCK 4: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL PLANNING

UNIT 1 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS

Introduction, Investment and Financing Decisions, Components of
cash flows, Complex Investment Decisions
UNIT 2 FINANCIAL PLANNING- I
Introduction, Advantages of financial planning, Need for Financial
Planning, Steps in Financial planning, Types of Financial planning,
Scope of Financial planning
UNIT 3 FINANCIAL PLANNING-II
Derivatives, Future Contract, Forward Contacts, Options, Swaps,

Difference between Forward Contract and future contract, Financial

Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan after EFR Policy is

Determined
 Dr. Babasaheb PGDF-102
Ambedkar
Open University

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

BLOCK 1: BASICS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT 1
INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT 03

UNIT 2
SOURCES OF LONG -TERM FINANCE 41
BLOCK 1: BASICS OF FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
Block Introduction
Finance is considered to be one of the most important aspects of any
business unit, be it small or large scale unit, every business needs finance and
without finance none of the business can survive and it is because of this reason
the subject of financial management has been introduced in all management and
finance related curriculum.

In this block the whole content has been divided into two units. Unit 1 gives
an introduction to the subject financial management, whereas the unit 2 discusses
about the various sources of long term sources of finance available infront of an
organisation. In unit 1 we will be discussing the main functions covered by the
financial management, we shall also be studying the objectives of financial
management. The role of a finance manager is even very important in the smooth
running of the organisation. He has to regularly monitor the finance condition of
an organisation. He will have to know as to how much funds will be required in
the coming days in an organisation. He has to estimate the funds requirements and
arrange the required funds from different sources. He has to even find the
different sources through which funds can be raised. He has to properly take care
of availability of funds because in absence of funds the whole functioning of the
organisation will come to halt. Apart from this in unit 2nd we will be discussing
the various long term sources of finance availiable infront of an organisation
through which they can meet their funds requirement.
So the study of this block is going to be of great help for the future
managers and entreprenuesrs in laying the foundation of basics of finance into
their minds and giving them an idea of what exactly is this subject all about.

Block Objective
After learning this block, you will be able to understand:

 The main functions of financial management.

 Objectives of the financial management.

 The role of finance manager.

1
 Basics of  The scope of Corporate Finance
Financial
 The Need for Long-term Finance
Management
 Long Term Finance

 Equity Capital and Preference Capital, Debenture Capital, Term Loans,

Convertible Debentures and Warrants

 Risk return ratio of the different sources

Block Structure

Unit 1: Introduction to Financial Management

Unit 2: Sources of Long-Term Finance

2
UNIT 1: INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL
MANAGEMENT
Unit Structure
1.0 Learning Objectives
1.1 Introduction

1.2 Finance
1.2.1 Meaning and Definition

1.3 Financial Management

1.4 Scope of Financial Management

1.5 Finance and Management Function

1.6 Objectives of Financial Management
1.6.1 Maximization of Firm‘s Profit/ Profit Maximization
1.6.2 Wealth Maximization

1.7 Role and Functions of Finance Manager

1.8 Changing Role of Finance Manager

1.9 Organization of Finance Function

1.9.1 The Interface of Financial Policy with Corporate Strategic
Management
1.9.2 Interface of Finance Policy and Strategic Management
1.9.3 Interrelationship between Investment Financing and Dividend
Decisions

1.10 Liquidity and Profitability

1.11 Financial Management and Accounting

1.12 Financial Management and Economics

1.13 Financial Management Science or Art

1.14 Significance of Financial Management

1.15 Strategic Financial Management

1.16 Techniques of Financial Management
1.17 Let Us Sum Up
3
 Basics of 1.18 Answers for Check Your Progress
Financial
1.19 Glossary
Management
1.20 Assignment

1.21 Activities
1.22 Case Study

1.23 Further Readings

1.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 The main functions covered by the financial management.

 The main objectives of the financial management.

 The role of finance manager.

 The linkage of the finance functions with other functional areas.

 The scope of Corporate Finance.

1.1 Introduction
In this unit, the students will be introduced to the basics of Financial
Management. Objective of financial management is the maximization of
shareholder‘s wealth and necessarily the profits of the business. Three basic
functions of financial management are financial function, investment function,
and dividend function. Students will also learn that the role of finance manager
has significantly changed over the years.

1.2 Finance
1.2.1 Meaning and Definition
Finance is an integral part of the overall management rather than the fund
raising activities. It is connected with all financial activities of planning, raising,
allocating and controlling. The scope of financial management is very wide.

4
 Financial management holds the key to all activities. Finance may be Introduction
regarded as a science, for it is a systematized body of knowledge of the To Financial
phenomenon of the payment system. ―Finance is the management of monetary Management
affairs of a company. It includes determining what has to be paid for and when,
raising the money on the best terms available and diverting the available funds to
the best uses.‖—-Paul G. Husings
―Finance has to be co-related with production, marketing and accounting
functions of organization in order to reduce or avoid the wastage of funds.‖ -
Charles Gestenberg.

Check your progress 1

1. Finance has to be co-related with production, marketing and accounting
functions of organization in order to reduce or avoid the wastage of funds.

a. Paul G. Husings
b. Charles Gestenberg.

1.3 Financial Management

Financial Management is an integral part of general management. It
concerns managerial decision making. It helps in allocation of future financial
requirements, allocation of resources and appraisal of financial problems.
Definition of Financial Management
―Financial management deals with how the corporations obtain the funds
and how it uses them.‖ —Hoagland
―Financial Management is the application of planning and control functions
to the finance function.‖ ——Archer and Ambrosio
―Financial management may be considered to be the management of the
finance function‖. —Raymond Chambers
Financial management is the area of business management devoted to a
judicious use of capital and a careful selection of sources of capital in order to
enable abusiness firm to move in the direction of reaching its goals. —J.F.
Bradley

5
 Basics of
Check your progress 2
Financial
Management 1. Financial management deals with how the corporations obtain the funds and
how it uses them.‖ —

a. J.F. Bradley
b. Hoagland

1.4 Scope of Financial Management

Scope of Financial Management:

 Forecasting [estimation of the financial requirements]

 Financing [acquisition of capital]

o Allocation of funds

o Investment of funds
o Raising funds

 Co-ordination and control of funds [capital budgeting]

 Profit planning and control

 Decision Making

o Financial decisions
o Investment decisions

o Working capital decisions

o Dividend decisions

Check your progress 3

1. __________is one of the scope of financial management.
a. money

b. finance
c. Forecasting

6
 Introduction
1.5 Finance and Management Functions To Financial
The important management functions are production, marketing and other Management
functions. There exists inseparable relationship between finance and the other
functions. Almost all business activities, directly or indirectly involve the
acquisition and use of funds.
The finance function of raising and using money although has a significant
effect on the other functions, yet it need not necessarily limit or constrain the
general running of the business.

The functions of raising funds, investing them in assets and distributing

returns earned from assets to shareholders are respectively known as financing
decision, investment decision and dividend decision. A firm attempts to balance
cash inflows and outflows while performing these functions. This is called
liquidity decision.

The finance function includes:

 Long term asset-mix or investment decision.

 Capital mix or financing decision.

 Profit allocation or dividend decision.

 Short term asset mix or liquidity decision.

Finance functions call for skilful planning, control and execution of a firm‘s
activities.

1. Investment decision

 A firm‘s investment decision involves capital expenditure.

 A capital budgeting decision involves the decision of allocation of capital or

commitment of funds to long term assets that would yield benefits (cash
flows) in the future.

Important aspects of investment decisions:

 The evaluation of the prospective profitability of new investments.

 The measurement of a cut off rate against the prospective return of new
investments could be prepared.

 Investment proposals should be evaluated in terms of both expected return

and risk.

7
 Basics of  It also includes replacement decision i.e. decision of recommitting funds
Financial when an asset becomes less productive or non-profitable.
Management
 The opportunity cost of capital is the expected rate of return that an investor
could earn by investing money in financial assets of equivalent risk.

2. Financing Decision
Financial manager must decide when, where, from whom and how to
acquire funds to meet the firm‘s investment needs. To determine the appropriate
proportion of equity and debt is the main aim. The mix of debt and equity is
known as the firm‘s capital structure. The finance manager must strive to obtain
the best financing mix or the optimum capital structure for his firm. Capital
structure is considered optimum when the market value of shares is maximized.

The change in the shareholder‘s returns caused by the change in profits is

called financial leverage.

There must be a proper balance between return and risk. When the
shareholder‘s return is maximized with given risk, the market value per share will
be maximized and the firm‘s capital structure will be considered optimum.
In practice, a firm considers many other factors such as control, flexibility,
loan covenants, legal aspects, etc. in deciding the capital structure.

3. Liquidity Decision
Investments in current assets affect the firm‘s profitability and liquidity.
Current assets should be managed efficiently for safeguarding the firm against the
risk of liquidity. Lack of liquidity in extreme situations can lead to firm‘s
insolvency.

A conflict exists between profitability and liquidity while managing current

assets. If the firm doesn‘t invest sufficient funds in current assets, it may become
illiquid and risky and would lose profitability, as idle current assets would not
earn anything.

The profitability-liquidity trade off requires that the financial manager

should develop sound techniques for managing current assets. He should estimate
firm‘s needs for current assetsand make sure that funds would be made available
when needed.

8
4. Dividend Decision Introduction
To Financial
The financial manager must decide whether the firm should distribute all Management
profits or retain them, or distribute a portion and retain the balance. The
proportion of profits distributed as dividends is called the dividend-pay off ratio.
The dividend policy should be determined in terms of its impact on the
shareholder‘s value.
The optimum dividend policy is one that maximizes the market value of the
firm‘s shares.
Dividends are generally paid in cash. But a firm may issue bonus shares.

The function of financial management is to review and control decisions to

commit or recommit funds to new or ongoing uses. Thus, in addition to raising
funds financial management is directly concerned with production, marketing and
other functions within an enterprise whenever decisions are made about the
acquisition or distribution of assets.

Check your progress 4

1. The mix of debt and equity is known as the firm‘s __________.

a. capital ratio
b. capital structure

2. _________must decide when, where, from whom and how to acquire funds
to meet the firm‘s investment needs.
a. HR Manager

b. Financial manager
3. ___________assets should be managed efficiently for safeguarding the firm
against the risk of liquidity.
a. Current

b. fixed
4. The proportion of profits distributed as _________is called the dividend-pay
off ratio.
a. dividends
b. interest

9
 Basics of
1.6 Objectives of Financial Management
Financial
Management Financial management evaluates how funds are used and procured. The core
of financial policy is to maximize earnings in the long run and optimize them in
the short run. Financial management is an improved resource, mainly capital
funds. The firm‘s investment and financing decisions are unavoidable and
continuous. In order to make them rationally, the firm must have a goal. A firm‘s
financial management may have the following as their objective:

 Maximization of firm‘s profit

 Maximization of firm‘s wealth

1.6.1 Maximization of Firm’s Profit/Profit Maximization

The maximization of profit is often considered as an implied objective of a
firm. To achieve the aforesaid objective various types of financial decisions may
be taken. Firms producing goods and services may function in a market economy.
In a market economy prices of goods and services are determined in competitive
markets. Firms in the market economy are expected to produce goods and services
desired by society as efficiently as possible.

Price system is the most important aspect of market economy which

indicates what goods and services society wants.

Higher demand for goods and services leads to higher prices resulting in
higher profit for firms. It attracts other producers due to which competition in the
market increases. An equilibrium price is reached when the supply of goods in a
market matches the demand for those goods. The prices and profits of those goods
and services tend to fall which has no demand by the society. Prices are
determined by the demand and supply conditions as well as the competitive forces
and they guide the allocation of resources for various productive activities.

Profit maximization implies that a firm either produces maximum output for
a given amount of input or uses minimum input for producing a given output. It is
assumed that profit maximization causes the efficient allocation of resources
under competitive market conditions and profit is considered as the most
appropriate measure of a firm‘s performance.

10
Objections/ criticism to profit maximization Introduction
To Financial
This objective has been criticized. It is argued that profit maximization Management
assumes perfect competition and in the phase of imperfect competition it falls to
achieve its goal.
In the new business environment, profit maximization is regarded as
unrealistic, difficult, inappropriate and immoral. There is a possibility of
production of goods and services that are wasteful and unnecessary from the
society‘s point of view. Also, it might lead to inequality of income and wealth.
Firms producing same goods and services differ substantially in terms of
technology, costs and capital. In such conditions, it is difficult to have a truly
competitive price system and thus, it is doubtful if the profit maximizing
behaviour will lead to optimum social welfare.

1.6.2 Wealth Maximization

Wealth maximization objective is as important as profit maximization. The
operating objective of financial management is to maximize wealth or NPV (Net
Present Value) of a firm.

The wealth of owners of a corporation is maximized by raising the price of

the common stock. This is achieved when the management of a firm operates
efficiently and makes optimal decisions in areas of capital investment, financing,
dividend and current assets management.

The market price of a firm‘s stock represents the focal judgment of all
market participants as to what the value of a particular firm is. It takes into
account present and prospective future earnings per share, the timing and risk of
these earnings, the dividend policy of the firm and many other factors that bear
upon the market price of the stock.
The value/wealth maximization objective of a firm is superior to profit
maximization objective due to the following reasons:

 The value maximization objective of a firm considers all future cash flows,
dividends, EPS, risk of a decision etc. whereas profit maximization
objective does not consider the effect of EPS, dividend paid or any other
returns to shareholders.

 A firm that wishes to maximize the shareholder‘s wealth may pay regular
dividends, whereas a firm that wishes to maximize profit may refrain from
paying dividend payment to its shareholders.

11
 Basics of  Shareholders would prefer an increase in the firm‘s wealth against its
Financial generation of increasing flow of its profits.
Management
 The market price of a share reflects the shareholder‘s expected return
considering the long term prospects of the firm, reflects the differences in
timings of the returns, considers risk and recognizes the importance of
distribution or returns.
The maximization of a firm‘s value as reflected in the market price of a
share is viewed as a proper goal of the firm. The profit maximization can be
considered as a part of wealth maximization.

Check your progress 5

1. ____________is one of the long term objective of financial management.
a. Maximization of firm‘s wealth

b. maximisation of firms's profit

2. __________evaluates how funds are used and procured.

a. management
b. Financial management

3. The core of financial policy is to maximize earnings in the _________run and

optimize them in the short run.

a. short
b. long

4. In a market economy prices of goods and services are determined in

__________markets.

a. competitive
b. good

5. ________maximization implies that a firm either produces maximum output for

a given amount of input or uses minimum input for producing a given output.

a. wealth
b. Profit

12
 Introduction
1.7 Role and Functions of Finance Manager To Financial

A finance manager is a person who is responsible to carry out the finance Management

functions. He is one of the members of the top management team and his role is
more intensive and significant in solving the complex funds management
problems. The finance manager is responsible for shaping the fortune of the
enterprise and is involved in the most vital decision of the allocation of capital.
He/she must have a broader and farsighted outlook and must ensure that the funds
of the enterprise are utilized in the most efficient manner.

 He/she plays instrumental role in the overall functioning of an enterprise.

 He is recognized as an integral part of corporate management.

 He is involved in almost all the crucial decision making affairs because

every problem and every decision entails financial implications.

 He groups activities in such a way that areas of responsibility and

accountability are clearly defined.

 His focus is on profitability of the firm.

 He is in charge of planning, developing strategies and guiding the

management in all financial decisions.

 Preparation of financial planning, planning for investment economic

appraisal, cost reduction strategies, protection of assets and preparation of
annual report and other important issues are looked after him.

 He is also responsible for maintaining good relationship with the banker and
financial institutions.

 He has to fulfil the requirements of periodical payment of interest and the

principal.

 He is also responsible for submitting the regular inventory statements, cash

and fund flow statements to the banker as per the terms and conditions of
the loan agreements.

 He has to take key decisions on the allocation and use of money by various
departments.

 He should anticipate financial needs, acquire financial resources and

allocate funds to various departments of the business.
Since the financial manager is an integral part of the top management, he
should shape his decisions and recommendations to contribute to the overall
13
 Basics of progress of the business. It is his prime objective to maximize the value of the
Financial firm to its stock holders.
Management
A financial manager often finds himself in a dilemma when he has to choose
between profitability and liquidity. Although both are desirable, sometimes one
has to be sacrificed for the other. His central role requires that he understands the
nature of problems so that he may take proper decisions. Apart from this the main
functions of a financial manager are:

 Funds raising

 Funds allocation

 Profit planning

 Understanding capital markets

Check your progress 6

1. ___________is one of the main functions of finance manager.

a. marketing
b. Funds raising

2. A finance manager is a person who is responsible to carry out the

___________function.

a. finance
b. marketing

3. The finance manager is responsible for shaping the fortune of the enterprise and
is involved in the most vital decision of the allocation of__________.

a. capital
b. finance

4. A financial manager often finds himself in a dilemma when he has to choose

between profitability and ___________.

a. returns
b. liquidity

14
 Introduction
1.8 Changing Role of Finance Manager
To Financial
The information age has given a fresh perspective on the role of finance Management
management and finance managers. The role of the CFO has emerged and acts as
a catalyst to facilitate changes in an environment where the organization succeeds
through self managed teams. The CFO must transform himself from aback office
manager to a front end organizer and leader who spends more time in networking,
analyzing the external environment, making strategic decisions and managing and
protecting cash flows. In due course of time the role of the CFO will shift from an
operational to a strategic level. Of course on an operational level, the CFO can‘tbe
excused from his backend duties. The knowledge requirements for the evolution
of a CFO extend from being aware about capital productivity and cost of capital to
human resource initiatives and competitive environment analysis. He has to
develop general management skills for the wider focus encompassing all aspects
of business that depend on or dictate finance.

Fig 1.1 Changing role of finance manager

Financing Decisions
Relationship between Investment, Financing and Dividend decisions

The corporate finance theory has broadly categorized the financial decisions
into investment, financing and dividend decisions. All these financial decisions
aim at the maximization of shareholder‘s wealth through maximization of firm‘s
wealth.

15
 Basics of Investment decisions
Financial
The firm should select only those capital investment proposals whose net
Management
present value is positive and the rate of return on the project exceeds the marginal
cost of capital. In situations of capital rationing, the investment proposals are
selected based on maximization of net present value. The profitability of each
individual project will contribute to the overall profitability of the firm and leads
to creation of wealth.

Financing decisions
In general, the financing of capital investment proposals are done in two
forms of finances i.e. equity and debt. The finance decisions should consider the
cost of finance available in different forms and the risks attached to it. The
reduction in cost of capital of each component would lead to reduction in overall
weighted average cost of capital. The principle of trading on equity should be kept
in view while selecting the debt-equity mix or capital structure decisions. The
relative advantages and risk attached to debt financing and equity financing
should also be considered. The lower cost of capital and minimization of risks in
financing will lead to the profitability of the organization and create wealth to the
owners.

Dividend decisions
The dividend distribution policies and retention of profits will have ultimate
effect on the firm‘s wealth. The company should retain its profits in the form of
reserves for financing its future growth and expansion schemes. The conservative
dividend payments will adversely affect the firm‘s share prices in the market.
Therefore, an optimal dividend distribution policy will lead to the maximization
of shareholders‘ wealth.
In conclusion, it is viewed that the basic aim of the investment, financing
and dividend decisions is to maximize the firm‘s wealth. If the firm enjoys the
stability and growth, its share prices in the market will improve and will lead to
capital appreciation of shareholder‘s investment and ultimately maximizes the
shareholder‘s wealth.

Techniques of Financial Management

The important techniques of Financial Management are summarized as
follows:
Ratio Analysis: Ratio analysis is used as an important tool in analysis of financial
statements. Ratios are used as an index or yardstick for evaluating the financial

16
position and performance of a firm. Ratio is the expression of one figure in terms Introduction
of another. It is the expression of the relationship between mutually independent To Financial
figures. Ratio analysis used financial report and data and summarizes the key Management
relationship in order to appraise financial performance. It helps the analysts to
make quantitative judgment about the financial position and performance of the
firm. There are various ratios which are used by different parties for different
purposes and can be calculated from the information given in financial statements.
The comparison of past ratios with future ratios shows the firm‘s relative strength
and weaknesses. Capital Budgeting Techniques Investment in long-term assets for
increasing the revenue of firm is called ‗capital budgeting‘. It is a firm‘s decision
to invest funds in long-term activities for future benefits that increase the wealth
of the firm thereby increase the wealth of owners. Capital budgeting refers to
long-term planning for proposed capital outlays and their financing. The future
growth of a firm depends on capital expenditure decisions. Capital budgeting
involves large amount of funds, risk and uncertainty and they are of an
irreversible nature. Estimation of cash flow is very important for evaluating the
investment proposals. Capital budgeting results from the exchange of current fund
for future benefits which will occur over a series of years to come. The important
techniques used in capital investment appraisal are as follows:

 Payback period method

 Accounting rate of return method

 Net present value method

 Internal rate of return method

 Profitability index method

 Discounted payback period method etc.

Working Capital Management: In the efficient working capital management
some of the techniques like economic order quantity, ABC analysis, fixation of
inventory levels, cash management models are adopted.

Capital Structure: The finance manager has to decide an optimum capital

structure to maximize the wealth of shareholders. In capital structure, decision-
analysis of operating and financial leverages, cost of different components of
capital, EPS-EBIT (Earnings per Share-Earnings before Interest and Tax)
analysis, ascertainment of EPS of different financing alternatives, determination
of financial Break-Even Point, indifference point analysis and other mathematical
models are used.

17
 Basics of Other Maximization Objectives
Financial
Sales Maximization: The interests of the company are best served by the
Management
maximization of sales revenue, which brings with it the benefits of growth, market
share and status. The size of the firm, prestige, and aspirations are more closely
identified with sales revenue than with profit.

Growth Maximization: Managers seek the objectives which give them

satisfaction, such as salary, prestige, status and job security. On the other hand,
the owners of the firm (shareholders) are concerned with market values such as
profit, sales and market share. These differing sets of objectives are reconciled by
concentrating on the growth of size of the firm, which brings with it higher
salaries and status for managers and larger profits and market share for the owners
of the firm.
Return on Investment Maximization: The strategic aim of a business enterprise
is to earn a return on capital. If, in any particular case, the return in the long-run is
not satisfactory, then the deficiency should be corrected or the activity be
abandoned for a more favourable one. Measuring the historical performance of an
investment centre calls for a comparison of the profit that has been earned with
capital employed. The rate of return on investment is determined by dividing net
profit or income by the capital employed or investment made to achieve that
profit. Return on investment analysis provides a strong incentive for optimal
utilization of the assets of the company. This encourages managers to obtain
assets that provide satisfactory return on investment and to dispose off assets that
are not providing an acceptable return. In selecting amongst alternative long-term
investment proposals, ROI provides a suitable measure for assessment of
profitability of each proposal.
Social Objectives - The business enterprise is an integral part of the functioning
of a country. As such, in return for the privileges and rights granted to it by the
state, the business firm should be made increasingly responsible for social
objectives. The objectives of social accounting include:

 To identify and measure the net social contribution of an individual firm

internally and also those arising from external factors affecting the different
segments of the society.

 To determine whether an individual firm‘s strategies and practices are

consistent with widely shared social principles, e.g. discrimination on the
basis of caste, creed or sex will not be permitted.

18
 To make available, relevant information about the firm‘s goals, policies, Introduction
programmes, performances, use and contribution to scarce resources, etc. To Financial
for example, companies have to disclose their use and earnings of foreign Management
exchange. Relevant information is that which provides for public
accountability and also facilitates public decision making regarding capital
choices and social resources allocation.
Financial Objectives of a Firm - The primary financial objectives of a firm are
as follows:

 Return on capital employed or return on investment

 Value addition and profitability

 Growth in earnings per share and price/earnings ratio

 Growth in the market value of the share

 Growth in dividends to shareholders

 Optimum level of leverage

 Survival and growth of the firm

Financial Management and Accounting

Just as production and sales are major functions of an enterprise, menace too
is an independent specialized function and it is well knit with other functions.
Financial management is a separate management area. In many organizations
accounting and finance functions are clubbed and the finance function is often
considered as part of the functions of the Accountant. But the Financial
management is something more than an art of accounting and book keeping in the
sense that, accounting function discharges the function of systematic recording of
transactions relating to the firm‘s transactions in books of account and
summarizing the same for presenting in financial statements viz., profit and loss
account and balance sheet, funds flow and cash flow statements. The finance
manager will make use of the accounting information in analysis and review of
the firm‘s business position in decision making. In addition to the analysis of
financial information available from the books of account and records of the firm,
a finance manager uses the other methods and techniques like capital budgeting
techniques, statistical and mathematical models and computer applications in
decision making to maximize the value of the firm‘s wealth and value of the
owners‘ wealth. In view of the above, finance function is a distinct and separate
function rather than simply an extension of accounting function. Financial
management is a key function; many firms prefer to centralize the function to
19
 Basics of keep constant control on i.e. finances of the firm. Any inefficiency in financial
Financial management will be concluded with a disastrous situation. But, as far as, the
Management routine matters are concerned, the finance function could be decentralized with
adoption of responsibility accounting concept. It is advantageous to decentralize
accounting function to speed-up the process of information. But since the
Recounting information is used in taking financial decisions, proper control
should be exercised on accounting functions in processing of accurate and reliable
information to the needs of the firm. The centralization or decentralization of
accounting and finance functions mainly depends on the attitude of the Top level
management.

Financial Management and Economics

The finance manager must be familiar with the micro and macroeconomic
environment aspects of business.

Microeconomics: deals with the economic decisions of individuals and firms. It

focuses on the operating strategies based on the economic data of individuals and
firms. The concepts of microeconomics helps the finance manager in taking
decisions about price fixation, determination of capacity and operating levels,
break-even analysis, volume-cost-profit analysis, capital structure decisions,
dividend distribution decisions, profitable product mix decisions, fixation of levels
of inventory, setting the optimal cash balance, pricing of warrants and options,
interest rate structure, present value of cash flows, etc.
Macroeconomics: looks at the economy as a whole, in which a particular
business concern is operating. Macro economics provide insight into policies by
which economic activity is controlled. The success of the business firm is
influenced by the overall performance of the economy and is dependant upon the
money and capital markets, since the investible funds are to be procured from the
financial markets. A firm operating within the institutional framework operates on
the macroeconomic theories. The government fiscal and monetary policy will
influence the strategic financial planning of the enterprise. The finance manager
should also look into the other macroeconomic factors like rate of inflation, real
interest rates, level of economic activity, trade cycles, market competition both
from new entrants and substitutes, international business conditions, foreign
exchange rates, bargaining power of buyers, unionization of labor, domestic
savings rate, depth of financial markets, availability of funds in capital markets,
growth rate of economy, government foreign policy, financial intermediation and
banking system, etc.

20
Financial Management- Science or Art? : Financial management is neither a Introduction
pure science nor an art. It deals with various methods and techniques which can be To Financial
adopted, depending on the situation of business and the purpose of the decision. Management
As a science it uses various statistical and mathematical models and computer
applications for solving the financial problems relating to the firm, for example,
capital investment appraisal, capital allocation and rationing, optimizing capital
structure; mix, portfolio management etc. Along with the above, a finance
manager is required to apply his analytical skills in decision making. Hence,
financial management is both a science as well as an art.

Significance of Financial Management

The importance of financial management is known from the following aspects:

Applicability: The principles of finance are applicable wherever there is cash

flow. The concept of cash flow is one of the central elements of financial analysis,
planning, controland resource allocation decisions. Cash flow is important
because financial health of the firm depends on its ability to generate sufficient
amounts of cash to pay its employees, suppliers, etc.

 Creditors and owners - Any organization, whether motivated with earning

of profit or not, having cash flow requires to be viewed from the angle of
financial discipline. Therefore, financial management is equally applicable
to all forms of business like sole traders, partnerships and companies. It is
also applicable to non-profit organizations like trusts, societies, government
organizations, public sector enterprises, etc.
Chances of failure of a firm having latest technology, sophisticated
machinery, high calibre marketing and technical experts, etc. may fail to succeed
unless its finances are managed on sound principles of Financial Management.
The strength of business lies in its financial discipline. Therefore, finance function
is treated as primary, which enable the other functions like production, marketing,
purchase, and personnel etc. to be more effective in achievement.

21
 Basics of
Check your progress 7
Financial
Management 1. The firm should select only those capital investment proposals whose net
present value is ________________.

a. equal
b. negative

c. positive
2. The firm should select only those capital investment proposals whose net
present value is _____________
a. positive

b. negative
3. In general, the financing of capital investment proposals are done in two
forms of finances i.e. _________and debt
a. loan

b. equity

1.9 Organization of Finance Function

1.9.1 The Interface of Financial Policy with Corporate
Strategic Management
The two important functions of the finance manager are:

 Allocation of funds (investment decision)

 Generation of funds (financing decisions)

The theory of finance makes two crucial assumptions to provide guidance to

the finance managers in making these decisions. These are:

 The objective of the firm is to maximize the wealth of the shareholders.

 The capital markets are efficient.

The corporate finance theory implies that:

 Owners have the primary interest in the firm.

 The current value of share is the measure of shareholder‘s wealth.

22
 The firm should accept only those investments which generate positive net Introduction
To Financial
present values.
Management
 The firm‘s capital structure and dividend decisions are irrelevant as they are
solely guided by efficient capital markets and management no control over
them.

However, the theory of finance has undergone fundamental changes over

the past. It is felt that finance theory is not complete and meaningful without its
linkage with the strategic management. Strategic management establishes an
efficient and effective match between the firm‘s competence and opportunities
with the risks created by the environmental changes.

1.9.2 Interface of Finance Policy and Strategic Management

 Finance policy requires the resource deployment such as materials, labour
etc. Strategic management considers all markets such as material, labour and
capital as imperfect and changing. Strategies are developed to manage the
business firms in uncertain andimperfect market conditions and
environment. For forecasting, planning and formulation of financial
policies, for generation and allocation of resources, the finance manager is
required to analyze changing market conditions and environment.

 The strategy focuses on how to compete in a particular product market

segment or industry. For framing strategy it is considered that the
shareholders are not the only interested group in the firm. There are many
other influential constituents such as lenders, employees, customers,
suppliers etc. The success of a company depends on its ability to survive in
product market environment which is possible only when the company
considered maintaining and improving its product market positions. Such
considerations have important implications for framing corporate financial
policies.
Hence, the financial policy of a company is closely linked with its
corporate strategy.
The company‘s strategy establishes an efficient and effective match
between its competencies and opportunities and environmental risks.
Financial policies of a company should be developed in the context of its
corporate strategies. With the overall framework of the firm‘s strategy there
should be a consistency between financial policies-investment, debt and

23
 Basics of dividend e.g. a company can sustain a high growth strategy only when
Financial investment projects generate high profits and it follows a policy of low
Management payout and high debt.

1.9.3 Interrelationship between Investment Financing and

Dividend Decisions
The finance functions are divided into 3 major decisions viz. investment,
financing and dividend decisions. It is correct to say that these decisions are
interrelated because the underlying objective of these 3 decisions is the same i.e.
maximization of the shareholder‘s wealth. Since investment financing and
dividend decisions are all interrelated one has to consider the joint impact of these
decisions on the market price of the company‘s share and these decisions should
also be solved jointly. The decision to invest in a new project needs finance for
investment. The financing decision in turn is influenced by dividend decision
because retained earnings used in internal financing deprive shareholder of their
dividends. An efficient finance management can ensure optimal joint decisions.
This is possible by evaluating each decision in relation to its effects on the
shareholder‘s wealth.

The impact of taxation on corporate financial management

The tax payments represent a cash outflow from business and therefore
these tax cash outflows are critical part of the financial decision making in
abusiness. Taxation affects a firm in numerous ways. The most significant
effectsare as under:
Tax implication and financial planning: While considering the financial aspects
or arranging the funds for carrying out the business, the tax implications arising
there should also be taken into account. The income of the business undertakings
is subject to tax at the rates given in finance act.

 The weighted average cost of capital is reduced because interest payments

are allowable for computing taxable income.

 Where a segment of the firm incurs loss but the firm gets overall profits
from other segments.

 The income tax act allows depreciation on plant, furniture, and buildings
owned by the assessed and used by him for carrying on his business,
occupation and profession. This deprecation is allowed for full year if an

24
 asset was used for the purpose of businessor profession for more than 180 Introduction
days. Unabsorbed depreciation can be carried forward indefinitely. To Financial
Management
Capital budgeting decisions: The setting up of a new project involves
consideration of tax effects. The decision to set up a project under a particular
form of business organization at a particular place, choice of nature of business,
and the type of activities to be undertaken etc. requires that a number of tax
considerations should be taken into account before arriving at the appropriate
decision from the angle of sound financial management. The choice of particular
manufacturing activity may be influenced by the special tax concessions available
such as-

 Higher depreciation allowance

 Amortization of expenditure on know-how, scientific research related to

business, preliminary expenses, etc.

 Deductions in respect of profit derived from the publication of books.

 Deductions in respect of profit derived from export business.

Check your progress 8

1. __________policy requires the resource deployment such as materials,
labour etc.

a. Insurance
b. Tax

c. Finance
2. The two important functions of the finance manager are
_________________and generation of funds.
a. allocation of funds

b. distribution of funds
3. ___________policy requires the resource deployment such as materials,
labour etc
a. marketing

b. Finance

25
 Basics of
1.10 Liquidity and Profitability
Financial
Management Ezra Solorfion states that ―liquidity measures a company‘s ability to meet
expected as well as unexpected requirements of cash to expand its assets, reduce
its liabilities and cover up any operating losses.‖

The balancing of liquidity and profitability is one of the prime objectives of

a finance manager. To maintain concern‘s liquidity, the finance manager is
expected to manage all its current assets and liquid assets in such a way as to
ensure its affectivity with a view to minimize its costs. Under profitability
objective, the finance manager has to utilize the funds in such a manner as to
ensure the highest return. Profitability concept signifies the operational efficiency
of an organization by value addition through the utilization of resources i.e., men,
materials, money and machines. It refers to a situation in terms of efficiency in
utilization of resources to achieve profit maximization for the owners. Whereas
liquidity means the ability of the organization to realize value in money, and its
ability to pay in cash the obligations that are due for payment. There is an inverse
relationship between Profitability and liquidity. The higher the liquidity the lower
will be the profitability and vice versa. Sometimes even if the profit from
operations is higher, the firm may face liquidity problems due to the fact that the
amount representing the profit may be in the form of fixed assets like plant,
buildings etc. or in the form of current assets like inventory, debtors-other than in
the form of cash and bank balances. In situations where the firm faces the liquidity
problems, will hamper the working of the company which result in lower profita-
bility of the firm. If more assets of the firm are held in the form of highly liquid
assets it will reduce the profitability of the firm. Lack of liquidity may lead to
lower rate of return, loss of business opportunities etc. Therefore, a firm should
maintain a trade off situation where the firm maintains its optimum liquidity for
greater profitability.

Check your progress 9

1. The balancing of liquidity and profitability is one of the prime objectives of
a_________manager.
a. admin c. Human Resource

b. general d. Financ

26
 Introduction
1.11 Financial Management and Accounting To Financial
Similar to production and sales, finance is an independent specialized Management
function, integrated with other functions. Financial management is a separate
management area. Many organisations have one department for accounting and
finance functions and the finance function is often considered as part of the
functions of the Accountant. But the Financial management is something more
than an art of accounting and book keeping in the sense that, accounting function
discharges the function of systematic recording of transactions relating to the
firm‘s transactions in books of account and summarizing the same for presenting
in financial statements viz., profit and loss account and balance sheet, funds flow
and cash flow statements. The finance manager uses the accounting information in
analysis and review of the firm‘s business position to make decisions. Besides the
analysis of financial information available from the books of account and records
of the firm, a finance manager can also use techniques like capital budgeting
techniques, statistical and mathematical models and computer applications in
decision making to maximize the value of the firm‘s wealth and value of the
owners‘ wealth. Considering these facts, finance function is a distinct and separate
function rather than simply an extension of accounting function. Financial
management being an important function; many firms prefer to centralize the
function to keep constant control on the finances of the firm. Any inefficiency in
financial management will be disastrous for the firm, but for the routine matters,
the finance function could be decentralized with adoption of responsibility
accounting concept. It is advisable to decentralize accounting function to speed-up
the process of information. But since the Recounting information is used in taking
financial decisions, proper control should be exercised on accounting functions in
processing of accurate and reliable information to the needs of the firm. The
centralization or decentralization of accounting and finance functions mainly
depends on the attitude of the top level management.

27
 Basics of
Check your progress 10
Financial
Management 1. The _____________uses the accounting information in analysis and review
of the firm‘s business position to make decisions.

a. HR manager
b. director

c.admin manager
d. finance manager

2. The finance manager uses the accounting information in ____________of the

firm‘s business position to make decisions.

a. review
b. calculation
c. analysis and review
d. none of the above

1.12 Financial Management and Economics

It is imperative for the finance manager to be familiar with the micro and
macroeconomic environment aspects of business.
The inverted pyramid of global liquidity

Fig 1.2 Liquidity and Macroeconomics

28
Microeconomics Introduction
To Financial
This is the study of the economic decisions of individuals and firms. It
Management
focuses on the Optimal operating strategies based on the economic data of
individuals and firms. The concepts of microeconomics helps the finance manager
in taking decisions about price fixation, determination of capacity and operating
levels, break-even analysis, volume-cost-profit analysis, capital structure
decisions, dividend distribution decisions, profitable product mix decisions,
fixation of levels of inventory, setting the optimal cash balance, pricing of
warrants and options, interest rate structure, present value of cash flows, etc.

Macroeconomics
This looks at the economy as a whole, in which a particular business
concern is operating. Macro economics explain policies to control economic
activity. The success of the business firm depends upon the overall performance
of the economy and is affected by the money and capital markets, since the
investible funds are to be procured from the financial markets. A firm operating
within the institutional framework operates on the macroeconomics theories. The
government‘s fiscal and monetary policy will influence the strategic financial
planning of the enterprise. The finance manager must also consider the other
macroeconomic factors like rate of inflation, real interest rates, level of economic
activity, trade cycles, market competition both from new entrants and substitutes,
international business conditions, foreign exchange rates, bargaining power of
buyers, unionization of labor, domestic savings rate, depth of financial markets,
availability of funds in capital markets, growth rate of economy, government
foreign policy, financial intermediation and banking system etc.

Check your progress 11

1. ___________ is the study of the economic decisions of individuals and
firms.

a. macro economics
b. micro economics

2. ___________economics looks at the economy as a whole, in which a

particular business concern is operating.

a. micro
b. Macro

29
 Basics of 3. A firm operating within the institutional framework operates on the
Financial ________economics theories.
Management
a. macro

b. micro
4. The ___________manager must also consider the other macroeconomic
factors
a. admin

b. marketing
c. HR

d. finance

1.13 Financial Management-Science or Art

Financial management is neither a pure science nor an art. It involves
various methods and techniques which can be adopted, depending on the situation
of business and the purpose of the decision. As a science it uses various statistical
and mathematical models and computer applications for solving the financial
problems relating to the firm, for example, capital investment appraisal, capital
allocation and rationing, optimizing capital structure mix, portfolio management
etc. In addition to this, a finance manager is required to apply his analytical skills
in decision making. Hence, financial management is both a science as well as an
art.

Check your progress 12

1. ______________is neither a pure science nor an art.
a. finance

b. accounting
c. Financial management

30
 Introduction
1.14 Significance of Financial Management
To Financial
The importance of financial management can be understood from the Management
following aspects
Applicability: The principles of finance are applicable wherever there is cash
flow. The concept of cash flow is one of the central elements of financial analysis,
planning control and resource allocation decisions. Cash flow is important
because the financial health of the firm depends on its ability to generate sufficient
amounts of cash to pay its employees, suppliers, creditors and owners. Any
organisation, whether motivated with earning of profit or not, having cash flow
requires to be viewed from the angle of financial discipline. Therefore, financial
management is equally applicable to all forms of business like sole traders,
partnerships and companies. It is also applicable to non-profit organizations like
trusts, societies, government organisations, public sector enterprises, etc.
Chances of Failure: A firm having latest technology, sophisticated machinery,
highly capable marketing and technical expert, etc. may fail unless its finances are
managed on sound principles of Financial Management. The strength of business
lies in its financial discipline. Therefore, finance function becomes primary,
enabling the other functions like production, marketing, purchase, personnel, etc.
to be more effective in achievement of organizational goals and objectives.
Return on Investment Anybody who invests his money will earn a reasonable
return on his investment. The owners of business try to maximize their wealth. It
depends on the amount of cash flows expected to be generated for the benefit of
owners, the timing of these cash flows and the risk attached to these cash flows.
The greater the time and risk associated with the expected cash flow, the greater is
the rate of return required by the owners. The Financial management studies the
risk-return perception of the ownersand the time value of money.

Check your progress 13

1. The __________the time and risk associated with the expected cash flow, the
greater is the rate of return required by the owners.

a. greater
b. lower

31
 Basics of 2. Anybody who invests his money will earn a reasonable __________on his
Financial investment.
Management
a. dividend

b. return
3. A firm having all the best resources may fail unless its ___________are
managed on sound principles of Financial Management.
a. finances

b. principles

1.15 Strategic Financial Management

Strategic planning is long range in scope and has its focus on the
organization as a whole. The concept is based on an objective and comprehensive
assessment of the present situation of the organization and the setting up of targets
to be achieved in the context of an intelligent and knowledgeable anticipation of
changes in the environment. The strategic financial planning involves financial
planning, financial forecasting, provision of finance and formulation of finance
policies which should lead the firm‘s survival and success. The responsibility of a
finance manager is to provide abasis and information of strategic positioning of
the firm in the industry. The firm‘s strategic financial planning should be able to
meet the challenges and competition and it would lead to firm‘s failure or success.
The strategic financial planning should enable the firm to judicious allocation of
funds, capitalization of relative strengths, mitigation of weaknesses, early
identification of shifts in environment, counter possible actions of competitor,
reduction in financing costs, effective use of funds deployed, timely estimation of
funds requirement, identification of business and financial risk etc.

32
 Introduction
To Financial
Management

Fig 1.3 The elements of Strategic financial planning

The strategic financial planning is needed to counter the uncertain and

imperfect market conditions and highly competitive business environment. While
framing financial strategy, the shareholders should be considered as one of the
constituents of a group of stakeholder‘s viz., shareholders, debenture holders,
banks, financial institutions, government, managers, employees, suppliers,
customers etc. The strategic planning should concentrate on multidimensional
objectives like profitability, expansion growth, survival, leadership, business
success, positioning of the firm, reaching global markets, brand positioning, etc.
The financial policy requires the deployment of firm‘s resources for achieving the
corporate strategic objectives. The financial policy should align with the
company‘s strategic planning. It allows the firm in overcoming its weaknesses,
enable to maximize the utilization of its competencies and mould the prospective
business opportunities and threats to the advantage of the firm. Therefore, the
finance manager should take the investment and finance decisions in consonant to
the corporate strategy. In accordance with the classical management theory, the
financial function of an enterprise has five main objectives, viz., forecasting,
organizing, planning, co-ordination and control. Each of these objectives has its
own range of related themes.
Forecasting

 Demand and sales volume/revenues

 Cash flows
33
 Basics of  Prices
Financial
 Inflation rates
Management
 Labour union behaviour

 Technology changes

 Inventory requirements
Organizing

 Financial relation

 Liaison with financial institutions and clients

 Accounting system

Planning

 Investment planning

 Man power planning

 Development process

 Marketing strategies

Co-ordination

 Linking finance function with other areas

 Linking with national budget and five year plans

 Linking with labour union policies

 Liaison with media

Control

 Financial charges

 Achievement of desired objectives

 Overall monitoring of the system

 Equilibrium in the capital

34
 Introduction
Check your progress 14 To Financial
1. The finance manager should take the investment and finance decisions in Management
consonant to the _______________

a. company policy
b. corporate strategy

2. The _______________requires the deployment of firm‘s resources for

achieving the corporate strategic objectives.

a. financial policy
b. fiscal policy

3. The _________-financial planning is needed to counter the uncertain and

imperfect market conditions and highly competitive business environment.
a. complete
b. strategic

1.16 Techniques of Financial Management

The following are some important techniques of Financial Management.
Ratio Analysis - This is an important tool in analysis of financial
statements. Ratios are used as an index or yardstick for evaluating the
financial position and performance of a firm. Ratio is the expression of one
figure in terms of another. It is the expression of the relationship between
mutually independent figures. Ratio analysis makes use of financial report
and dataand summarizes the key relationship in order to appraise financial
performance. It is used by the analysts to make quantitative judgment about
the financial position and performance of the firm. There are various ratios
which are used by different parties for different purposes and can be
calculated from the information given in financial statements. The
comparison of past ratios with future ratios shows the firm‘s relative
strength and weaknesses.

Capital Budgeting Techniques - Investment in long-term assets for

increasing the revenue of firm is called as ‗capital budgeting‘. It is a
decision to invest funds in long-term activities for future benefits to increase
the wealth of the firm, hence that of the owners. Capital budgeting refers to

35
 Basics of long-term planning for proposed capital outlays and their financing. The
Financial future growth of a firm depends on capital expenditure decisions. Capital
Management budgeting involves large amount of funds, risk and uncertainty and they are
of an irreversible nature. Estimation of cash flow is very important for
evaluating the investment proposals. Capital budgeting results the exchange
of current fund for future benefits which will occur over a series of years to
come. The important techniques used in capital investment appraisal are as
follows:

 Payback period method,

 Accounting rate of return method,

 Net present value method,

 Internal rate of return method,

 Profitability index method,

 Discounted payback period method, etc.

Working Capital Management - Techniques like economic order quantity,

ABC analysis, fixation of inventory levels, cash management models, etc
are adopted in the efficient working capital management.

Capital Structure - The finance manager has to decide an optimum capital

structure to maximize the wealth of shareholders. In capital structure
decisions - analysis of operating and financial leverages, cost of different
components of capital, EPS - EBIT analysis, ascertainment of EPS and
different financing alternatives, determination of financial breakeven point,
indifference point analysis and other mathematical models are used.

Check your progress 15

1. Investment in long-term assets for increasing the revenue of firm is called as
‗__________.
a. capital ratio

b, capital structure
c. capital budgeting‘

36
 Introduction
2. Capital budgeting refers to ________-term planning for proposed capital
To Financial
outlays and their financing.
Management
a. short

b. long
3. The finance manager has to decide an _________capital structure to
maximize the wealth of shareholders.
a. minimum

b. optimum

1.17 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we discussed the scope of financial management. In this unit unit
we came across several important topics of financial management.
In this unit we studied the important concept of wealth and revenue
maximisation It has been also explained that the wealth maximization and not
profit maximization should be the objective of finance managers. Financial
management is all about how a company obtains the fund and how it utilizes in
today‘s world. Scope of the financial management is wide - from the forecasting
the funds to the decision making in investment and finance areas. We even came
across the finance manager‘s role and found that it is not restricted to fund
mobilization and deployment of funds but he works beyond that and plays a
crucial role in strategy formulation, helping the top management in decision
making process, helping other departments like accounting, credit, cash, data
processing and tax and informing them about the day to day activities. We have
even studied the techniques of financial management like Trend Ratios, Cash
flow Analysis, Funds Flow Analysis, Ratio Analysis, Capital Budgeting
Techniques Payback period method, Accounting rate of return method, Net
present value method, Internal rate of return method, Profitability index method,
Discounted payback period method, Working Capital Management, Capital
Structure.
So at the end of this unit the readers would have got sufficient introduction
to the subject and gained a lot about the unit.

37
 Basics of
1.18 Answers for Check Your Progress
Financial
Management
Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-b)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-b)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-c)

Check your progress 4

Answers: (1-b), (2-b), (3-a), (4-a)

Check your progress 5

Answers: (1-a), (2-b), (3-b), (4-a), (5-b)

Check your progress 6

Answers: (1-b), (2-a), (3-a), (4-b)

Check your progress 7

Answers: (1-c), (2-a), (3-b)

Check your progress 8

Answers: (1-c), (2-a), (3-b), (4-b), (5-a)

Check your progress 9

Answers: (1-d)

38
 Introduction
Check your progress 10 To Financial
Management
Answers: (1-d), (2-c)

Check your progress 11

Answers: (1-b), (2-b), (3-a) (4-d)

Check your progress 12

Answers: (1-c)

Check your progress 13

Answers: (1-a) (2-b) (3-a)

Check your progress 14

Answers: (1-b), (2-a), (3-b)

Check your progress 15

Answers: (1-c) (2-b) (3-b)

1.19 Glossary
1. Account Receivable - A balance due from a customer.
2. Accounting Profit - A firm's net income as reported on its income
statement.
3. Accruals - Continually recurring short-term liabilities, especially accrued
wages and accrued taxes.
4. Annual Report - A report issued annually by a corporation to its
stockholders. It contains basic financial statements, as well as management's
opinion of the past year's operations and the firm's future prospects.

1.20 Assignment
Why is financial management more significant for corporate entities than
partnership firms?

39
 Basics of
1.21 Activities
Financial
Management Why is integration of finance, investment and dividend functions necessary?

1.22 Case Study

Visit any company in your areaand discuss the functions of a finance
manager.

1.23 Further Readings

1. Fundamentals of financial management- Dr. Prasanna Chandra.
2. Financial management -Dr. Mahesh Kukris.

40
UNIT 2: SOURCES OF LONG-TERM
FINANCE
Unit Structure
2.0 Learning Objectives

2.1 Introduction
2.2 Types of Capital
2.2.1 Equity Capital
2.2.2 Preference Capital

2.2.3 Debenture Capital

2.2.4 Term Loan

2.2.5 Convertibles
2.2.6 Warrants

2.2.7 Leasing
2.2.8 Hire Purchase
2.2.9 Initial Public Offer

2.2.10 Rights Issue

2.2.11 Private Placement

2.3 Let Us Sum Up

2.4 Answers for Check Your Progress

2.5 Glossary
2.6 Assignment
2.7 Activities
2.8 Case Study

2.9 Further Readings

41
 Basics of
Financial
Management 2.0 Learning Objectives
After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 The Need for Long-term Finance.

 The Important Sources and types of Long Term Finance.

 The Features of Equity Capital and Preference Capital, Debenture Capital,

Term Loans, Convertible Debentures and Warrants.

 Differentiate between all the sources of capital.

 Discuss Risk return ratio of the different sources.

2.1 Introduction
India is geared up to achieve 8% growth rate p.a. Any economy needs
finance to grow as finance is called ―Life Blood‖ of the businesses. Companies
need finance mainly for two reasons – To meet the long-term requirements and for
meeting the day to day requirements i.e. working capital requirements.
The long term decisions of the company include setting up the business,
diversification, modernization, expansion and such capital expenditure decisions.
These decisions are for the long term and it takes a long gestation period to see the
benefits. Since these decisions involve enormous investment and are irrevocable
in nature, long-term funds are best for them. In this, Asset-Liability management
plays a paramount role. Companies should be prudent in meeting the long-term
requirements by the long-term sources of funds instead of short-term sources of
funds. If this is done otherwise, meeting the long-term requirement by the short-
term sources then there would be a mismatch and this would lead to interest rate
risk and interest burden and the company will have to face liquidity risk
eventually.

42
 Sources of
2.2 Types of Capital
Long-Term
Companies can issue three types of capital – Equity, Preference and Finance
Debenture (Loan) capital. These sources distinguish amongst themselves on the
risk, return and ownership pattern.

Fig 2.1 Types of Capital

2.2.1 Equity Capital

Equity shareholders are the owners of the company. After paying a part of
profit to the preference shareholders and other creditors of the company, they
enjoy the residual profits of the company. Their liability is limited to the amount
of share capital they contribute to the company. The benefit of equity capital to
the issuing company is that without any fixed commitment for the payment of
dividends, it offers lifetime capital with limited liability for repayment.
Considering the cost of capital, the cost of equity capital is higher than any other
form of capital as –

 The equity dividends are not tax deductible expenses.

 The high cost of issue.

 The equity shareholders enjoy voting rights, so excess of equity capital in

the company‘s capital structure leads to dilution of effective control.

43
 Basics of 2.2.2 Preference Capital
Financial
Management
Preference shares combine the attributes of equity shares and debentures.
Like in the case of equity shareholders, there is no mandatory payment to the
preference shareholders and the preference dividend is not tax deductible (unlike
in the case of the debenture holders, wherein interest payment is mandatory). The
preference shareholders earn a fixed rate of return for their dividend payment
similar to the debenture holders. In addition to this, the preference shareholders
have preference over equity shareholders to the post-tax earnings in the form of
dividends and assets in the event of liquidation. Preference shareholders generally
do not have any voting rights. They may be entitled to conditional voting rights.

Most preference shares in India carry a cumulative dividend feature,

requiring that all past unpaid preference dividends be paid before any ordinary
dividends are paid. In India, both redeemable and perpetual preference shares can
be issued. Perpetual or irredeemable preference shares do not have a maturity
date. Redeemable preference shares have a specified maturity. In India,
redeemable preference shares are not often retired in accordance with the
stipulation since there are no serious penalties for violation of redemption feature.
The call feature permits the company to buy back preference shares at a
predetermined buy back or call price. Call price may be higher than the par value.
Normally, it decreases with the passage of time. The difference between call price
and par value of the preference share is called call premium.
Preference shares may or may not be convertible. A convertible preference
share permits preference shareholders to convert their preference shares, fully or
partly, into ordinary shares at a specified price during a given period of time.

Preference shares allow more flexibility and fewer burdens to a company.

The dividend rate is less than that of equity shares and it is fixed. In addition, the
company can redeem it when it does not require the capital. Normally, when a
company reconstructs its capital, it may convert preference capital into equity
capital. Occasionally, equity capital may be converted into preference capital. For
example, IDBI in 1994 proposed to convert its equity capital as preference capital.

2.2.3 Debenture Capital

A debenture is a marketable legal contract whereby the company promises
to pay its owner, a specified rate of interest for a defined period of time and to
repay the principal at the specific date of maturity. A debenture is a long term
promissory note for raising loan capital. The firm promises to pay interest and
44
principal as stipulated. The owners of debentures are called debenture Sources of
holders.Analternative form of debenture in India is Bond. Bonds are issued Long-Term
primarily by public sector companies in India. Finance

Debentures are usually secured by a charge on the immovable properties of

the company. If the company issues debentures with a maturity period of more
than eighteen months, then it has to create a Debenture Redemption Reserve
(DRR), which should be at least half of the issue amount before the redemption
commences. The company can also attach call and put options. With the call
option, the company can redeem the debentures at a certain price before the
maturity date and similarly, the put option allows the debenture holder to
surrender the debentures at a certain price before the maturity period.

The interest rate on a debenture is fixed and known. It indicates the

percentage of the par value of the debenture that will be paid out annually or semi-
annually or quarterly in the form of interest. Thus, irrespective of whatever might
be the market price of the debenture, say, with a 12% interest rate, and a Rs. 1000
par value, it will pay out Rs. 120 annually in the form of interest until maturity.
Paying the interest is legally binding on a company. Debenture interest is tax
deductible for computing the company‘s corporate tax.

Debentures are issued for a specific period of time. In India, a debenture is

generally redeemed after seven to ten years in instalments.

The yield on a debenture is related to its market price; therefore, it could be

different from the coupon rate of interest. Two types of yield could be
distinguished. The current yield on a debenture is the ratio of the annual interest
payment to the debenture‘s market price. For example, the current yield of a 12%
Rs. 1000 debenture currently selling at Rs. 800 is -
Current Yield = Annual Interest / Market Price

= 120 / 800
= 0.15 or 15%

The yield to maturity considers the payments of interest and principal over
the life of the debenture. So, it is the internal rate of return of the debenture. The
yield to maturity is the discount rate that equates the present value of the interest
and principal payments with the current market price of the debentures.

In liquidation, the debenture holders have a claim on assets prior to that of

share holders. However, secure debenture holders have priority over the
unsecured debenture holders.

45
 Basics of Types of Debentures
Financial
Debentures can be classified based on the conversion and security. A few
Management
types of debentures are discussed below:

 Non-Convertible Debentures(NCDs)

 Fully-Convertible Debentures(FCDs)

 Partly-Convertible Debentures(PCDs)

Non-Convertible Debentures (NCDs)

NCDs are pure debentures without a feature of conversion.They are not
repayable on maturity. The investor is entitled for interest and repayment of
principal.

For example, ICICI offered for public subscription unsecured redeemable

debentures of Rs. 1000 each. These bonds are fully non-convertible and so, here,
the investor is not given the option of converting it into equity. Interest on the
ICICI debentures willbe paid half yearly on June 30 and December 31 each year.
The company plans to redeem these debentures at par on the expiry of five years
from the date of allotment that means the maturity period is five years. However,
ICICI has also allowed its investors the option of requesting the company to
redeem all or part of the bonds held by them on the expiry of three years from the
date of allotment, provided the debenture holders give the prescribed notice to the
company.

Fully-Convertible Debentures (FCDs)

FCDs are converted into shares as per the terms of the issue with regard to
price and time of conversion. These debentures can be converted into equity
shares after a specified period of time at one stroke or in instalments. In the case
of a fully established company with an established reputation and good stable
market price, FCDs are very attractive to the investors as their debentures are
getting automatically converted to shares which may at the time of conversion be
quoted much higher in the market compared to what the debenture holders paid at
the time of FCD issue. Nowadays, companies in Indiaare issuing FCDs with zero
rate of interest.

Partly-Convertible Debentures (PCDs)

These debentures issued by companies in India have two parts: a convertible
part and a non-convertible part. Such debentures are known as partly convertible
debentures.The investor has the advantage of both convertible and non-
convertible debentures combined into one debenture. For example, Proctor and
46
Gamble Ltd (PandG) issued 4, 00,960 PCDs of Rs. 200 each to its existing Sources of
shareholders in July 1991. Each PCCD has two parts: convertible portion of Rs. Long-Term
65 each to be converted into one equity share of Rs. 10 each at a premium of Rs. Finance

55 per share at the end of 18 months from the date of allotment and non-
convertible portion of Rs. 135 payable in three equal instalments on the expiry of
6th, 7th and 8th years from the date of allotment.

Advantages of Debentures

 Is a cheaper source of finance because, investors consider debentures as a

less risky investment and therefore require a lower rate of return and interest
payments are tax deductible.

 Since debenture holders do not carry voting rights, debenture issue does not
cause dilution of ownership.

 Debenture holders do not have share in extra ordinary earnings of the

company. So the payments are limited to interest.

 In the periods of high inflation, debenture issue benefits the company. Its
commitment of paying interest and principal which are fixed decline in real
terms.

Disadvantages of Debentures

 Debentures carry legal obligation of interest and principal payment, which,

if not paid, can force the company into liquidation.

 In the case of companies which have fluctuating sales and earnings,

debentures prove to be disadvantageous due to increased financial leverage.

 At the time of maturity, debenture involves substantial cash outflows.

2.2.4 Term Loans

Apart from Debentures or Bonds, Term Loans is another major source of
debt finance. Term loans are sources of long term debt and are obtained from
banks and financial institutes like IDBI, ICICI etc. As term loans are obtained for
financing large projects, this method of financing is also called project financing.

Term Loans have a maturity of more than one year but less than ten years.
Term loans provided by FIs generally have maturity of 6 to 10 years while the
ones provided by banks have maturity of around 3 to 5 years.

47
 Basics of Term loans are negotiated by a firm directly with abank or FI, thereby
Financial making term loans aprivate placement unlike debentures that are placed for public
Management subscription. This gives term loans the advantage of low loan raising cost as well
as ease of negotiation. Also, as term loans need not be underwritten, they also
avoid commission and other related costs.

Security is always guaranteed in case of term loans. Primary Security

secures the term loans specifically by using the assets obtained from term loan
funds. Secondary or Collateral Security is used to secure the term loans generally
by using the company‘s current or future assets. Fixed or Floating charge can be
created against the firm‘s assets.
In case of fixed charge, the firm needs to pay stamp duty of around 10.5%
of the loan amount while for floating charge; it needs to pay stamp duty of only
0.5%.

Other than asset security, the FIs impose a number of restrictive covenants
on the borrowing firms. Some of these covenants include ensuring that the firm
maintains its minimum asset base by maintaining minimum capital position in
terms of minimum current ratio. The firm may also be required to reduce its debt-
equity ratio by issuing additional equity and preference capital. The lender can
also restrain the borrowing company from incurring additional debt or even
repaying existing loan. The cash outflows of the firm may also be restricted by
restricting dividends or any other capital expenditure. Term loans have a provision
for appointing anominee director by FIs. The role of this nominee director is to
safeguard the interests of the FIs without causing any interference.
FIs provide heavy loan assistance to the companies due to which the
financial stake of these institutions is substantial. As a result, these FIs had an
option of converting the part of rupee loan into equity, the terms and conditions of
which are decide by FIs themselves.
The schedule for paying the interest and principal is called the repayment
schedule or loan amortization.Interest charges are tax deductible. In India, the
general rate of interest on term loans is above 14-15 percent. However, loans at
concessional interest rates are also available for projects in backward areas. In
India, amortization is executed by repayment of principal in equal instalments and
paying the interest on the outstanding (unpaid) loan. This result in the decline of
interest payments over the years and also, the total loan payment will not be the
same for each period. Repaying the loans in instalments saves the company from
paying huge amounts at the end of the maturity. Such payments are termed as
balloon payments.
48
 For example, let‘s say an airline company has taken a term loan of Rs. 5 Sources of
crores for a period of 9 years from a FI. The interest rate charged will be 15% p.a. Long-Term
on the outstanding balance. That means the principal shall be repaid in nine equal Finance
year-end instalments. Now, the payment schedule will include both, the interest as
well as the principal payment. The interest calculation will be on the outstanding
loan amount. As the amount was borrowed at the beginning of the first year, the
interest at the end of the year will be

0.15 X 2, 00, 00,000 = 30, 00,000

The instalments on the principal will be

2, 00, 00,000 / 9 = 22, 22,222.22

Thus, at the end of first year, the loan balance will be

2, 00, 00,000 - 22, 22,222.22 = 1, 77, 77,777.78

This balance will be used to calculate the interest rate for next year.

2.2.5 Convertibles
A debenture that can be changed into a specified number of ordinary shares
at the option of the owner is known as a convertible debenture. As a result, this
debenture not only promises the investor a fixed income associated with it, but
also the capital gains associated with the equity share once the owner has
exercised its conversion option. Due to this combination of capital gains and fixed
income, convertibles are also called as a hybrid security.
Whenever a company issues convertibles, it specifies the terms of
conversion like the number of equity shares in return of the convertible debenture,
the price of conversion and also the place and time of conversion option
execution.
The number of equity shares that an investor can receive on exchange of his
convertible debenture is called conversion ratio. Likewise, the price paid for the
equity share at the time of conversion is the conversion price. The conversion
ratio can be found out easily if the par value of the convertible security and its
conversion price is known –

Conversion Ratio = Par value of convertible debenture / Conversion Price

In India, generally both, the conversion ratio and the conversion price are
specified by the companies. The ways in which the conversion price is set in
developed capital markets like that of USA and in a developing market like India

49
 Basics of is different. In India, the conversion price is set much below the share‘s market
Financial price prevailing at the time of issue whereas in USA, it is set much above the
Management share‘s prevailing market price.

The buyers of convertibles are safeguarded against the dilution arising due
to share split or bonus share issue.

The valuation of convertible debentures combines both fixed income

securities as well as ordinary shares. This makes the valuation of convertible
debentures more complex than that of non-convertible securities. Thus, the market
value of the convertible debenture depends on market price of a share, conversion
value and also the value of non-convertible or straight debenture known as
investment value.

The conversion value of a convertible debenture is the product of

conversion ratio and the market price of the ordinary share. i.e.

Conversion Value = Conversion Ratio X Share Price

For example, the conversion ratio for the convertible debenture of a
company is 2 and the market price of its share is Rs. 150, then

Conversion value = 2 X 150

= Rs. 300

The non-convertible debenture (NCD) is also known as a straight debenture.

The value of NCD is the value of convertible debenture without the feature of
conversion. This value of the convertible is known as the investment value or the
security value. It is equal to the sum of the present value of future interest
payments and principal redemption at the required rate of return.

Need for issuing convertible debentures

 The main idea of issuing convertible debenture is to make the issue

attractive so that it is fully subscribed. Generally, fixed interest convertible
debentures are preferred over non-convertible because it entitles to earn a
definite, fixed income with the chance of making capital gains. So the
convertibility feature becomes attractive.

 When the company issues a convertible debenture, the company is

effectively selling ordinary shares in future. This is done when the company
considers the current market price of its share to be low, but wants to issue
shares at a higher price. It is done by setting the conversion price higher
than the ordinary share‘s prevailing market price.

50
 The company issues convertible debenture as a deferred equity financing to Sources of
avoid immediate dilution of the earnings per share. For this, the company Long-Term

uses fixed income security and does not increase the number of issued Finance

shares until its investment starts paying off.

 The company may issue convertible debentures over equity financing since
it is a cheaper source of finance. The company can use such funds to finance
a large expansion, modernization or diversification project. By doing so, the
convertible debenture holders, who initially provided cheap funds to the
company can now convert their debentures into ordinary shares and
participate in the prosperity of the company.

2.2.6 Warrants
A warrant allows the purchaser to buy a fixed number of ordinary shares at a
particular price during a specified period. Warrants are issued along with
debentures as ‗sweeteners‘. Nowadays warrants are issued by big, profitable
companies as a part of a major financing package. Warrants can be used along
with ordinary or preference shares, to improve the marketability of the issue.

The exercise price of a warrant is the price at which its holder can buy the
issuing firm‘s ordinary shares. The exercise ratio is the number of ordinary shares
that can be bought at the exercise price per warrant. This concept is like the
conversion ratio in case of the convertible securities. If the exercise ratio is 1:1,
that means the holder of warrants is allowed to buy one ordinary share in
exchange for one warrant at the exercise price.

The expiration date is the date when the option to purchase ordinary shares
in exchange for warrants expires. Normally, the life of warrants is between 5 and
10 years. However, some warrants are perpetual-they do not have any expiration
date.

A warrant can either be detachable or non-detachable. When the warrant is

sold separately from the debenture or preference share to which it was originally
attached, it is called adetachable warrant. A non-detachable warrant cannot be
sold separately from the debenture to which it was originally attached.

Warrants entitle to buy ordinary shares. So, the holders of warrants are the
shareholders of the company until they exercise their options. As a result, they do
not enjoy right to vote or receive dividends. They become the company‘s ordinary
shareholders, once they exercise their warrants and purchase ordinary shares.

51
 Basics of 2.2.7 Leasing
Financial Leasing method of long term source of finance has become very common
Management
among the manufacturing companies. Leasing facility is usually provided through
the mediation of leasing companies who buy the required plant and machinery
from its manufacturer and lease it to the company that needs it for a specified
period on payment of an annual rent. For this purpose a proper lease agreement is
made between the lessor (leasing company) and lessee (the company hiring the
asset). Such agreement usually provides for the purchase of the machinery by the
lessee at the end of the lease period at a mutually agreed and specified price. It
may be noted that the ownership remains with the leasing company during the
lease period. Sometimes, a company, to meet its financial requirements, may sell
its own existing fixed asset (machinery or building) to a leasing company at the
current market price on the condition that the leasing company shall lease the
asset back to selling company for a specified period. Such an arrangement is
known as ‗Sell and Lease Back‘. The company in such arrangement gets the funds
without having to part with the possession of the asset involved which it continues
to use on payment of annual rent for the lease. It may be noted that in any type of
leasing agreement, the lease rent includes an element of interest besides the
expenses and profits of the leasing company. In fact, the leasing company must
earn a reasonable return on its investment in lease asset. The leasing business in
India started, in seventies when the first leasing company of India was promoted
by Chitambaram Group in 1973 in Chennai. The Twentieth Century Finance
Company and four other finance companies joined the fray during eighties. Now
their number is very large and leasing has emerged as an important source. It is
very helpful for the small and medium sized undertakings, which have limited
financial resources.

2.2.8 Hire Purcahse

Hire purchase is a form of instalment credit. Hire purchase is similar to
leasing, with the exception that ownership of the goods passes to the hire purchase
customer on payment of the final credit instalment, whereas a lessee never
becomes the owner of the goods.

Hire purchase agreements usually involve a finance house.

i) The supplier sells the goods to the finance house.

ii) The supplier delivers the goods to the customer who will eventually
purchase them.

52
iii) The hire purchase arrangement existsbetween the finance house and the Sources of
Long-Term
customer.
Finance
The finance house will always insist that the hirer should pay a deposit
towards the purchase price. The size of the deposit will depend on the finance
company's policy and its assessment of the hirer. This is in contrast to a finance
lease, where the lessee might not be required to make any large initial payment.
An industrial or commercial business can use hire purchase as a source of
finance. With industrial hire purchase, abusiness customer obtains hire purchase
finance from a finance house in order to purchase the fixed asset. Goods bought
by businesses on hire purchase include company vehicles, plant and machinery,
office equipment and farming machinery.

2.2.9 Initial Public Offer

When a company reaches a certain stage in its growth, it may decide to issue
stock, or go public, with an initial public offering (IPO). The goal may be to raise
capital, to provide liquidity for the existing shareholders, or a number of other
reasons.
Any company planning an IPO must register its offering with the Securities
and Exchange Commission (SEC).
In most cases, the company works with an investment bank, which
underwrites the offering. That means marketing the share being offered to the
public at a set with the expectation of making a profit.

2.2.10 Rights Issues

The following definition have been provided by the Chartered Institute for
Management Accountants (CIMA): A Rights issue is the raising of new capital by
giving existing shareholders the right to subscribe to new shares and debentures in
proportion to their current holdings. These shares are usually issued at a discount
to the market price. A shareholder not wishing to take up a rights issue may sell
the rights.

The advantages to rights issues are as follows:

 Rights issues are cheaper than offers for sale to the general public.

 This is partly because no prospectus is required but also because the

administration is simpler and the underwriting costsare less. An offer for

53
 Basics of sale is a means of selling share to the public at large based on information
Financial held in a prospectus. Underwriters are financial institutions which agree (in
Management exchange for a fee) to buy any unsubscribed shares at the issue price.

 Rights issues are more beneficial to existing shareholders than issues to the
general public. New shares issued at a discount to the market price to make
them more attractive to investors.

 Relative voting rights are unchanged as long as all the investors take up
their rights.

 The finance raised may be used to reduce gearing by paying off long term
debt.

2.2.11 Private Placement

Definition:
The sale of securities to a relatively small number of select investors as a
way of raising capital. Investors involved in private placements are usually large
banks, mutual funds, insurance companies and pension funds. Private placement is
the opposite of a public issue, in which securities are made available for sale on
the open market.
Since a private placement is offered to a few, select individuals, the
placement does not have to be registered with the Securities and Exchange
Commission. In many cases, detailed financial information is not disclosed and a
need for a prospectus is waived. Finally, since the placements are private rather
than public, the average investor is only made aware of the placement after it has
occurred.

Check your progress 1

1. _______________combine the attributes of equity shares and debentures

a. bonds c. bonus shares

b. equity shares d. Preference shares

54
 Sources of
2. A ___________is a marketable legal contract whereby the company promises
Long-Term
to pay its owner, a specified rate of interest for a defined period of time.
Finance
a. shares c. debenture

b. bond d. equity
3. __________are pure debentures without a feature of conversion.

a. NCDs
b. FCDs

4. ___________are converted into shares as per the terms of the issue with
regard to price and time of conversion.

a. NCDs
b. FCDs
5. A _____________-that can be changed into a specified number of ordinary
shares at the option of the owner is known as a convertible debenture.

a. bonds c. debenture
b. share

2.3 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we studied the importance of finanace in business and about the
various sources exposed to a business through which funds could be arranged.

We studied in this unit that finance is the life blood of a company.

Companies need finance mainly for two reasons – To meet the long-term
requirements and for meeting the day to day requirements i.e. working capital
requirements. We even studied about the various sources of finance. We studied
that the long term decisions of the company comprise of setting up the business,
diversification, modernization, expansion and such capital expenditure decisions.
These decisions are for the long term and it takes a long development period to
see the benefits.We have seen two projects in this chapter which shows the
different sources of financing for the long-term investments in the company.
There are different sources of long-term financing. They are - Issue of Securities,
Term Loans, Internal Accruals, Suppliers credit schemes, Equipment financing.
Equity shareholders are the owners of the company. After paying the part of profit
to the preference shareholders and other creditors of the company, they enjoy the
remaining profits of the company. The preference shareholders earn a fixed rate of
55
 Basics of return for their dividend payment similar to the debenture holders. In addition to
Financial this, the preference shareholders have preference over equity shareholders to the
Management post-tax earnings in the form of dividends and assets in the event of liquidation. A
debenture is a long term promissory note for raising loan capital. The firm
guarantees to pay interest and principal as fixed. The owners of debentures are
called debenture holders. There are three types of debentures - Non-Convertible
debentures (NCDs), Fully-Convertible Debentures (FCDs) and Partly-Convertible
Debentures (PCDs).
So after going through this unit the readers would have got the sufficient
information about financial management and this unit and this would be of great
help for them in understanding tht basics concepts of financial management.

2.4 Answers for Check Your Progress

Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-d), (2-c), (3-a), (4-b), (5-c)

2.5 Glossary
1. Convertible Currency - A currency that may be readily exchanged for
other currencies.
2. Convertible Security - A security, usually abond or preferred stock, that is
exchangeable at the option of the holder for the common stock of the issuing
firm.

3. Debenture - A long-term bond that is not secured by a mortgage on specific

property.

2.6 Assignment
State the different sources of long-term finance in Indiaand explain their
features.

56
 Sources of
2.7 Activities Long-Term
Finance
Differentiate between Equity capital and preference capital.

2.8 Case Study

Study the projects of Jet Airways and Kingfisher airlines and state your
observations about the sources of finance they have used.

2.9 Further Readings

1. Financial management- ICFAI.
2. Financial management – I. M. Pandey.

57
 Basics of
Block Summary
Financial
Management In this block we had a detailed discussion regarding basics of financial
management and various sources of long term finance. Explanation in detail was
made in unit 1 on the main functions of financial management i.e. the role of
financial management, we also discussed the objectives of financial management.
The role of a finance manager is very crucial in the smooth running of the
organisation. He has to regularly monitor the finance condition of an organisation.
He has to calculate the amount of funds required very earlier so that he can assure
timely availability of the funds. He has to even find the different sources through
which funds can be raised. He has to properly take care of availability of funds
because in absence of funds the whole functioning of the organisation will come
to halt. Apart from this in 2ndunit we discussed the various long term sources of
finance through which the long term needs of fund of an organisation can met
easily.

So in short this block gave a very detailed account of information regarding

finance and financial management.

58
Block Assignment
Short Answer Questions
Write short notes on
a. Maximization of Profit.

b. Role of Finance manager.

c. Objectives of financial Management.

d. Equity Capital
e. Term Loans

f. Debentures

Long Answer Questions

1. Explain the profit and wealth maximization concept.

2. Which should be given the importance in the long run?

3. Write a detailed note on long term sources of finance.

59
 Basics of Enrolment No.
Financial
Management
1. How many hours did you need for studying the units?

Unit No 1 2 3 4

Nos of Hrs

2. Please give your reactions to the following items based on your reading of the
block:

3. Any Other Comments

………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………

60
 Education is something
which ought to be
brought within
the reach of every one.

- Dr. B. R. Ambedkar

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

‘Jyotirmay Parisar’, Opp. Shri Balaji Temple, Sarkhej-Gandhinagar Highway, Chharodi,
Ahmedabad-382 481.
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
PGDF-102

BLOCK 2:
COST OF CAPITAL AND
CAPITAL STRUCTURE

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

Ahmedabad
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Knowledge Management and

Research Organization
Pune
Editorial Panel

Author
Prof. Asmita Rai

Language Editor
Ms. Renuka Suryavanshi

Graphic and Creative Panel

Ms. K. Jamdal
Ms. Lata Dawange
Ms. Pinaz Driver
Ms. Tejashree Bhosale
Mr. Kiran Shinde
Mr. Prashant Tikone
Mr. Akshay Mirajkar

Copyright © 2015 Knowledge Management and Research Organization.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, transmitted or utilized
in any form or by a means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording or by any information storage or retrieval system without written
permission from us.

Acknowledgment
Every attempt has been made to trace the copyright holders of material reproduced
in this book. Should an infringement have occurred, we apologize for the same and
will be pleased to make necessary correction/amendment in future edition of this
book.
The content is developed by taking reference of online and print publications that
are mentioned in Bibliography. The content developed represents the breadth of
research excellence in this multidisciplinary academic field. Some of the
information, illustrations and examples are taken "as is" and as available in the
references mentioned in Bibliography for academic purpose and better
understanding by learner.'
ROLE OF SELF INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL IN DISTANCE LEARNING

The need to plan effective instruction is imperative for a successful

distance teaching repertoire. This is due to the fact that the instructional
designer, the tutor, the author (s) and the student are often separated by
distance and may never meet in person. This is an increasingly common
scenario in distance education instruction. As much as possible, teaching by
distance should stimulate the student's intellectual involvement and
contain all the necessary learning instructional activities that are capable of
guiding the student through the course objectives. Therefore, the course /
self-instructional material are completely equipped with everything that
the syllabus prescribes.
To ensure effective instruction, a number of instructional design
ideas are used and these help students to acquire knowledge, intellectual
skills, motor skills and necessary attitudinal changes. In this respect,
students' assessment and course evaluation are incorporated in the text.
The nature of instructional activities used in distance education self-
instructional materials depends on the domain of learning that they
reinforce in the text, that is, the cognitive, psychomotor and affective. These
are further interpreted in the acquisition of knowledge, intellectual skills
and motor skills. Students may be encouraged to gain, apply and
communicate (orally or in writing) the knowledge acquired. Intellectual-
skills objectives may be met by designing instructions that make use of
students' prior knowledge and experiences in the discourse as the
foundation on which newly acquired knowledge is built.
The provision of exercises in the form of assignments, projects and
tutorial feedback is necessary. Instructional activities that teach motor skills
need to be graphically demonstrated and the correct practices provided
during tutorials. Instructional activities for inculcating change in attitude
and behavior should create interest and demonstrate need and benefits
gained by adopting the required change. Information on the adoption and
procedures for practice of new attitudes may then be introduced.
Teaching and learning at a distance eliminates interactive
communication cues, such as pauses, intonation and gestures, associated
with the face-to-face method of teaching. This is particularly so with the
exclusive use of print media. Instructional activities built into the
instructional repertoire provide this missing interaction between the
student and the teacher. Therefore, the use of instructional activities to
affect better distance teaching is not optional, but mandatory.
Our team of successful writers and authors has tried to reduce this.
 Divide and to bring this Self Instructional Material as the best teaching
and communication tool. Instructional activities are varied in order to assess
the different facets of the domains of learning.
Distance education teaching repertoire involves extensive use of self-
instructional materials, be they print or otherwise. These materials are
designed to achieve certain pre-determined learning outcomes, namely goals
and objectives that are contained in an instructional plan. Since the teaching
process is affected over a distance, there is need to ensure that students actively
participate in their learning by performing specific tasks that help them to
understand the relevant concepts. Therefore, a set of exercises is built into the
teaching repertoire in order to link what students and tutors do in the
framework of the course outline. These could be in the form of students'
assignments, a research project or a science practical exercise. Examples of
instructional activities in distance education are too numerous to list.
Instructional activities, when used in this context, help to motivate students,
guide and measure students' performance (continuous assessment)
PREFACE
We have put in lots of hard work to make this book as user-friendly
as possible, but we have not sacrificed quality. Experts were involved in
preparing the materials. However, concepts are explained in easy language
for you. We have included may tables and examples for easy understanding.
We sincerely hope this book will help you in every way you expect.
All the best for your studies from our team!
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Contents

BLOCK 1: BASICS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Finance, Financial Management, Scope of Financial Management,
Finance and Management Functions, Objectives of Financial
Management, Role and Functions of Finance Manager, Changing
Role of Finance Manger, Organization of Finance Function, Liquidity
and Profitability, Financial Management and Accounting, Financial
Management and Economics, Financial Management-Science or Art,
Significance of Financial Management, Strategic Financial
Management, Techniques of Financial Management
UNIT 2 SOURCES OF LONG -TERM FINANCE
Introduction, Types of Capital, Equity Capital, Preference Capital,
Debenture capital, Term Loan, Convertibles, Warrants, Leasing,
Hire-Purchase, Initial Public offer, Rights Issue, Private Placement

BLOCK 2: COST OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE

UNIT 1 COST OF CAPITAL

Concept of Cash Capital, Elements of Cost of Capital, Classification of
Cost of Capital, Opportunity Cost of Capital, Trading on Equity
UNIT 2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE THEORIES
Introduction to Capital Structure, Factors affecting capital structure,
Features of an optimal capital structure, Capital Structure Theories,
CAPM and Capital Structure, Adjusted Present Value
BLOCK 3: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND INVESTMENT

UNIT 1 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-I

Introduction, Meaning and Definition of Working Capital, Types of
Working Capital, Factors Affecting Working Capital / Determinants
of Working Capital, Operating Working Capital Cycle, Working
Capital Requirements, Estimating Working Capital Needs and
Financing Current Assets, Capital Structure Decisions, Leverages
UNIT 2 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-II
Inventory Management, Purpose of holding inventories, Types of
Inventories, Inventory Management Techniques, Pricing of
inventories, Receivables Management, Purpose of receivables, Cost
of maintaining receivables, Monitoring Receivable, Cash
Management, Reasons for holding cash, Factors for efficient cash
management
UNIT 3 INVESTMENTS AND FUND
Meaning of Capital Budgeting, Principles of Capital Budgeting, Kinds
of Capital Budgeting Proposals, Kinds of Capital Budgeting
Decisions, Capital Budgeting Techniques, Estimation of Cash flow for
new Projects, Sources of long Term Funds

BLOCK 4: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL PLANNING

UNIT 1 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS

Introduction, Investment and Financing Decisions, Components of
cash flows, Complex Investment Decisions
UNIT 2 FINANCIAL PLANNING- I
Introduction, Advantages of financial planning, Need for Financial
Planning, Steps in Financial planning, Types of Financial planning,
Scope of Financial planning
UNIT 3 FINANCIAL PLANNING-II
Derivatives, Future Contract, Forward Contacts, Options, Swaps,

Difference between Forward Contract and future contract, Financial

Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan after EFR Policy is

Determined
 Dr. Babasaheb PGDF-102
Ambedkar
Open University

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

BLOCK 2: COST OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE

UNIT 1
COST OF CAPITAL 03

UNIT 2
CAPITAL STRUCTURE THEORIES 36
BLOCK 2: COST OF CAPITAL AND
CAPITAL STRUCTURE
Block Introduction
As we have already studied the importance of financial management in this
curriculum of management. Keeping in view of this we will move a little ahead to
discuss few of the very important topics of financial management.

This ƅlock is divided into two units. The units cover the topics cost of
capital, elements of cost of capital, capital structure.The unit one will ƅe covering
the topic cost of capital in detail.It will explain the readers in detail aƅout the
various elements of cost of capital. Discussion shall also ƅe made on opportunity
cost. Study shall also ƅe made on the various factors that affect the capital
structure i.e whether the capital should contain equity or deƅt or in what ratio the
equity and deƅt ƅe maintained. In the second unit a detailed discussion has been
made on the various theories of capital structure. These theories have been given
regarding the composition of capital i.e what amount of capital should be through
the equity and what should be through debt.

After going through this detailed study the readers would be feeling it very
interesting and confident enough in this topic.

Block Oƅjective
After learning this block, you will ƅe aƅle to understand:

 Concept of cash capital.

 Classify cost of capital.

 Explain trading on enquiry.

 Enumerate and explain elements of cost of capital.

 Elaƅorate on opportunity cost of capital.

 The meaning of Capital Structure.

 Factors affecting the capital structure.

 Theories of capital structure.

 Realize how ƅeta is related to capital structure.

1
 Cost of  Explain adjusted present value.
Capital and
Capital
Structure Block Structure
Unit 1: Cost of Capital
Unit 2: Capital Structure Theories

2
UNIT 1: COST OF CAPITAL
Unit Structure
1.0 Learning Oƅjectives

1.1 Introduction
1.2 Concept of Cash Capital
1.2.1 Definition
1.2.2 Importance

1.3 Elements of Cost of Capital

1.3.1 Cost of Equity

1.3.2 Cost of Realized Earnings

1.3.3 Cost of Preferred Capital

1.3.4 Cost of Deƅt

1.4 Classification of Cost of Capital

1.5 Opportunity Cost of Capital

1.6 Trading on Equity

1.7 Let Us Sum Up
1.8 Answers For Check Your Progress

1.9 Glossary
1.10 Assignment

1.11 Activities
1.12 Case Study

1.13 Further Readings

1.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will ƅe aƅle to understand:

 Concept of cash capital.

 Classify cost of capital.

 About trading on enquiry.

3
 Cost of  Enumerate and explain elements of cost of capital.
Capital and
Capital  Elaƅorate on opportunity cost of capital.
Structure

1.1 Introduction
The cost of capital is an important concept in formulating firm‟s capital
structure. It is one of the cornerstones of the theory of financial management. The
cost of capital is an expected return that the provider of capital plans to earn on
their investment. It determines how a company can raise money (through a stock
issue, ƅorrowing or a mix of the two). Cost of capital includes the cost of deƅt and
the cost of equity.

The main oƅjective of ƅusiness firm is to maximize the wealth of

shareholders in long run. Capital (money) used for funding a ƅusiness should earn
returns for the capital providers who risk their capital. The management should
only invest in those projects which give a return in excess of cost of funds
invested in the projects of the ƅusiness.
For an investment to ƅe worthwhile, the expected return on capital must ƅe
greater than the cost of capital. In other words, the risk-adjusted return on capital
(that is, incorporating not just the projected returns, ƅut the proƅaƅilities of those
projections) must ƅe higher than the cost of capital. Difficulty will arise in
determination of cost of funds when it is raised from different sources and
different quantum.
The cost of deƅt is relatively simple to calculate, as it is composed of the
rate of interest paid. In practice, the interest rate paid ƅy the company will include
the risk-free rate plus a risk component, which itself incorporates a proƅaƅle rate
of default (and amount of recovery given default). For companies with similar risk
or credit ratings, the interest rate is largely exogenous.

Cost of equity is more challenging to calculate as equity does not pay a set
return to its investors. Similar to the cost of deƅt, the cost of equity is ƅroadly
defined as the risk-weighted projected return required ƅy investors, where the
return is largely unknown. The cost of equity is therefore inferred ƅy comparing
the investment to other investments with similar risk profiles to determine the
“market” cost of equity. The cost of capital is often used as the discount rate, the
rate at which projected cash flow will ƅe discounted to give a present value or net
present value.

4
1.2 Concept of Cash Capital Cost of
Capital
1.2.1 Definition
The cost of capital is the rate of return the company has to pay to various
suppliers of funds in the company. There is a variation in the costs of capital due
to the fact that different kinds of investment carry different levels of risk which is
compensated for ƅy different levels of return on the investment.
In operational terms, cost of capital refers to the discount rate that would ƅe
used in determining the present value of the estimated future cash proceeds and
eventually deciding whether the project is worth undertaking or not. The cost of
capital is visualized as ƅeing composed of several elements. Elements are the cost
of each component of capital.The term „component‟ means the different sources
from which funds are raised ƅy a firm. The cost of each source or component is
called as specific cost of capital.

1.2.2 Importance
The cost of capital can ƅe used as a tool to evaluate the financial
performance of top management. The actual profitaƅility of the project is
compared to the actual cost of capital funds raised to finance the project. If the
actual profitaƅility of the project is on the higher side when compared to the actual
cost of capital raised, the performance can ƅe evaluated as satisfactory.
It is an important element, as ƅasic input information in capital investment
decisions, in the present value method of discount cash flow techniques; the cost
of capital is used as the discount rate to calculate the NPV.
The cost of Capital acts as a determinant of capital mix in the designing of
ƅalanced and appropriate capital structure.
The cost of capital can ƅe used in making financial decision such as
dividend Policy capitalization of profit, rights issue and working capital, ƅonus
issue and capital structure.

The cost of Capital differs according to the situation. The different situations
are as follows:-

 Cost of existing deƅentures which are not redeemaƅle ƅut can ƅe traded in
market.

5
 Cost of  Cost of new deƅentures where there is a mention of flotation costs issue
Capital and expenses.
Capital
Structure  Cost of Redeemaƅle deƅentures.

 Cost of new EIS where there is Floatation cost.

 Cost of new EIS using capital asset Pricing Model (CAPM)

 Cost of new EIS on the ƅasis of realized Yield.

Weighted Average cost of capital (WACC) using ƅook values as weights.

WACC using market values as weights

Check your progress 1

1. The _________can ƅe used as a tool to evaluate the financial performance of
top management

a. cost of capital
ƅ capital structure

2. The cost of capital is ______________as ƅeing composed of several

elements.

a. visualized
b. determinant
3. The actual profitaƅility of the project is compared to the actual cost of capital
funds raised to _____________
a. finance the Report
b. finance the project

4. The cost of Capital acts as a determinant of capital mix in the designing of

___________________and appropriate capital structure.

a. Capital
b. ƅalanced
5. __________________cost of capital (WACC) using ƅook values as weights.

a. Weighted Average
b. High Average

6
 Cost of
1.3 Elements of Cost of Capital Capital
Cost of Equity (KE)

Cost of Retained Earnings (Ke)

Cost of Preferred Capital (Kp)

Cost of Deƅt (Kd)

Explanation of all the aƅove elements is as follows

1.3.1 Cost of Equity

The funds required for the project are raised from the equity shareholders
which are of permanent nature. These funds need not ƅe repayaƅle during the
lifetime of the organization. Hence it is a permanent source of funds. The equity
shareholders are the owners of the company. The main oƅjective of the firm is to
maximize the wealth of equity shareholders. Equity share capital is the risk capital
of the company. If the company‟s ƅusiness is doing well the ultimate and worst
sufferers are the equity shareholders who will get the return in the form of ends
from the company and the capital appreciation from their investment. If the
company comes for liquidation due to losses, the ultimate and worst sufferersare
the equity shareholders. Sometime they may not get their investment ƅack during
the liquidation process.

Profits after tax less dividends paid out to the shareholders, are funds, that
ƅelong to the equity shareholders which have ƅeen reinvested in the company and
therefore, those retained funds should ƅe included in the category of equity, or
equity may ƅe defined as the minimum rate of return that a company on the equity
financed portion of an investment project so that market of the shares remain
unchanged.

Approaches

Fig 1.1 Approches

7
 Cost of Dividend Method or Dividend Price Ratio Method
Capital and
Capital As per this method the cost of capital is defined as the discount rate that gets
Structure the present value of ail expected future dividends per share with the net proceeds
of the sale (or the current market price) of a share.
This method is ƅased on the assumption that the future dividends per share
is expected to ƅe constant and the company is expected to earn at least this yield
to keep the shareholders content.

Where,
KE = Cost of Equity
D1 = Annual Dividend per year

PE = Ex-dividend market price per share

Example:-
1. C ltd. has disƅursed a dividend of Rs. 30 on each equity share of Rs. 10.
Current market price of share is Rs. 80. Calculate the cost of equity as per
dividend yield method.

(NP) i.e. Net proceeds per share

( )

Dividend Growth Model

When the dividends of the firm are expected to grow at a constant rate and
the dividend pay-out ratio is constant, this method may ƅe used to define the cost
of equity capital ƅased on the dividends and the growth rate.

Where,

8
 kE = Cost of equity capital Cost of
Capital
D = Expected dividend per share
G = Rate of growth in dividends

NP = Net proceeds per share

Further, in case, cost of existing equity share capital is to ƅe calculated, the
NP should ƅe changed with MP (market price per share) in the aƅove equation.

Loya Ltd. issues 2000 new equity shares of Rs 1000 each at par. The
floatation costs are expected to ƅe 5% of the share price. The company pays a
dividend of Rs.10 per share initially and the growth in dividends is expected to ƅe
5%. Compute the cost of new issue of equity share.

= 15.53 %

Price Earning Yield Model

This method takes into consideration the Earning per share (EPS) and the
market price per share. It is ƅased on the argument that even if the earnings are not
disƅursed as dividends, it is kept in the retained earnings and it causes future
growth in the earnings of the company as well as the increase in the market price
of the share. In calculation of cost of equity share capital, the earnings per share
are divided ƅy the current market price.

Where,

E = Current earnings per share

M = Market price per share

Example:
Riya Ltd. has 50,000 equity shares of Rs.10 each and its current market
value is Rs.45 each. The after tax profit of the company for the year ended 31st
march 2007 is Rs. 9,60,000. Calculate the cost of capital ƅased on price / earning
method
9
 Cost of
Capital and
Capital
Structure

Capital Asset Pricing Model (CAPM)

The CAPM divides the cost of equity into two components, the near risk-
free return availaƅle on investing in government ƅond and an additional risk
premium for investing in a particular share or investment. The risk premium in
turn comprises average return of the overall market portfolio and the ƅeta factor
(or risk) of the particular investment, putting this all together the CAPM assesses
the cost of equity for an investment, as the following:
KE = Rf + Bi (Rm – Rf)

Where
Rf = Risk free rate of return

Rm = Average market return

Bi = Beta of the investment

Example
Rohan Ltd: share ƅeta factor is 1.40. The risk free rate of interest on
government securities is 9%. The expected rate of return on company equity
shares is 16%. Calculate cost of equity capital ƅased on capital asset pricing
model

KE = 9% + 1.40 (16% - 9%)

= 9% + 1.40 (7%)

= 9% + 9.8% = 18.8%
The appropriate discount rate to apply to the forecasted cash flows in an
investment appraisal is the opportunity cost of capital for that investment. The
opportunity cost of capital is the expected rate of return offered in the capital
markets for investments of a similar risk profile. Thus it depends on the risk
attached to the investments cash flows.

10
1.3.2 Cost of Realized Earnings Cost of
Capital
The retained earnings are one of the major sources of finance availaƅle for
the estaƅlished companies to finance its expansion and diversification
programmes. These are the funds accumulated over the years ƅy the company ƅy
keeping part of the funds generated without distriƅution. The equity shareholders
of the company are entitled to these funds and sometimes these funds are also
taken into account while calculating the cost of equity. But so long as the retained
profits are not distriƅuted to the shareholders, the company can use the funds
within the company for further profitaƅle investment opportunities.

The cost of retained earnings to the shareholders is ƅasically an opportunity

cost of such funds to them. It is equal to the income that they would otherwise
oƅtain ƅy placing these funds in alternative investment.
KR = KE (1 – T)

Where,
KR = Cost of Retained earnings

KE = Cost of Equity Capital

T = Tax rate of Individuals

Example:-
The Cost of E/s capital of S Ltd. is 24%. The personal taxation of individual
shareholders is 35%. Calculate the cost of retained earnings.
KR = KE (I – T)
= 24% (1 – 0.35%)
= 24% (1 – 0.35)
= 15.6 %

1.3.3 Cost of Preferred Capital

The cost of preference share capital is the dividend expected ƅy its
investors. Moreover, preference shareholders have a priority in dividend over the
equity shareholders. In case dividends are not paid to preference shareholders, it
will affect the fund raising capacity of the firm. Hence dividends are usually paid
regularly on preference shares except when there are no profits to pay dividends.
The cost of preference can ƅe calculated as

11
 Cost of
Capital and
Capital
Where,
Structure
KP = Cost of preference capital
D = Annual preference dividend

P = Preference share capital (Proceed)

When preference shares are issued at premium or discount or when cost of
flotation is incurred to issue preference share, the nominal or par value of
preference share capital has to ƅe adjusted to find out the net proceeds from the
issue of preference shares

Example
Spice jet airlines issued 20,000 10% preference share of Rs. 100 each. Cost
of issue is Rs.2 per share. Calculate cost of preference capital if these shares are
issued (a) at premium of 10%. (ƅ) at a discount of 5%.

( )

( )

( )

12
Cost of Redeemaƅle Preference shares:
Cost of
Capital
( )

( )

Kp Cost of preference shares

D = Constant annual dividend payment N=No. Of years to redemption

R = Redeemaƅle value of preference shares at the time of redemption,

S = Sale out value of preference shares less discounts floatation expenses

Example:-
( )
( )

D = Coupon rate i.e. Rs. 12

N = Years to redemption i.e. 15 yrs.

R = Redeemaƅle value with 10% premium i.e. Rs. 110

S = Sale Value (Nominal value - discount – flotation cost)

i.e. Rs. 1000- Rs. 5- Rs. 5 =90.

( )
( )

( )

1.3.4 Cost of Deƅt

The cost of deƅt is the rate of interest payaƅle on deƅt capital oƅtained
through the issue of deƅentures. The issue of deƅentures involves a numƅer of
floatation charges, such as printing of prospectus, advertisement, underwriting,
ƅrokerage, etc. Again, deƅentures can ƅe issued at par or at timesƅelow par (at
discount) or at times aƅove par (at premium).

13
 Cost of The cost of deƅt capital is given as
Capital and
Capital
Structure
Where,

Kd = Cost of deƅt (ƅefore tax)

I = Interest

P = Principal
Where deƅentures are issued at premium or at discount, the formula:

Where,

Np = net proceeds
The after tax cost of deƅt may ƅe calculated as –

After tax cost of deƅt = Kd (1-t)

Where, t is the tax rate.

Example:
ABC Ltd. Issues Rs. 50,000, 8% deƅentures at a premium of 10%. The tax
rate applicaƅle to the company is 60% compute the cost of deƅt capital.

( )

( )

( )

Practical Proƅlems with Solutions:

Question:
A Company issues 10% Deƅentures of Rs 100/- each at par. Cost of Issue
(also known as Floatation Cost) is 3% of the issue price. Calculate Kd (Cost of
Deƅenture) if applicaƅle tax rate is 40%.

14
Solution: Cost of
( ) Capital

Before Tax

10.31% less Tax 40% i.e. 4.12 = 6.18%

Cost of Deƅenture newly Issued and Redeemaƅle

Question:
A company issued Rs 100 /- Deƅenture at par carrying coupon rate of 10%.
Cost of issue was 3%. Deƅentures are redeemaƅle at par after 6 years. Calculate
Kd (Cost of Deƅenture) assuming that issue cost cannot ƅe claimed as tax
deductiƅle expenses. Applicaƅle Tax Rate is 30%. Calculate the Cost of
Deƅentures.

Solution.
This Question can ƅe answered in 2 ways:

a) Approximate Kd = Interest (1-t) + Annualized loss on Issue x 100

Average Value of Deƅentures

= 7 + 0.5 x 100
97 + 100

= 7.614%
ƅ) We can calculate more precisely Kd is when we calculate the Internal Rate
Return or
Rate of Discount at which Net Present Value of Cash Flows associated with
the Deƅenture has Zero „0‟ NPV.

15
 Cost of With the help of the NPV know we shall find out the Internal Rate of Return
Capital and (IRR):
Capital
Structure 1% change (from 7% to 8%) gave a change of 4.601

?% change will give change of 2.962

1 x 2.962 = 0.644%

4.601
Therefore, IRR = 10.644% which is the Cost of Deƅenture.

Question:
A company issues Rs 100/- Preference Shares at a Discount of 2%.
Preference Shares are redeemaƅle after 6years at a Premium of 3%. Coupon Rate
is 10%. Calculate KP (Cost of Preference Capital) as precisely as possiƅle.

Solution
We will have to calculate the Internal Rate of Return (IRR) ƅut to know the
approximate range within which the IRR will lie we need to calculate the
approximate KP first:

a) Approximate KP = 10 + 5

6 x 100
98 + 103

= 10.776
We have known the Range is ƅetween 10% and 11% so we can calculate
NPV and further with the help of NPV we shall find out the Internal Rate of
Return (IRR).

1% change (from 10% to 11%) gave a change of 4.207

?% change will give change of 3.622?

Therefore, the Internal Rate of Return (IRR) = 10.861% which is the Cost of
Preference Capital.

Proƅlems for Practice

1. Capital structure of a company is as follows:
12% term loan Rs 3 crores

16
 Equity capital Rs 2 crores Cost of
Capital
Retained earnings Rs 4 crores
Earnings per share and dividend have steadily grown @ 6%. The same
growth rate is expected to continue in future also. Market price per share is Rs 40.
The tax rate is 60%. Calculate the WACC of the company.

2. Capital structure of a company in terms of market value is as under:

Loans Rs 3 crores

Equity Rs 6 crores
Additional Rs 1.5 crores is to ƅe invested next year. Current price of equity
share is Rs 30 ƅut additional equity shares can ƅe issued at Rs 25 per share.
Additional investment of Rs 1.5 crores has to ƅe raised as follows:

Retained earnings Rs 0.5 crores

Fresh equity Rs 0.5 crores

14% loan Rs 0.25 crores

15% term loan Rs 0.25 crores
Applicaƅle tax rate is 60%. The expected rate of dividend growth is 5%. The
additional investment is so planned that at each stage the existing deƅt-
equity ratio should remain unchanged. Calculate marginal cost of capital of
each chunk.
3. Book value of capital structure of a company is as follows:
10 lakh equity shares of Rs 10 each 100 lakhs
10,000 11% preference shares of Rs 100 each 10 lakhs

Retained earnings 120 lakhs

13.5% deƅentures 50 lakhs

12% term loan 80 lakhs

Next equity dividend will ƅe Rs 1.5. This will grow at 7% annually. The
market price per share is Rs 20/-. The preference shares redeemaƅle after 10 years
have a current market value of Rs 75.Deƅentures redeemaƅle after 6 years are
selling at Rs 80. The tax rate of the company is 50%. Calculate:

 Existing WACC using ƅook value proportions

 Existing WACC using market value proportions

17
 Cost of 4. Consider a company whose details are furnished in question 3 aƅove. It
Capital and wishes to raise Rs 100 lakhs from equity and deƅt in equal proportions.
Capital
Structure Retained earnings to ƅe used are Rs 15 lakhs. Fresh equity can ƅe issued at
Rs 16 per share. First Rs 25 lakhs can ƅe ƅorrowed at 14% and next Rs 25 lakhs at
15%. Calculate marginal cost of capital.

Assumptions of Cost of Capital

Assumptions:
Following assumptions underlying the analysis of cost of capital

 Each new investment is deemed to ƅe financed from a pool of funds in

which the various sources of long-term financing are represented in the
proportions in which they are found in the capital structure. For example,
suppose the proportions of equity and deƅts in the capital structure of a firm
are equal. The firm is planning to undertake two investments, in projects 11
and 12 each requiring an outlay of Rs 200 lakhs. The total financing
required is Rs 400 lakhs and this will ƅe raised ƅy issuing equity stock and
deƅentures to the extent of Rs 200 lakhs each. However, ƅecause of some
„lumpiness‟ in the process of financing, the firm would first raise Rs 200
lakh of equity financing at the time when project I is undertaken and then it
would raise Rs 200 lakhs of deƅt financing when project L is undertaken.
According to the pool financing assumption, each process k deemed to ƅe
financed ƅy a mixture of equity and deƅt in equal proportion, though the
specific financing sought at the time of undertaking I, is only equity and at
the time of undertaking I2 is only deƅt.

 The risk characterizing new investment proposals ƅeing considered is the

same as the 5 risks characterizing the existing investment of the firm. In
other words, the adoption of new investment proposals will not change the
risk complexion of the firm.

 The capital structures of the firm will not ƅe affected ƅy the new
investments. This means that the firm will continue to pursue the same
financing policies.

 In general, if the firm uses n different sources of finance, the cost of capital
is where, kaAverage cost of capital

Pi = Proportion of P source of finance

K = Cost of the first source of finance v

18
 Cost of
Check your progress 2 Capital
1. The ________________are one of the major sources of finance availaƅle for
the estaƅlished companies to finance its expansion and diversification
programmes.
a. dividends

ƅ. shares
c. retained earnings

2. The _____________________of the firm will not ƅe affected ƅy the new

investments.

a. Firm Structure
b. capital structure
3. The cost of deƅt is the rate of interest payaƅle on ______________oƅtained
through the issue of deƅentures.

a. deƅt capital
b. Cost of capital

4. The cost of preference share capital is the dividend expected ƅy its

___________.

a. Supplier
b. investors

5. The funds required for the project is raised from the ____________which are
of permanent nature.
a. equity shareholders

b. Preference Share holder

1.4 Classification of Cost Capital

Classification

Cost of capital can ƅe classified in different ways. Some of them are given ƅelow:
1. Explicit cost and Implicit cost
2. Historical cost and Future cost

19
 Cost of 3. Average cost and Marginal cost
Capital and
4. Specific cost and Composite cost
Capital
Structure

1. Explicit cost and implicit cost: Explicit cost refers to the discount rate
which equates the present value of cash inflows with the present value of
cash outflows. Thus, the explicit cost is the internal rate of return which a
company pays for procuring the required finances.

Implicit cost represents the rate of return which can ƅe earned ƅy investing
the capital alternative investments. The concept of opportunity cost gives
rise to the implicit cost. The implicit cost represents the cost of the
opportunity foregone in order to take up a particular project. For example,
the implicit cost of retained earnings is the rate of return availaƅle to the
shareholders ƅy investing the funds elsewhere. Computation of implicit cost
of deƅt: There are certain costs, ƅesides the actual interest entailed ƅy the
deƅt ƅut the company does not take note of it since it is not incurred directly.
With induction of additional dose of deƅt ƅeyond certain level the company
may run the risk of ƅankruptcy. The shareholders may react to it strongly
and in consequence, the share prices may tend to nose-dive. There may ƅe
further setƅack to share values caused ƅy increased instaƅility of earnings
consequent upon unfavouraƅle leverage. The loss in shares values owing to
increased risk and greater instaƅility of earnings is termed as implicit cost or
invisiƅle cost of deƅt capital.

Thus, with increase in doses of deƅt, investors will demand higher interest
rate ƅecause of the increased risk. Alongside in explicit cost, the implicit
cost will also tend to riseas the company will ƅe aƅle to sell tile ƅond at
lower price.

To arrive at the actual cost of deƅt capital, hidden or implicit cost should ƅe
added in the explicit cost. But the proƅlem lies in computation of the
implicit cost of capital. The following formula may ƅe used to adjust hidden
cost of deƅt capital in the total cost of deƅt.

2. Historical cost and future cost: Historical cost represents the cost which
has already ƅeen incurred for financing project. It is computed on the ƅasis
of past data collected. Future cost represents the expected cost of funds to ƅe
raised for financing a project. Historical cost is significant since it helps in
projecting the future cost and in providing an appraisal of the past financial
performance ƅy comparison with the standard or predetermined costs. In

20
 financial decisions, future costs are more relevant than the historical costs. Cost of
Historical costs are only of historical value and not useful for cost control Capital
purposes.

3. Specific cost and composite cost: Specific cost refers to the cost of a
specific source of capital while composite cost of capital refers to the
comƅined cost of various sources of capital. It is weighted average cost of
capital which is also termed as overall cost of capital. When more than one
type of capital is employed in the ƅusiness, it is the composite cost which
should ƅe considered for decision-making and not the specific cost. But
where one type of capital is employed in the ƅusiness, the specific cost of
that capital alone must ƅe considered.

4. Average cost and marginal cost: Average cost of capital refers to the
weighted average cost calculated on the ƅasis of cost of each source of
capital and weights assigned to them in the ratio of their share to capital
funds. Marginal cost of capital refers to the average cost of capital which
has to ƅe incurred to oƅtain additional funds required ƅy a firm. Marginal
cost of capital is considered as more important in capital ƅudgeting and
financing decisions. Actually, marginal cost is the total of variaƅle cost.

Weighted Cost of Capital

The weighted average cost of capital is termed “as the average cost of the
company‟s finance (equity, deƅentures, ƅank loans) weighted according to the
proportion each element ƅears to the total of capital weightings usually ƅased on
market valuations, current yields and costs after tax”.

Capital Structure and Dividend Decisions

Fig 1.2 Capital Structure and Dividend Decisions

21
 Cost of Cost of capital is the overall composite cost of capital and may ƅe defined as
Capital and the average of the cost of each specific fund. Weighted average cost of capital
Capital (WACC) is defined as the weighted average of the cost of various sources of
Structure
finance, weight ƅeing the market value of each source of finance outstanding.
Cost of various sources of finance refers to the return expected ƅy the respective
investors. A firm may procure long-term funds from various sources like equity
share capital, preference share capital, deƅentures, term loans, etc. at different
costs depending on the risk perceived ƅy the investors. When all these costs of
different forms of long-term funds weighted ƅy their relative proportions to get
overall composite cost of capital, it is termed as „weighted average cost of capital
(WACC)‟. The firm‟s WACC should ƅe adjusted for the risk characteristics of a
project for which the long-term funds are raised. Therefore, project‟s cost of
capital is WACC plus risk adjustment factor. The argument in favor of using
WACC stems from the concept that investment capital from various sources
should ƅe seen as a pool of availaƅle capital for all the capital projects of an
organization. Hence cost of capital should ƅe weighted average cost of capital.
Financing decision, which determines the optimal capital mix, is traditionally
made without making any reference to WACC. Optimal capital structure is
assumed at a point where WACC is minimum. For project evaluation, WACC is
considered as the minimum rate of return required from project to pay off the
expected return of the investors and as such WACC is generally referred to as the
„required rate of return‟. The relative worth of a project is determined using this
required rate of return as the discounting rate. Thus, WACC gets much
importance in ƅoth the decisions.
Simple WACC - The simple WACC is calculated without consideration to
the impact of tax on cost of capital. The comƅined cost of equity capital and deƅt
capital is the WACC for a company as whole. If the company is all equity
financed, the cost of equity will ƅe the cost of capital. In case of geared
companies, the WACC can ƅe stated as follows:
WACC = (Cost of Equity X Equity) + (Cost of Deƅt X % Deƅt)

Illustration 1
Good Health Ltd. has a gearing ratio of 30%. The cost of equity is computed
at 21% and the cost of deƅt 14%. The corporate tax rate is 40%. Calculate WACC
of the company.

WACC = (21% X 0.70) + [14% (1 - 0.40) X 0.30] - 14.70% + 2.52% - 17.22%

22
 Cost of
Check your progress 3
Capital
1. ______________cost represents the cost which has already ƅeen incurred
for financing project.

a. Implicit

b. Future

c. Explicit

d. Historical

2. Cost of capital is the overall composite cost of capital and may ƅe defined as
the average of the cost of each specific _______________.

a. Bonus
b. Fund
3. Historical cost represents the __________which has already ƅeen incurred
for financing project.

a. Cost
b. Share

4. Implicit cost represents the ______________which can ƅe earned ƅy

investing the capital alternative investments.

a. Rate of investment
b. rate of return

5. Investors will demand _______________rate ƅecause of the increased risk.

a. higher interest
b. Lower interest

1.5 Opportunity Cost of Capital

When an organization faces shortage of capital and it has to invest capital in
more than one project, the company will meet the proƅlem ƅy rationing the capital
to projects whose returns are estimated to ƅe more. The firm might decide to
estimate the opportunity cost of capital in other projects.

23
 Cost of Illustration 2
Capital and
Western Ltd. has got two project proposals Aand B in hand with limited
Capital
Structure resources to take up one out of it. The estimated returns on capital employed of
two projects are 15% and 18% respectively.
The opportunity cost of capital for taking up Project A is 18%, since if the
funds are invested in Project B, the company will get 18% return on invested
funds. Hence, expected return on Project B is the opportunity cost of capital for
Project A.
Another approach to opportunity cost of capital concept is that the expected
rate of return equates to the market interest rate for investments of a similar risk
profile. While discounting the risky cash flowsat different rates, the companies
will take into consideration different risk premium for different types of
investments depending on the nature of investment. This is usually in the form of
premium on what is considered the ƅasic company cost of capital. The opportunity
cost of funds can ƅe analyzed from the following two angles:

Opportunity Cost of Equity Funds

If a company cannot earn sufficient profits, shareholders will ƅe dissatisfied.
The company will not ƅe aƅle to raise funds from new issue of shares, ƅecause
investors will not ƅe attracted. Existing shareholders who wish to sell their shares
will find that ƅuyers, who can invest in whatever securities they choose, will offer
a comparatively low price, and the market price of the shares will ƅe depressed.
Since investors have added range of shares availaƅle to them there is a market
opportunity cost of equity funds.

Opportunity Cost of Deƅt Funds

Financial management is concerned with oƅtaining funds for investment,
and investing those funds profitaƅility as to maximize the value of the firm. It is
not enough to invest for profit, it is necessary to invest so that the profits are
sufficient to pay lenders a satisfactory amount of interest. If a company cannot
pay interest at the market rate demanded ƅy lenders, the lenders will prefer to
invest elsewhere in the capital market, where they can get this rate. There is a
market opportunity cost of deƅt funds which a company must expect to pay for
new finance.

Marginal Cost of Capital

Firms calculate cost of capital in order to determine a discount rate to use

for evaluating proposed capital expenditure projects. The cost of capital is

24
measured and compared with the expected ƅenefits from the proposed projects. Cost of
The marginal cost of funds is the cost of the next increments of capital raised ƅy Capital
the firm. The costs of additional individual components of finance like shares,
deƅentures, term loans etc. should ƅe ascertained to determine its weighted
marginal cost of capital. The new capital projects should ƅe accepted if they have
a positive net present value calculated after discounting the revenue and cost
streams at marginal cost of capital to the firm. Emphasis is ƅeing placed on
marginal cost of capital, for it is used as a cut off point for new investments. The
concept of marginal cost of capital is ƅased on economic theory that a firm should
undertake a project whose marginal revenues are in excess of its marginal costs.
When the capital investment decisions are taken in consonance of this principle,
shareholder‟s wealth is maximized. The weighted average cost of capital (WACC)
of the firm is not relevant for making new (marginal) resource allocation
decisions. All the projects that have an internal rate of return greater than its
marginal cost of capital would ƅe accepted. Only when the returns of a particular
project is in excess of its marginal cost of capital, can add to the total value of the
firm. The marginal cost of capital of additional finances of a new project will
reflect the changes in the total weighted average cost of capital structure, after the
introduction of new capital into the existing capital structure.

Investment Appraisal and WACC

The cost of capital is a market determined rate of interest,and is the discount
rate or required rate of return which is used for discounting cash flows in
investment appraisal calculations. The overall investment of a firm, in different
projects can ƅe invested, so long as its internal rate of return is aƅove its WACC.

Fig 1.3 Investment Appraisal and WACC

25
 Cost of Figure illustrates that the firm can invest in projects A, B, C and D ƅecause
Capital and their returns exceed the firm‟s cost of capital. The firm‟s value is maximized ƅy
Capital selection of project A, B, C and D. Projects E and F should ƅe rejected, otherwise
Structure
the value of the firm will ƅe diminished.

Marginal Cost of Capital and WACC

The relationship ƅetween marginal cost of capital (MCC) and weighted
average cost of capital (WACC) is explained in Figure. While MCC is less than
WACC, the WACC will fall. When MCC raise aƅove WACC, the WACC will
also show an increase, ƅut the rate of increase is lesser than the rate of increase of
MCC.

Fig 1.4 Marginal cost of capital and WACC - Relationship

Illustration 3
A company is considering raising of funds of aƅout Rs. 100 lakhs ƅy one of
two alternative methods, viz., 1496 institutional term loan and 13% non-
convertiƅle deƅentures. The term loan option would attract no major incidental
cost. The deƅentures would have to ƅe issued at a discount of 2.5% and would
involve cost of issue of Rs. 1 lakh.
Advise the company as to the ƅetter option ƅased on the effective cost of
capital in each case. Assume a tax rate of 50%. (C.A. Final Nov. 1991)

26
 Evaluation of raising (Rs. Lakhs) Cost of
Capital
Rs. 100 lakhs effective
cost of capital ƅased on

Particulars Option 1 14% Term Option 2

loan

Face value of amount 100.00 100.00

less 2.50
Discount

Less: Cost of issue Net 100.00 97.50 1.00

effective
0 100.00 96.50
Amount raised Interest
charges p.a. on face 14.0 7.00 13.00 6.50
value less: Savings in
tax @ 50% Net interest
cost effective cost of (H) 7.22 6.50
capital

X 10C 7%

The main aim of ƅusiness unit is to maximize the wealth of the firm and
increase returns to the equity holders of the company. „Trading on equity‟ helps
the finance manager to select an appropriate mix of capital structure. Equity has
the cost of expectations of the holders, preference capital has the cost of dividends
and puƅlic deposit has the cost of interest. Therefore, it is the ardent necessity to
reduce the weighted average cost to ƅe minimum through which a firm can
increase the return to equity shareholders.

Trading on equity is the financial process of using deƅt to produce gain for
the residual owners. The practice is known as trading on equity ƅecause it is the
equity shareholders who have only interest (or equity) in the ƅusiness income. The
term ƅears its name also to the fact that the creditors are willing to advance funds
on the strength of the equity supplied ƅy the owners. Trading feature here is
simply one of taking advantage of the permanent stock investment to ƅorrow
funds on reasonaƅle ƅasis. When the amount of ƅorrowing is relatively large in
relation to capital stock, a company is said to ƅe „trading on this equity‟ ƅut where

27
 Cost of ƅorrowing is comparatively small in relation to capital stock, the company is said
Capital and to ƅe „trading on thick equity‟.
Capital
Structure The term leverage refers generally to circumstances which ƅring aƅout an
increase in income volatility. In ƅusiness, leverage is the means through which
aƅusiness firm can increase the profits. The force willƅe applied on deƅt; the
ƅenefit of this is reflected in the form of higher returns to equity share holders. It
is termed as Trading on Equity‟.

Check your progress 4

1. The __________is measured and compared with the expected ƅenefits from
the proposed projects
a. return on capital.

b. interest on capital

c. cost of capital

2. The term leverage refers generally to circumstances which ƅring aƅout an

_____________in income volatility
a. increase

b. Decrease
3. Trading on equity is the financial process of using deƅt to produce
____________for the residual owners.
a. Loss
b. gain

4. Firms calculate _____________in order to determine a discount rate to use for

evaluating proposed capital expenditure projects
a. Cost of share
b. cost of capital.

5. If a company cannot earn sufficient___________, shareholders will ƅe

dissatisfied
a. Profits
b. Loss

28
1.6 Trading on Equity Cost of
Capital
„Trading on Equity‟ acts as a level to magnify the influence of fluctuations
in earnings. Earnings per share are a ƅarometer through which performance of an
industrial unit can ƅe measured. This could ƅe achieved ƅy applying the operation
of trading on equity. Any fluctuation in earnings ƅefore interest and tax (EBIT) is
magnified on the earning per share (EPS) ƅy operating trading on equity. It was
oƅserved that larger the magnitude of deƅt in capital structure, the higher is the
variation in EPS given and variation in EBIT.

The effects of trading on equity can ƅe clearer with the help of following
illustration.

Illustration 4
Shriram Company is capitalized with Rs. 10,00,000 dividend in 10,000
common shares of Rs. 1.00 each. The management wishes to raise another Rs.
10,00,000 to finance a major programme of expansion through one of the possiƅle
financing plan. The management may finance the company with
1. All common stock

2. Rs. 5 lakhs in common stock and Rs. 5 lakhs in deƅt

3. All deƅt at 6% interest or

4. Rs. 5 lakhs in common stock and Rs. 5 lakhs in preferred stock with 5 per
cent dividend. The company‟s existing earnings ƅefore interest and taxes
(EBIT) amounts to Rs. 120,000. Corporation tax is assumed to ƅe 50%.

Solution:
Impact of trading on equity, as oƅserved earlier, will ƅe reflected in earnings
per share availaƅle to common stockholders. To calculate the EPS in each of the
four alternatives, EBIT has to ƅe first of all calculated:

Proposal Proposal Proposal Proposal

(B) Rs.
(A) Rs. (C) Rs. (D) Rs.

Earnings ƅefore interest 1,20,000 1,20,000 1,20,000 1,20,000

&Taxes (EBIT)

Less: Interest ------- 25,000 60,000 -----

Earnings ƅefore Taxes 1,20,000 95,000 60,000 1,20,000

29
 Cost of Less: Taxes @50% 60,000 47,500 30,000 60,000
Capital and
Capital
Earnings after Taxes 60,000 47,500 30,000 60,000
Structure
Preferred stock ---- ---- ---- 25,000
dividend

Earnings availaƅle to 60,000 47,500 30,000 35,000

common stockholders

Numƅer of common 20,000 15,000 10,000 15,000

share

Earning per share Rs. 3.0 Rs. 3.67 Rs. 3.0 Rs. 2.33
(EPS).

It is evident from the aƅove example that, proportion of common stock in

total capitalization is the same in ƅoth the proposals „B‟ and „D‟ ƅut EPS is
altogether different ƅecause of addition of preference stock. While preferred stock
dividend is suƅject to taxes whereas interest on deƅt is tax deductiƅle expenditure
resulting in variation in EPS in proposal „B‟ and „D‟. It is also oƅserved that, with
a 50% tax rate the explicit cost of preferred stock is twice the cost of deƅts: When
EBIT is Rs. 1,20,000 proposal „B‟ involving a total capitalization of 75% common
stock and 25% deƅt, would ƅe most preferaƅle with respect to EPS.
It is generally accepted that level of earnings would remain the same even
after the expansion of funds. Now let us assume that level of earnings ƅefore
interest and tax (EBIT) increased 100% or exactly douƅles the present level (i.e.
Rs. 2,40,000 in case of aƅove example) in correspondence will increase in
capitalization. Changes in earning per share (EPS) to common stockholders under
different alternative proposals would ƅe as follows –

Illustration 5

Proposal Proposal Proposal Proposal

(A) Rs. (B) Rs. (C) Rs. (D) Rs.

Earnings ƅefore interest 2,40,000 2,40,000 2,40,000 2,40,000

& Taxes (EBIT)

Less: Interest ------- 25,000 60,000 -----

30
 Cost of
Earnings ƅefore Taxes 2,40,000 2,15,000 1,80,000 2,40,000
Capital

Less: Taxes 1,20,000 1,07,500 90,000 1,20,000

Earnings after Taxes 1,20,000 1,07,500 90,000 1,20,000

Less: Perferred stock ---- ---- ---- 25,000

dividend

Earnings availaƅle to 1,20,000 1,07,500 90,000 95,000

common stockholders

Numƅer of common 20,000 15,000 10,000 15,000

share

Earning per share Rs. 06 Rs. 7.17 Rs. 09 Rs. 6.23

(EPS).

EPS ƅefore additional Rs. 03 Rs. 03 Rs. 03 Rs. 03

issue

It is oƅserved from illustration that increase in EBIT is magnified on the

earning per share (EPS) where deƅt has ƅeen inducted. Since dividend on
preferred stock is a fixed oƅligation and is less than the increased earnings, EPS in
proposal „D‟ increases more than twice the rise in earnings. On the other hand, in
proposal „B‟ and „C‟ where deƅt comprises a portion of total capitalization, EPS
would increase ƅy more than twice the existing level, while in proposal „A‟, EPS
has improved exactly in proportion to increase in EBIT.

It is also oƅserved from the aƅove example that larger the ratio of deƅt to
equity, greater is the return to equity. Thus in proposal „C‟ deƅt represents £0% of
the total capitalization. EPS is magnified 3 times over the existing level while in
proposal „8‟ where deƅt has furnished 1/3 of the total capitalization, increase in
EPS is little more than douƅle the earlier level. This quickly changing of earning
operates during a contraction of income as well as during an expansion.

Magnification of losses ƅy trading on equity: Trading on equity not only

acts as a level to magnify the influence of fluctuations in earning ƅut trading on
equity magnifies all losses sustained ƅy the ƅusiness concern. For example,
assume that the Dhaka company expects to sustain loss of Rs. 30,000 ƅefore

31
 Cost of interest and taxes, loss per share under the different alternative proposals (as taken
Capital and into consideration in aƅove would ƅe as follows :
Capital
Structure Illustration 6:

Proposal Proposal Proposal Proposal

(B) Rs.
(A) Rs. (C) Rs. (D) Rs.

Loss ƅefore interest and - 30,000 -30,000 -30,000 -30,000

taxes

Add: Interest -25,000 -60,000

Loss after Interest -30,000 -55,000 -90,000 -30,000

Loss per share -Rs. 1.50 -Rs. 3.57 -Rs. 09 - Rs. 02

The important conclusion that could ƅe drawn from the aƅove illustration is
that, loss per share is highest under alternative „C‟ where proportion of deƅt is as
high as 50% of the total fund and the lowest in proposal „A‟ where leverage is
zero. This example proved that trading on equity magnifies not only profits ƅut
losses also.
Use of „trading on equity‟: A magic of trading on equity is that trading on
equity magnifies ƅoth profit and loss. A trading on equity is useful as long as the
ƅorrowed capital can ƅe made to pay the ƅusiness more than what it costs. It will
lead to a decrease in profitaƅility rate when it costs more that it earns.

Check your progress 5

1. _______is aƅarometer through which performance of an industrial unit can
ƅe measured
a. Price per share

b. Return on share

c. Earnings per share

2. Any fluctuation in is magnified on the earning per share (EPS) ƅy operating

trading on Equity
a. earnings ƅefore interest and tax
b. Earning after interest and tax

32
 3. Trading on Equityquickly changing of _______________operates during a Cost of
contraction of income as well as during an expansion. Capital

a. earning

b. expances
4. A magic of trading on equity is that trading on equity magnifies -
_________________.
a. loss

b. Profit

c. none

d. ƅoth profit and loss

5. Trading on Equitywill lead to a______________in profitaƅility rate when it

costs more that it earns.
a. Increase

b. decrease

1.7 Let Us Sum Up

After going through this unit we have gained sufficient knowledge on the
cost of funds that we raise for a particular business.
After going through this unit we learnt that concept of cost of funds in
finance is different from that in accounts. Except in case of term loans, it is
necessary to take into consideration market values in case of equity shares,
preference shares and deƅentures. In case of term loans and deƅentures there is a
tax shelter in respect of interest payments. For dividend on shares there is no tax
shelter. For evaluating a project it is necessary to know WACC. On the other hand
the cost of capital can ƅe used as a tool to evaluate the financial performance of
top management. There are different sources and costs of capital - Cost of Equity
(K E), Cost of Retained Earnings (Ke), Cost of Preferred Capital (Kp), Cost of
Deƅt (Kd). There are different approaches to cost of equity - Dividend Method or
Dividend Price Ratio Method, Dividend Growth Model, Price Earning Yield
Model, Capital Asset Pricing Model. We even studied the various types of cost
that are associated with the capital and they are Explicit cost and Implicit cost,
Historical cost and Future cost, Average cost and Marginal cost, Specific cost and
Composite cost. One another types of cost known as opportunity cost was also
discussed here it is the cost forgone ƅy choosing one option over an alternative

33
 Cost of one that may ƅe equally desired. Thus, opportunity cost is the cost of pursuing one
Capital and choice instead of another.
Capital
Structure After going through this unit the students would have understood in a very
interesting way the cost of capital and the various kinds of cost that are associated
with the capital.

1.8 Answers for Check Your Progress

Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-a), (2-a), (3-b), (4-b), (5-a)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-c), (2-b), (3-a), (4-b), (5-a)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-d), (2-b), (3-a), (4-b), (5-a)

Check your progress 4

Answers: (1-c), (2-a), (3-b), (4-b), (5-a)

Check your progress 5

Answers: (1-c), (2-a), (3-a), (4-d), (5-b)

1.9 Glossary
1. Optimal Capital Structure - The percentages of deƅt, preferred stock, and
common equity that will maximize the firm's stock price.

2. Opportunity Cost -The return on the ƅest alternative use of an asset, or the
highest return that will not ƅe earned if funds are invested in a particular.

1.10 Assignment
How is capital structure related to dividend decisions? Explain.

34
 Cost of
1.11 Activities Capital

Why is the cost of term loan deƅentures generally less than cost of equity or
preference capital?

1.12 Case Study

Read the Annual report of Indian Airlines and study its cost of capital and
its impact on EVA (Economic Value Added) and other areas.

1.13 Further Readings

1. Financial Management - Prof. Dr. Mahesh A. Kulkarni.

2. Fundamentals of Financial Management- Dr.Prasanna Chandra.

3. Financial Management - Ravi M. Kishore.

35
 Cost of
Capital and
UNIT 2: CAPITAL STRUCTURE THEORIES
Capital
Structure
Unit Structure
2.0 Learning Oƅjectives

2.1 Introduction
2.2 Capital Structure
2.2.1 Introduction to Capital Structure
2.2.2 Factors Affecting Capital Structure

2.3 Features of an Optimal Capital Structure

2.4 Capital Structure Theories
2.4.1 Traditional View
2.4.2 Modigliani-Miller Hypothesis

2.5 CAPM and Capital Structure

2.6 Adjusted Present Value
2.7 Let Us Sum Up

2.8 Answers for Check Your Progress

2.9 Glossary

2.10 Assignment
2.11 Activities

2.12 Case Study

2.13 Further Readings

2.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will ƅe aƅle to understand:

 The meaning of Capital Structure.

 List factors affecting the capital structure.

 Theories of capital structure.

 How ƅeta is related to capital structure.

 Explain adjusted present value.

36
2.1 Introduction Capital
Structure
The plan that a company incorporates for its financing is referred to as the Theories
capital structure of the company. In other words, it‟s the finances that the
company uses in a long term. As the goal of any company or firm is towards
increasing its value in market, the capital structure of the firm should ƅe planned
or decided in such a way that it adds to the market value of the firm. A company‟s
capital structure can ƅe termed as advantageous if the funds are used in such a
manner that it not only increases the firm‟s market value, ƅut also reduces the
company‟s cost of capital.

2.2 Capital Structure

2.2.1 Introduction to Capital Structure
The capital structure is how a firm finances its overall operations and
growth by using different sources of funds. Debt comes in the form of bond issues
or long-term notes payable, while equity is classified as common stock, preferred
stock or retained earnings. Short-term debt such as working capital requirements
is also considered to be part of the capital structure.
A company's proportion of short and long-term debt is considered when
analyzing capital structure. When people refer to capital structure they are most
likely referring to a firm's debt-to-equity ratio, which provides insight into how
risky a company is. Usually a company more heavily financed by debt poses
greater risk, as this firm is relatively highly levered.

2.2.1 Factors Affecting Capital Structure

A company uses fixed fund sources viz deƅentures, term loans etc. along
with equity capital. This is known as financial leverage. The firms generally make
use of equity to raise deƅts. The numƅer of deƅt units a company holds per equity
unit is called the company‟s deƅt equity ratio. It is calculated ƅy a formula

Deƅt Equity Ratio = Deƅt / Equity

Ideally, the small scale industries must have deƅt equity ratio of 3:1 while
medium and large scale industries must have deƅt equity ratio of 2:1. A ratio of
3:1 indicates that for every 1 equity unit, the company can raise 3 units of deƅt.
Higher the leverage, higher is the company‟s commitments in terms of
interestsand loan repayments. This in turn affects the returns of the equity

37
 Cost of shareholders. Some of the other factors that must ƅe considered while deciding the
Capital and firm‟s capital structure are the firm‟s size, its cost of capital, the way the cash
Capital flows of the company are projected and other costs incurred.
Structure

Check your progress 1

1. A company uses fixed fund sources viz deƅentures, term loans etc. along
with equity capital. This is known as __________.

a. comƅined leverage
b. financial leverage

2. Deƅt Equity Ratio = ____________.

a. Deƅt / Equity
b. Equity / Deƅt
3. Higher the leverage, higher is the company‟s commitments in terms of
interests and loan ______________.
a. Payment

b. repayments

2.3 Features of an Optimal Capital Structure

An efficient capital structure should encompass the following features:

 The capital structure should ƅe such that the dilution of control should ƅe
minimal.

 The use of leverage should ƅe high and at minimum cost leading to

company‟s prosperity.

 The capital structure of the company should enaƅle it to raise need ƅased
funds as well as stop the deƅts from a particular source if they are too
expensive i.e. the capital structure should ƅe flexiƅle enough to sustain in
varying conditions.
The use of deƅts should ƅe minimal as it hampers the company‟s solvency
since the interest rates are very high.

38
 Capital
Check your progress 2 Structure
1. The capital structure should ƅe such that the dilution of control should ƅe Theories
___________.
a. Maximum
b. Minimal

2. The plan that a company incorporates for its financing is referred to as the
___________of the company.
a. Equity Share structure
b. capital structure

2.4 Capital Structure Theories

The two essential components of capital structure of a company are deƅt and
equity. Hence, the proportion of deƅt and equity is very important in capital
structure. In other words, it is very essential to decide the level of financial
leverage to ƅe employed in any company. To decide this, it ƅecomes necessary to
understand the relationship that exists ƅetween firms‟ cost of capital and its
financial leverage. Some of the assumptions that are made to understand this
relationship are

 It is not expected for the net operating income to increase or decrease over
the period of time.

 There is no income tax applicaƅle, neither corporate, nor personal.

 A firm can alter its capital structure at any point of time without even
ƅearing the transaction costs.

 The company can pay its earnings in terms of dividends i.e. the company
can pay 100% dividends.

There are two extreme views on whether there exist any such things as
optimal capital structure.

The Net Income Approach (NI) assumes that the cost of deƅt and that of
equity are independent to capital structure. With high use of leverage, the
weighted average cost of capital reduces, increasing the value of the firm in
totality.

39
 Cost of In Net Operating Income (NOI) approach, it is assumed that the cost of
Capital and equity increases linearly with leverage. As the leverage changes, the value of the
Capital company and the weighted average cost of capital remains constant.
Structure
In Traditional approach, the cost of capital decreases, thereƅy increasing the
value of the firm. This happens till a particular threshold is reached, after which
the reverse happens i.e. the cost of capital increases thereƅy causing decline in the
value of the firm.

2.4.1 Traditional View

Traditional approach is the mid-point ƅetween the net income and net
operating approach and is often known as an intermediate approach. Traditional
view uses a good mix of deƅt and equity to increase the firm‟s value or decrease
its cost of capital. This approach indicates that the cost of capital reduces within a
certain deƅt limit and then increases. Hence, according to traditional view, there
exists a thing as optimal capital structure when the cost of capital reduces or the
firm‟s market value increases.
In traditional view, the way in which the modifications to the capital
structure affect the cost of capital can ƅe classified into 3 steps:

 Initially, the cost of equity ke remains unchanged i.e. constant or rises very
little with the deƅt. And even if it increases, it doesn‟t increase so much as
to nullify the effect of a low-cost deƅt. However, in this stage, the cost of
deƅt Kd remains constant or increases very slightly. Thus, the value of the
firm increases with decrease in cost of capital and increase in leverage.

 In the second stage, the increase in leverage have minimal or no effect on

the cost of capital or the market value of the firm as, ƅy this time, the firm
has already reached a particular degree of leverage, the reason ƅeing, the
advantage of low-cost deƅt gets counterƅalanced due to increase in the cost
of equity. At that specific point, the firm‟s value will ƅe at its highest or its
cost of capital will ƅe at its lowest.

 In the last stage, at a certain point, either the value of the firm starts
decreasing with leverage or the cost of capital starts increasing. This is S
ƅecause the investors‟ demand for high equity capitalization rate due to high
risk involved counterparts the advantages of low-cost deƅt.

40
 Thus, these three stages indicate that the cost of capital is dependent on Capital
leverage. It falls with leverage, and reaches a particular minimal point after which Structure
Theories
it starts increasing.

The traditional approach is questioned or criticized as it indicates that ƅy

changing the way in which the risk incurred ƅy the security holders is distriƅuted,
the totality of risk incurred ƅy the security holders can ƅe changed.

2.4.2 Modigliani-Miller Hypothesis

Fig 2.1 Optimal Capital Structure

According to Modigliani and Miller, the net operating income approach

explains the relationship ƅetween leverage and cost of capital in three
propositions. They have challenged the traditional approach ƅy providing a
rational reason for having constant cost of capital throughout all the levels of
leverage.
The propositions made ƅy Modigliani and Miller are ƅased on certain
assumptions:

 Trading of securities take place in capital markets that are perfect. Also,
there will ƅe no transaction costs involved, i.e. the investors do not have to
ƅear any costs for ƅuying or selling their securities.

 It is assumed that the investors ƅehave rationally ƅy choosing risk and return
that is most profitaƅle for them.

41
 Cost of  The proƅaƅility distriƅution value is expected to ƅe same for all the
Capital and investors.
Capital
Structure  The firms can ƅe cluƅƅed together in one class ƅased on their ƅusiness risks.
Firms that have same level of ƅusiness risk can come under one class.

 There is no tax incorporated, neither corporate nor personal.

 There is 100 percentpayout to shareholders i.e. the shareholders are given all
the net earnings ƅy the firm.
The ƅasic propositions of MM theory are:

Proposition I:
The total of market value of deƅt and market value of equity i.e. the total
market value of the firm does not depend on the degree of leverage, and is equal
to the firm‟s expected operating incomes at the rate pertaining to its risk class.

Thus, as per Proposition I,

Market value of the firm = Market value of equity + Market value of deƅt

= Expected Net Operating Income / Rate applicaƅle to the firm ƅased on risk
class

Proposition II:
According to the proposition-II, Cost of equity is in a linear (directly
proportional) relationship with the Deƅt-equity ratio. The required return on
equity increases as the deƅt-equity ratio for the firm increases. This means the risk
for equity holder increases with the deƅt increases in the capital structure.

Proposition III:
The cut-off rate for deciding the investment of a firm ƅelonging to a
particular risk class is not affected ƅy the way in which the firm finances the
investment. Thus, as per the proposition, since the financing and investment
decisions are independent of each other, the financing decisions do not affect the
average cost of capital.
Thus, according to the MM theory, the value of the firm is not affected ƅy
the financial leverage. The costs like ƅankruptcy costs, agency costs, taxes. etc. S
are some of the factors that are found to ƅe disadvantageous in this approach.

42
 Check your progress 3 Capital
Structure
1. The __________assumes that the cost of deƅt and that of equity are
Theories
independent to capital structure.
a. Net Income Approach (NI)

b. Net Operating Income (NOI)

2. According to Modigliani and Miller, the net operating income approach

explains the relationship ƅetween _________________and cost of capital in
three propositions.
a. Cost of fund

b. leverage
3. Traditional approach is the mid-point ƅetween the ____________and net
operating approach and is often known as an intermediate approach.
a. net income

b. net outcome

2.5 CAPM and Capital Structure

The shareholder‟s return in terms of EPS or ROE is affected ƅy leverage
which also increases financial risk. As a result, the ƅeta of the equity of a firm
increases since it introduces deƅt in the capital structure of the firm. It is well
known that individual securities form a portfolio and each security has its own
ƅeta. Also, the ƅeta of the portfolio is nothing ƅut the weighted average ƅeta of
individual securities. Likewise, a firm is comprised of portfolio of assets and
hence, the weighted average of ƅetas of individual assets is the ƅetaasset of a firm
βa. Thus,
βa = β1 w1 + β2 w2 + β3 w3 …

43
 Cost of
Capital and
Capital
Structure

Fig 2.2 CAPM

Where βa is weighted average ƅeta of assets, β1 is the ƅeta of asset one, w1

is its weighted average and so on.
As deƅt and equity finances a firm‟s assets, its asset ƅeta is also the
weighted average of equity ƅeta and deƅt ƅeta of the firm. Thus,
βa = βe we + βd wd

Where βe is equity ƅeta, we is weighted average of equity, βd is deƅt ƅeta

and wd is weighted average of deƅt.

Deƅt and equity finances a firm‟s assets.

The market value of weighted average of equity is divided ƅy the firm‟s
total value. Likewise, the market value of weighted average of deƅt is divided ƅy
the firm‟s total value.

Check your progress 4

1. The shareholder‟s return in terms of EPS or ROE is affected ƅy leverage
which also increases financial ______
a. Return

b. Risk

2. CAPM and Capital Structure is well known that ___________form a

portfolio and each security has its own ƅeta.
a. individual securities
b. Mix securities

44
2.6 Adjusted Present Value Capital
Structure
The Adjusted Present Value (APV) is the sum of Net present value (NPV) Theories
of a project if financed exclusively ƅy ownership equity and the present value of
all the ƅenefits of financing. This was first studied ƅy Stewart Myers, a professor
at the MIT Sloan School of Management and then, in 1973, it was theorized ƅy
Lorenzo Peccati. The main ƅenefit of this approach is a tax shield resulted from
tax deductiƅility of interest payments. Another one can ƅe a suƅsidized ƅorrowing.
The APV method of ƅusiness valuation is normally useful in a Leveraged ƅuy out
(LBO) case since it has tremendous amount of deƅt, so tax shield is sizeaƅle.
To ƅe precise, an APV valuation model is the standard DCF model.
However, cash flows would ƅe discounted at the cost of assets (instead of
WACC), and tax shields at the cost of deƅt. APV and the standard DCF gives the
same result if the capital structure remains constant.

Formula:
Base-case NPV + Sum of PV of financing

Example:
Initial Investment = 500000
Expected Cash flow = 45000 (Perpetuity)

Opportunity cost of capital: 10%

Tax rate=35%
Project partly financed ƅy 200000
NPV = -500000 + 45000/0.10 = -50000

PV (Tax Shield) = .35 x 200000 = 70000

APV = -50000 + 70000 = 20000

Check your progress 5

1. The _______is the sum of Net present value (NPV) of a project if financed
exclusively ƅy ownership equity and the present value of all the ƅenefits of
financing.
a. DCF
b. Adjusted Present Value (APV)

45
 Cost of
Capital and
2. Adjusted Present Value was first studied ƅy Stewart Myers, a professor at the
Capital
Structure MIT Sloan School of Management and then, in ________________.
a. 1975
b. 1973

2.7 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we discussed the various concepts relating and associated with
the cost and capital structure.
In this unit we discussed the map that a company incorporates for its
financing is referred to as the capital structure of the company. That means it is
the finances that the company uses in the long term. A company‟s capital structure
would ƅe ƅeneficial if the funds are used in a way that it not only increases the
firm‟s market value, ƅut also reduces the company‟s cost of capital. When a
company uses fixed fund sources like deƅentures, term loans, etc. along with
equity capital, then it is known as financial leverage. An optimal capital structure
should ƅe such that the dilution of control should ƅe minimal; the use of leverage
should ƅe high and at minimum cost leading to company‟s prosperity. The use of
deƅts should ƅe minimal as it hampers the company‟s solvency since the interest
rates are very high. Later in the unit we even discussed the various theories that
play a major role in the determination of capital structure.Here we covered capital
structure theories of Traditional View, Modigliani-Miller Hypothesis; Cost of
equity is in a linear (directly proportional) relationship with the Deƅt-equity ratio.
The required return on equity increases as the deƅt-equity ratio for the firm
increases.We even discussed the use of ƅeta in capital structure is very important.
Adjusted Present Value (APV) gives the difference ƅetween DCF (Discounted
Cash Flow) Valuation and APV in using the cost of capital.
So this unit is going to be great help for the readers in understanding the
concept associated with capital structure theories.

46
2.8 Answers for Check Your Progress Capital
Structure
Theories
Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-b), (2-a), (3-b)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-b)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-a), (2-b), (3-a)

Check your progress 4

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

Check your progress 5

Answers: (1-c), (2-d)

2.9 Glossary
1. Net Present Value (NPV) Method - A method of ranking investment
proposals using the NPV, which is equal to the present value of future net
cash flows, discounted at the marginal cost of capital.
2. Deƅenture - A long-term ƅond that is not secured ƅy a mortgage on specific
property.

2.10 Assignment
Write different Capital structure theories with examples.

2.11 Activities
Which factors affect the Capital Structure of a company?

47
 Cost of 2.12 Case Study
Capital and
Capital Study the Capital Structure of GO Indigo airlines, DLF and Ranƅaxy Ltd.
Structure

2.13 Further Readings

S
1. Financial management- ICFAI.
2. Financial management – I. M. Pandey

48
Block Summary
After reading this the readers would have got the sufficient idea about hte
capital and various concepts that are associated with capital and its structure. The
following topics were studied in this block.

The first unit of the ƅlock covered the topic cost of capital in detail.It also
explained the readers aƅout the various elements of cost of capital. Discussion was
also ƅe made on opportunity cost. The writer tried his ƅest to explain the topics in
most easy language and even kept the content of the ƅook concise ƅut
understandaƅle.Here he made a detailed study on the various factors that affects
the capital structure i.e whether the capital should contain equity or deƅt or in
what ratio the equity and deƅt ƅe maintained. Later in the unit various theories of
capital structure shall also ƅe discussed in detail. These capital structure theories
are considered to be very important in understanding the various concepts of
capital and its cost.

After going through this block the students would have got the sufficient
exposure to various concepts associated with capital structure and its theories.

49
 Cost of Block Assignment
Capital and
Capital Short Answer Questions
Structure
a. Cost of equity capital.
b. Difference ƅetween ƅook value rate and Market value rate.

c. Opportunity cost of capital.

d. Traditional View.

e. Three approaches of M-M.

f. Deƅt-equity ratio‟s importance in capital structure.

Long Answer Questions

1. Discuss the Modigliani miller approach in detail.
2. What do you understand ƅy optimal capital structure.

50
Enrolment No.
1. How many hours did you need for studying the units?

Unit No 1 2 3 4

Nos of Hrs

2. Please give your reactions to the following items based on your reading of the
block:

3. Any Other Comments

………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………

51
 Education is something
which ought to be
brought within
the reach of every one.

- Dr. B. R. Ambedkar

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

‘Jyotirmay Parisar’, Opp. Shri Balaji Temple, Sarkhej-Gandhinagar Highway, Chharodi,
Ahmedabad-382 481.
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
PGDF-102

BLOCK 3:
WORKING CAPITAL
MANAGEMENT AND
INVESTMENT

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

Ahmedabad
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Knowledge Management and

Research Organization
Pune
Editorial Panel

Author
Prof. Asmita Rai

Language Editor
Ms. Renuka Suryavanshi

Graphic and Creative Panel

Ms. K. Jamdal
Ms. Lata Dawange
Ms. Pinaz Driver
Ms. Tejashree Bhosale
Mr. Kiran Shinde
Mr. Prashant Tikone
Mr. Akshay Mirajkar

Copyright © 2015 Knowledge Management and Research Organization.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, transmitted or utilized
in any form or by a means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording or by any information storage or retrieval system without written
permission from us.

Acknowledgment
Every attempt has been made to trace the copyright holders of material reproduced
in this book. Should an infringement have occurred, we apologize for the same and
will be pleased to make necessary correction/amendment in future edition of this
book.
The content is developed by taking reference of online and print publications that
are mentioned in Bibliography. The content developed represents the breadth of
research excellence in this multidisciplinary academic field. Some of the
information, illustrations and examples are taken "as is" and as available in the
references mentioned in Bibliography for academic purpose and better
understanding by learner.'
ROLE OF SELF INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL IN DISTANCE LEARNING

The need to plan effective instruction is imperative for a successful

distance teaching repertoire. This is due to the fact that the instructional
designer, the tutor, the author (s) and the student are often separated by
distance and may never meet in person. This is an increasingly common
scenario in distance education instruction. As much as possible, teaching by
distance should stimulate the student's intellectual involvement and
contain all the necessary learning instructional activities that are capable of
guiding the student through the course objectives. Therefore, the course /
self-instructional material are completely equipped with everything that
the syllabus prescribes.
To ensure effective instruction, a number of instructional design
ideas are used and these help students to acquire knowledge, intellectual
skills, motor skills and necessary attitudinal changes. In this respect,
students' assessment and course evaluation are incorporated in the text.
The nature of instructional activities used in distance education self-
instructional materials depends on the domain of learning that they
reinforce in the text, that is, the cognitive, psychomotor and affective. These
are further interpreted in the acquisition of knowledge, intellectual skills
and motor skills. Students may be encouraged to gain, apply and
communicate (orally or in writing) the knowledge acquired. Intellectual-
skills objectives may be met by designing instructions that make use of
students' prior knowledge and experiences in the discourse as the
foundation on which newly acquired knowledge is built.
The provision of exercises in the form of assignments, projects and
tutorial feedback is necessary. Instructional activities that teach motor skills
need to be graphically demonstrated and the correct practices provided
during tutorials. Instructional activities for inculcating change in attitude
and behavior should create interest and demonstrate need and benefits
gained by adopting the required change. Information on the adoption and
procedures for practice of new attitudes may then be introduced.
Teaching and learning at a distance eliminates interactive
communication cues, such as pauses, intonation and gestures, associated
with the face-to-face method of teaching. This is particularly so with the
exclusive use of print media. Instructional activities built into the
instructional repertoire provide this missing interaction between the
student and the teacher. Therefore, the use of instructional activities to
affect better distance teaching is not optional, but mandatory.
Our team of successful writers and authors has tried to reduce this.
 Divide and to bring this Self Instructional Material as the best teaching
and communication tool. Instructional activities are varied in order to assess
the different facets of the domains of learning.
Distance education teaching repertoire involves extensive use of self-
instructional materials, be they print or otherwise. These materials are
designed to achieve certain pre-determined learning outcomes, namely goals
and objectives that are contained in an instructional plan. Since the teaching
process is affected over a distance, there is need to ensure that students actively
participate in their learning by performing specific tasks that help them to
understand the relevant concepts. Therefore, a set of exercises is built into the
teaching repertoire in order to link what students and tutors do in the
framework of the course outline. These could be in the form of students'
assignments, a research project or a science practical exercise. Examples of
instructional activities in distance education are too numerous to list.
Instructional activities, when used in this context, help to motivate students,
guide and measure students' performance (continuous assessment)
PREFACE
We have put in lots of hard work to make this book as user-friendly
as possible, but we have not sacrificed quality. Experts were involved in
preparing the materials. However, concepts are explained in easy language
for you. We have included may tables and examples for easy understanding.
We sincerely hope this book will help you in every way you expect.
All the best for your studies from our team!
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Contents

BLOCK 1: BASICS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Finance, Financial Management, Scope of Financial Management,
Finance and Management Functions, Objectives of Financial
Management, Role and Functions of Finance Manager, Changing
Role of Finance Manger, Organization of Finance Function, Liquidity
and Profitability, Financial Management and Accounting, Financial
Management and Economics, Financial Management-Science or Art,
Significance of Financial Management, Strategic Financial
Management, Techniques of Financial Management
UNIT 2 SOURCES OF LONG -TERM FINANCE
Introduction, Types of Capital, Equity Capital, Preference Capital,
Debenture capital, Term Loan, Convertibles, Warrants, Leasing,
Hire-Purchase, Initial Public offer, Rights Issue, Private Placement

BLOCK 2: COST OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE

UNIT 1 COST OF CAPITAL

Concept of Cash Capital, Elements of Cost of Capital, Classification of
Cost of Capital, Opportunity Cost of Capital, Trading on Equity
UNIT 2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE THEORIES
Introduction to Capital Structure, Factors affecting capital structure,
Features of an optimal capital structure, Capital Structure Theories,
CAPM and Capital Structure, Adjusted Present Value
BLOCK 3: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND INVESTMENT

UNIT 1 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-I

Introduction, Meaning and Definition of Working Capital, Types of
Working Capital, Factors Affecting Working Capital / Determinants
of Working Capital, Operating Working Capital Cycle, Working
Capital Requirements, Estimating Working Capital Needs and
Financing Current Assets, Capital Structure Decisions, Leverages
UNIT 2 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-II
Inventory Management, Purpose of holding inventories, Types of
Inventories, Inventory Management Techniques, Pricing of
inventories, Receivables Management, Purpose of receivables, Cost
of maintaining receivables, Monitoring Receivable, Cash
Management, Reasons for holding cash, Factors for efficient cash
management
UNIT 3 INVESTMENTS AND FUND
Meaning of Capital Budgeting, Principles of Capital Budgeting, Kinds
of Capital Budgeting Proposals, Kinds of Capital Budgeting
Decisions, Capital Budgeting Techniques, Estimation of Cash flow for
new Projects, Sources of long Term Funds

BLOCK 4: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL PLANNING

UNIT 1 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS

Introduction, Investment and Financing Decisions, Components of
cash flows, Complex Investment Decisions
UNIT 2 FINANCIAL PLANNING- I
Introduction, Advantages of financial planning, Need for Financial
Planning, Steps in Financial planning, Types of Financial planning,
Scope of Financial planning
UNIT 3 FINANCIAL PLANNING-II
Derivatives, Future Contract, Forward Contacts, Options, Swaps,

Difference between Forward Contract and future contract, Financial

Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan after EFR Policy is

Determined
 Dr. Babasaheb PGDF-102
Ambedkar
Open University

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

BLOCK 3: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND

INVESTMENT

UNIT 1
WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-I 03

UNIT 2
WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-II 60

UNIT 3
INVESTMENTS AND FUND 77
BLOCK 3: WORKING CAPITAL
MANAGEMENT AND
INVESTMENT
Block Introduction
Finance, as already discussed is one of the most important parts of any
business unit, without which none of the business can survive. The capital
required may be of several types. The capital required may be of short term need
or for long term need. The capital required for short term is required for the day to
day running of business where as capital for long term is required for the
acquisition of long term assets. Capital for short duration is required for the
purpose of meeting current liabilities against creditors for stock, salary to
employees, etc. The capital for short duration is known as working capital and has
been discussed here in very detail.
In this block the whole content was divided into three units Unit 1 and 2
talks about the working capital. These units have discussed in detail about
working capital. It discusses about Meaning and Definition of Working Capital,
Types of Working Capital, Factors Affecting Working Capital / Determinants of
Working Capital, Operating Working Capital Cycle, Working Capital
Requirements, Estimating Working Capital Needs and Financing Current Assets,
Capital Structure Decisions, Leverages. On the other hand unit 2 discusses about
in detail about Inventory Management, Purpose of holding inventories, Types of
Inventories, Inventory Management Techniques, Pricing of inventories,
Receivables Management, Purpose of receivables, Cost of maintaining
receivables, Monitoring Receivable, Cash Management, Reasons for holding cash,
Factors for efficient cash management. Lastly the unit 3rd discussed about the
capital budgeting and its importance in a organisation it discusses about Capital
Budgeting, Principles of Capital Budgeting, Kinds of Capital Budgeting
Proposals, Kinds of Capital Budgeting Decisions, Capital Budgeting Techniques,
Estimation of Cash flow for new Projects, Sources of long Term Funds.
This unit is going to be of great help for the readers in understanding the
concepts relating to working capital.

1
 Working
Block Objective
Capital
Management After learning this block, you will be able to understand:
and Investment
 Working Capital Cycle.

 Factors Which Influence Working Capital Need In Organisation.

 Inventory Management.

 Receivables Management.

 Cash Management Techniques.

 Inventory

 Various Techniques of Inventory Management.

 Capital budgeting.

 Cash Flow And Accounting Profit

 Npv And The Internal Rate Of Return (Irr)

Block Structure
Unit 1: Working Capital Management-I
Unit 2: Working Capital Management-II
Unit 3: Investments and Fund

2
UNIT 1: WORKING CAPITAL
MANAGEMENT - I
Unit Structure
1.0 Learning Objectives
1.1 Introduction

1.2 Meaning and Definition of Working Capital

1.3 Types of Working Capital

1.4 Factors Determining Working Capital

1.5 Operating Working Capital Cycle

1.6 Working Capital Requirements

1.7 Estimating Working Capital Needs and Financing Current Assets

1.8 Capital Structure Decisions

1.8.1 Introduction, Meaning and Definition

1.9 Leverages
1.9.1 Concept of Leverages

1.9.2 Types of Leverages

1.10 Let Us Sum Up

1.11 Answers for Check Your Progress

1.12 Glossary
1.13 Assignment

1.14 Activities
1.15 Case Study

1.16 Further Readings

1.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 How working capital cycle operates?

 Factors which influence working capital requirements.

3
 Working  Calculate average working capital requirements.
Capital
Management  Enumerate components of capital structure.
and Investment
 Measure business risk, financial risk and total risk through leverage.

1.1 Introduction
Working capital is significant in financial management due to the fact that it
plays an important role in keeping the wheels of a business enterprise running. It
may be regarded as life blood of abusiness. It is concerned with short term
financial decisions. Its effective provision can do much to ensure the success of a
business, while its inefficient management can lead not only to loss of profits but
also to the ultimate downfall of promising concept. A study of working capital is
of major importance to internal and external analysis because of its close
relationship with day-to-day operations of abusiness.

Working capital management includes management of various components

of current assets as well as current liabilities.

A firm invests a part of its permanent capital in fixed assets and keeps a part
of it for working capital i.e. for meeting the day to day requirements. The
requirements of working capital varies from firm to firm depending upon the
nature of business, production policy, market conditions, seasonality of
operations, conditions of supply, etc. Working capital management if carried out
effectively, efficiently and consistently will assure the health of an organization.

1.2 Meaning and Definition of Working Capital

In accounting, W. C. is the difference between the inflow and outflow of
funds. It is the net cash inflow.

W.C. is defined as the excess of current assets over its current liabilities and
provision. Current assets are those assets which will be converted into cash with
the current account period or within the next year as a result of the ordinary
operations of the business.
Efficient working capital management requires that the firms should operate
with some amount of Net working capital (NWC), the exact amount varying from
firm to firm and depending, among other things, on the nature of industry. The

4
 Working
greater the margin by which the current assets cover the short term obligations,
Capital
the more able it will be to pay its obligations when they become due for payment. Management-I

Check your progress 1

1. ___________is defined as the excess of current assets over its current
liabilities and provision.
a. Profit

b. Net profit
2. In accounting, __________ is the difference between the inflow and outflow
of funds. It is the net cash inflow.
a. W. C.
b. C.W

1.3 Types of Working Capital

Net Working Cɑpitɑl

Gross Working Cɑpitɑl Cɑsh Working Cɑpitɑl

Permɑnent Working Cɑpitɑl

Vɑriɑƅle Working Cɑpitɑl Negɑtive Working Cɑpitɑl

Bɑlɑnce Sheet Working Cɑpitɑl

Fig 1.1 Type of Capital

Types of Working Capital

1. Networking Capital
Networking Capital is the difference between current assets and current
liabilities. The concept of net working capital enables a firm to determine how
much amount is left for operational requirements.

2. Gross Working Capital

Gross working capital is the amount of funds invested in the various components

 Financial Managers are profoundly concerned with current assets:

5
 Working  Gross working Capital provides the current amount of working capital
Capital
Management
at the right time;
and Investment  It enables a firm to realize the greatest return on its investment;

 It helps in the fixation of various areas of financial responsibility;

 It enables a firm to plan and control funds and to maximize the return
on investment.

For these advantages, gross working capital has become a more acceptable
concept in financial management.

3. Permanent Working Capital

Permanent Working Capital is the minimum amount of current assets which
is needed to conduct a business even during the dullest season of the year. This
amount varies from year to year, depending upon the growth of a company and
the stage of the business cycle in which it operates. It is the amount of funds
required to produce the goods and services which are necessary to satisfy demand
at a particular point. It represents the current assets which are required on a
continuing basis over the entire year. It is maintained as the medium to carry on
operations at any time. Permanent working capital has the following
characteristics:

 It is classified on the basis of the time factors;

 It constantly charges from one asset to another and continues to

remain in the business process

 Its size increase with the growth of business operations

4. Temporary or Variable Working Capital

It represents the additional assets which are required at different times
during the operating year-additional inventory, extra cash, etc. Seasonal working
capital is the additional amount of current assets- particularly cash, receivable and
inventory which is required during the more active business seasons of the year. It
is temporarily invested in current assets and possesses the following
characteristics;

 It is not always gainfully employed, though it may change from one

asset to another, as permanent working capital does;

 It is particularly suited to business of a seasonal or cyclical nature.

6
 Working
5. Balance sheet working capital
Capital
The balance sheet working capital is not which is calculated from the items Management-I
appearing in the balance sheet. Gross working capital which is represented by the
excess of current assets, and net working capital which is represented by the
excess of current assets over current liabilities are examples of the balance sheet
working capital.

6. Cash working capital

Cash working capital is one which is calculated from the items appearing in
the profit and loss accounts of current assets. This concept has the following
advantages -
It shows the real flow of money or value at a particular time and is
concerned to be the most realistic approach in working capital management. It is
the basis of the operation cycle concept which has assumed a great importance in
financial management in recent years. The reason is that the cash working capital
indicates the adequacy of the cash flow which is an essential pre - requisite of a
business.

7. Negative working Capital

Negative working Capital emerges when current liabilities exceed current
assets. Such a situation is not absolutely theoretical and occurs when a firm is
nearing a crisis of some magnitude.

Check your progress 2

1. ______________working capital is the amount of funds invested in the various
components.

a. Net
b. Gross

2. ____________is the difference between current assets and current liabilities.

a. Marketing Capital

b. Networking Capital
3. _____________is maintained as the medium to carry on operations at any time

a. Permanent Working Capital

b. Working Capital

7
 Working
Capital 1.4 Factors Determining Working Capital
Management
and Investment

Fig 1.2 Factors Affecting Working Capital

Railroad, with their large fixed investments, appear to have the lowest
requirements for current assets. This does not mean that the problems of working
capital may be minimized in this field of enterprise, since ready funds are still
essential to cover disbursement for wages, interest on funded debt, purchase of
materials and supplies, etc. Indeed, under such conditions the working capital
position may become even more strategic in character because of its relation to,
and control of, the large amount of fixed assets. Thus, one of the outstanding
problems of railroad management in recent years has been the maintenance of a
current position sufficiently strong to permit vigorous operations. Public utilities
like rail roads have large fixed investments which cause the current assets to
constitute only arelatively small percentage of the total assets. There is a
difference between operating and holding companies, but even then the funds to

8
 Working
cover current transactions are minor as compared with those necessary to finance
Capital
the long term structure. Management-I
Industrial concerns, generally, require a large amount of working capital,
although it varies from business to business with lack of uniformity characterising
each field of enterprise. However, the underlying determinants of the amount are
essentially the same as in the earlier groups. Where large amounts of fixed capital
are required for operation, working assets May be expected to occupy asmaller
niche in the asset structure. For similar reasons, a rapid turnover of capital (sales
divided by total assets) will inevitably means a large proportion of current assets
in the case of industries with large fixed investment. One of the primary uses of
working capital is its conversion into operation which will normally replace such
defections. This means that the flow of a portion of the working capitals circulated
through fixed investment and that its recovery is dependent upon the income
realized. Where the current assets are relatively more important, a rapid sales
turnover is usually found. Often, as in the case of retail concerns, the specific
working assets constitute the object of sale and recovery is direct and immediate.
In manufacturing enterprises, a large share of working capital is more likely to get
converted into finished products; but even here, the potentiality of recovery is not
delayed as much as in the case of public utilities and railroads. The need for
working capital varies with changes in the volume of business. A considerable
proportion of current assets are needed permanently as fixed assets. At the same
time, new receivable accumulate and old ones are converted into cash. Cash is
utilized in the production process. The following factors determine the amount of
working capital.
Nature of Industry: The composition of an asset is a function of the size of
abusiness and the industry to which it belongs. Small companies have smaller
proportions of cash, receivables and inventory than large corporations. This
difference becomes more marked in large corporations. A public utility, for
example, mostly employs fixed assets in its operations, while merchandising
department depends generally on inventory and receivables. Needs for working
capital are thus determined by the nature of an enterprise.
Demand of Industry: Creditors are interested in the security of loans. They want
their obligations to be sufficiently covered. They want the amount of security in
assets which are greater than the liability.

Cash Requirements: Cash is one of the current assets which is essential for
successful operations of the production cycle. Cash should be adequate and
properly utilised. It would be wasteful to hold excessive cash. A minimum level of

9
 Working cash is always required to maintain good credit good credit relations. Richards
Capital
Osborn has pointed out that cash has a universal liquidity and acceptability.
Management
and Investment Unlike illiquid assets, its value is clear-cut and definite.

Nature of Business: The nature of business is an important determinant of the

level of the working capital. Working capital requirements depend upon the
general nature or type of business. They are relatively low in public utility
concerns, in which inventories and receivables are rapidly converted into cash.
Manufacturing organizations, however, face problems of slow turnover of
inventories and receivables, and invest large amount in working capital.

Time: The level of working capital depends upon the time required to
manufacture goods. If the time is longer, the size of working capital is greater.
Moreover, the amount of working capital depends upon inventory turnover and
the unit cost of the goods that are sold. The greater this cost, the bigger is the
amount of working capital.
Volume of Sales: This is the most important factor affecting the size and
components of working capital. A firm maintains current assets because they are
needed to support the operational activities which result in sales. The volume of
sales and size of the working capital are directly related to each other. As the
volume of sales increases, there is an increase in the investment of working capital
in the cost of operations, in inventories and in receivables.

Terms of purchase and Sales: If the credit terms of purchase are more
favourable and those of sales less liberal, less cash will be invested in inventory.
With more favourable credit terms, working capital requirements can be reduced.
A firm gets more time for payment to creditors or suppliers. A firm which enjoys
greater credit with banks needs less working capital.
Inventory Turnover: If the inventory turnover is high, the working capital
requirements will be low. With abetter inventory control, a firm is able to reduce
its working capital requirements. While attempting this, it should determine the
minimum level of stock which it will have to maintain throughout the period of its
operations.

Receivable Turnover: It is necessary to have an effective control of receivables.

A prompt collection of receivables and good facilities for settling payables result
into low working capital requirements.
Business Turnover: The business turnover of the organization directly calls for
systematic planning for production. The exploitation of the available business can

10
be achieved only when sufficient raw materials are stored and supplied. Hence Working
Capital
Business Turnover willalso influence the working capital.
Management-I
Business Cycle: Business expands during periods of prosperity and declines
during the period of depression. Consequently, more working capital is required
during periods of prosperity and less during the periods of depression. During
marked upswings of activity, there is usually a need for larger amounts of capital
to cover the lag between collection and increased sales and to finance purchases of
additional materials to support growing business activity. Moreover, during the
recovery and prosperity phase of the business cycle, prices of raw materials and
wages tend to rise, requiring additional funds to carry even the same physical
volume of business. In the downswing of the cycle, there may be abrief period
when collection difficulties and declining sales together cause embarrassment by
requiring replenishing of cash. Later, as the depression runs its course, the concern
may find that it has a larger amount of working capital on hand than current
business volume may justify.
Volume of Current Assets: A decrease in the real value of current assets as
compared to their book value reduces the size of the working capital. If the real
value of current assets increases, there is an increase in working capital.

Variation of Sales: A seasonal business requires the maximum amount of

working capital for a relatively short period of time.

Production Cycle: The time taken to convert raw materials into finished products
is referred to as the production cycle or operating cycle. The longer the production
cycle, the greater is the requirement of working capital. An utmost care should be
taken to shorten the period of the production cycle in order to minimize working
capital requirements.
Credit Controls: Credit Controls includes such factors as the volume of credit
sales, the terms of credit sales, the collection policy, etc. With a sound credit
control policy, it is possible for a firm to improve its cash inflow.

Liquidity and Profitability: If a firm desires to take a greater risk for bigger
gains or losses, it reduces the size of its working capital in relation to its sales. If it
is interested in improving its liquidity, it increases the level of its working capital.
However, this policy is likely to result in a reduction of the sale volume, and,
therefore, of profitability. A firm, therefore, should choose between liquidity and
profitability and decide about its working capital requirements accordingly.

11
 Working Inflation: As a result of inflation, size of the working capital is increased in order
Capital
to make it easier for a firm to achieve abetter cash inflow. To some extent, this
Management
and Investment factor may be compensated by the rise in selling price during inflation.

Seasonal Fluctuations: Seasonal Fluctuations in sales affect the level of variable

working capital. Often, the demand for product may be of a seasonal nature. Yet
inventories have got to be purchased during certain season only. The size of the
working capital in one period may, therefore, be bigger than that in another.

Profit Planning and Control: The level of working capital is decided by the
management in accordance with its policy of profit planning and control.
Adequate profit assists in the generation of cash. It makes it possible for the
management to plough back a part of its earnings in the business and substantially
build up internal financial resources.A firm has to plan for taxation payments,
which are an important part of working capital management. Often dividend
policy of a corporation may depend upon the amount of cash available to it.
Repayable Ability: A firm‘s repayment ability determines level of its working
capital. The usual practice of a firm is to prepare cash flow projections according
to its plans of repayment and to fix working capital levels accordingly.
Cash Reserves: It would be necessary for a firm to maintain some cash reserves
to enable it to meet contingent disbursements. This would provide a buffer against
shortages in cash flows.

Operational and Financial Efficiency: Working capital turnover is improved

with a better operational and financial efficiency of a firm. With a greater working
capital turnover, it may be able to reduce its working capital requirements.
Changes in Technology: Technology developments related to the production-
process have a sharp impact on the need for working capital.
Firms Policies: These affect the level of permanent and variable working
capital.Changes in credit policy, production policy, etc., are bound to affect the
size of working capital.

Size of the Firm: A firm‘s size, either in terms of its assets or sales, affects its
need for working capital. Bigger firms, with many sources of funds, may need less
working capital as compared to their total assets or sales.
Activities of the Firm: A firm‘s stocking on heavy inventory or selling on easy
credit terms calls for a higher level of working capital for it than for selling
services or making cash sales.

12
Attitude of Risk: The greater the amount of working capital, the lower is the risk Working
Capital
of liquidity.
Management-I
Whenever there is current strain, it has to be immediately diagnosed on the
basis of the red signals which manifest themselves in the operation. The cause
should be ascertained by making thorough study of the components of current
assets and current liabilities.
If stock is not moving fast, and if there is an excess inventory build-up,
corrective steps should be taken to sell the stock or bring down its level. If the
receivables have become sticky, effective recovery steps should be taken to
reduce the debts and to increase the collections. Sometimes short-term funds have
been used to finance fixed assets, and this creates the current strain. This
imbalance in the pattern of financing should be set right by raising long-term
funds on the cover of fixed assets so that the current strain may be wiped out.
Similarly, if current funds are diverted outside when they are badly required
within the firm itself, it would be very difficult to run the business. External
diversion may be for the purpose of outside investment, advance to other or allied
concerns or may be in the form of drawing from the business or for various other
purposes. The situation can improve only if this external diversion is stopped. If
the strain is allowed to continue business of involvement in any other business or
industry, the consequences may be disastrous. In such a situation, the ability to
meet current demands deteriorates; short-term credits are not forthcoming;
production is affected; sales decline; cash flow dwindles; income may disappear;
and the whole enterprise may get into the red over a period of time.

Check your progress 3

1. The composition of an________is a function of the size of a business and
the industry to which it belongs.
a. Equity

b. Asset
2. ____________related to the production-process have a sharp impact on the
need for working capital.
a. Technology developments

b. Management Development

13
 Working
Capital 1.5 Operating Working Capital Cycle
Management
A new concept which is gaining more importance in recent years is the
and Investment
‗Operating Cycle concept‘ of Working Capital. The operating cycle refers to the
average time elapses between the acquisition of raw materials and the final cash
realization. Then the raw materials and stores are issued to the production
department. Wages are paid and other expenses are incurred in the process and
work-in-process comes into existence. Work-in-process becomes finished goods.
Finished goods are sold to customers on credit. In the course of time, these
customers pay cash for the goods purchased by them. ‗Cash‘ is retrieved and the
cycle is completed. Thus, operating cycle consists of four stages:

 The raw materials and stores inventory stage

 The work- in- progress stage

 The finished goods inventory stage

 The receivable stage

The operating cycle begins with the arrival of the stock, and ends when the
cash is received. The cash cycle begins when cash is paid for materials, and ends
when cash is collected from receivables.

Fig 1.3 Operating working Capital Cycle

14
Importance of Operating Cycle Concept - The application of operating cycle Working
Capital
concept is mainly useful to ascertain the requirement of cash working capital to
Management-I
meet the operating expense of a going concern. This concept is based on the
continuity of the flow of value in abusiness operation.
This is an important concept because the longer the operating cycle, the
more working capital funds the firm needs. Management must ensure that this
cycle does not become too long. This concept precisely measures the working
capital fund requirements, traces its changes and determines the optimum level of
working capital requirements.

Check your progress 4

1. The ___________refers to the average time elapses between the acquisition
of raw materials and the final cash realization.
a. annual cycle
b. operating cycle

2. Wages are paid and other ____________are incurred in the process and
work-in-process comes into existence.
a. Expenses
b. Saving

1.6 Working Capital Requirements

Every firm requires at least some amount of working capital, only their
working capital requirements are different. The goal of every firm should be to
increase the profit of its shareholders. And to achieve this goal, the firm‘s
operations must yield enough returns. Successful sales activity is very essential to
earn profit and hence, it is imperative that a firm invests sufficient funds in its
current assets for sales generation. As sales cannot be converted into cash
immediately, current assets are required to convert sales into cash.

Working capital is essentially circulating capital; in fact it is often referred

to as such. This has been admirably summed up by comparing it with a river
which is there every day, but the water in it is constantly changing.
The required amount of working capital in relation to the fixed capital of a
business will vary widely between firms in different industries. For example, a

15
 Working company engaged in the ship-building industry will need a large amount of fixed
Capital
or long term capital to finance the shipyard, equipment, etc for considerable
Management
and Investment periods, whereas a jobbing builder will require virtually no fixed assets but instead
a reasonably large amount of working capital to finance stocks of parts, amounts
owing by customers, etc. If company does not have enough working capital it will
soon find its activities restricted. Many firms which seemed to be expanding their
activities successfully have faced trouble through insufficient working capital
being available to finance this expansion. Under normal conditions a steady
increase in working capital indicates a successful business, while a steady
decrease would be a danger signal demanding immediate action to remedy the
situation.

Both in practice and in examinations, the question is often asked:

―What will be the working capital requirements to finance this level of
activity or that new project?‖ This is a very practical and important problem
which may require extensive research and difficult calculations. However, to
show the usual requirements in simple form, the following items are tabulated:

 The cost of raw materials, wages and overheads.

 The period during which raw materials will remain in stock before issue to
production.

 The period during which the product willbe processed through the factory.

 The period during which finished goods will remain in the warehouse.

 The lag in payment to suppliers of raw materials and service.

 The lag in payment to employees.

 The lag in payment by debtors.

 Frequently an amount is allowed to cover contingencies, e.g. 10% might be

added to the total amount.
Most of these points will be included in a computation of working capital
requirements. For example, the period during which stocks of finished goods stay
in the warehouse can only be an average figure, but by careful observation it
should be possible to make a reasonable assessment. This is the reason for
allowing an amount to cover contingencies: it is hoped that this figure might cover
any inaccuracies in calculation.

16
 Working
Check your progress 5 Capital
1. The required amount of __________in relation to the fixed capital of Management-I
abusiness will vary widely between firms in different industries.
a. capital
b. working capital

2. ____________is essentially circulating capital; in fact it is often referred to

as such.
a. Market Capital
b. Working capital

1.7 Estimating Working Capital Needs and

Financing Current Assets
Operating cycle is the most appropriate method for computing the working
capital requirements of any company. However, methods other than operating
cycle for computing a firm‘s working capital include:

 Estimation of a firm‘s working capital requirements on the grounds of its

current assets‘ average holding period and then relating them to the
company‘s costs based on past experiences. Operating cycle approach forms
the basis of this method. In order to use this method for estimating working
capital needs, one can make certain assumptions such as there is a supply of
raw materials and semi finished and finished goods for one month.

 Assuming that the current assets vary with sales, the ratio of sales can be
used as a method for estimating the working capital of a firm. Here, it can
be assumed that the annual sales are anywhere between 25-30 %.

 Working capital requirement can also be estimated as a ratio of fixed

investments.

One can assume the firm‘s capital investment to be 10-20% in order to use
this method.

As the second approach is clearly dependant on how accurately the sales are
estimated, this method is less reliable. Likewise, the third method is highly
dependent on the investment estimates. If the investments are not estimated

17
 Working properly, then it will affect the estimation of working capital needs using this
Capital
method and hence, this method is not used generally.
Management
and Investment Various factors like the accurate sales and investment forecasting,
alterations in operations etc. should be considered while estimating a firm‘s
working capital requirements. Also, other factors like the company‘s production
cycle, its collection policies, etc. should also be taken into consideration.

Financing Current Assets

The various policies for financing current assets include

 Long-term financing can be obtained by means of debentures, ordinary as

well as preference share capital, long term loans coming from banks and
financial institutions, etc.

 Short-term financing can be sourced in the form of working capital coming

from banks, commercial papers, public deposits etc. Short-term finance is
obtained from short-term suppliers in money market as well as from banks
and is generally for a period less than one year.

The automatic funds arising in day-to-day business are referred to as

Spontaneous financing. Outstanding expenses, trade credit, etc. are some of the
examples of spontaneous financing. A firm is expected to use this source of
financing to the fullest extent as there are no explicit costs associated with this
type of financing.

Check your progress 6

1. Operating cycle is the most appropriate method for computing the
__________requirements of any company.
a. working capital

b. asset
2. ______________requirement can also be estimated as aratio of fixed
investments.
a. Working capital

b. Estimate capital

18
 Working
1.8 Capital Structure Decisions Capital
Management-I
1.8.1 Introduction, Meaning and Definition
Capital structure refers to the composition of long term sources of funds
such as debentures, long term debts; preference share capital, and equity share
capital including reserves and surplus (i.e. retained earnings). It is being
increasingly realized that a company should plan its capital structure to maximize
the use of funds and to be able to adapt more easily to the changing conditions.

Meaning and Definition of capital Structure

The following definitions clarify the meaning of capital structure:

 ‗Capital structure is the permanent financing of the firm represented by

long-term debts, preferred stock and net worth‘. i.e. (Net Worth = equity
capital + reserves and surpluses).

 ‗Capital structure refers to the makeup of the capitalization i.e. whether it

consists of a single class of stock or several classes of stock with different
characteristics, various issues of bonds, a large or small surplus and the
like‘.

 ‗By capital structure is meant the total composition of long-term methods of

financing including long-term debt, all forms of ownership claims such as
stock and surplus‘.

Main Determinants of Capital Structure:

 Financial Leverage: The use of the fixed sources of funds, such as debt and
preference capital with owners equity in the capital structure is described as
financial leverage or training on equity. Leverage is very general concept,
representing influence or power. In financial analysis leverage represents the
influence of one financial variable over some other related financial
variable. Financial leverage measures the responsiveness of EPS (earning
per share) to changes in EBIT (earnings before interest and tax). EBIT-EPS
analysis is an important analytical tool at the disposal of a financial manager
to get at insight into the firm‘s capital structure.

 Risk: Ordinarily debt increases the risk, while equity reduces the risk. The
risk attached to the use of leverage is called financial risk.

 Growth and stability of sales: Growth and stability of sales influence the
degree of leverage. The firm with stable sales can employ a high degree of
leverage as they will not face difficulty in meeting their fixed commitments.

19
 Working  Retaining control: The capital structure of a company is influenced by the
Capital
Management
desire of the promoters of the company to retain control over the affairs of
and Investment the company.

 Cost of capital: The term cost of capital refers to the minimum rate of
return of a firm which must earn on its investments so that market value of
equity share of the company does not fall.

Fig 1.4 Factors Influencing Capital Structure

Internal Factors – Some of the internal factors which are to be considered in

planning the capital structure are as follows –

 Cost of Capital: The current and future cost of each potential source of
capital should be estimated and compared.

 Risk: Ordinarily, debt securities increase the risk, while equity securities
reduce it. Risk can be measured to some extent by the use of ratios
measuring gearing and times-interest earned.

 Dilution of Value: A company should not issue any shares which will have
the effect of removing or diluting the value of the shares by the existing
shareholders

20
 Acceptability: A company can borrow only if investors are willing to lend. Working
Capital
Few companies can afford the luxury of the capital structure which is Management-I
unacceptable to financial institutions.

 Transferability: Many companies put their securities for quotation on the

stock exchange quotations and improve the transferability of the shares.

 Matching Fluctuating Needs Against Short-term Source: Where needs

are fluctuating, a firm may prefer to borrow short-term loans from
commercial banks.

 Increasing Owner’s Profits: Profits of the owners can be increased by

relying more and more on debt financing.

 Surrender Operational Control: Equity stock may result in a possible

increase of operational control in an enterprise.

 Future Flexibility: A firm generally maintains a balance to ensure future

flexibility in the capital structure.

External Factors -

 General Level of Business Activity: Where the overall level of business

activity is rising, a firm would want to expand its operations.

 Level of Interest Rates: If interest rates become excessive, the firms will
delay debt financing.

 Availability of funds in the Money Market: The availability of funds in

the market affects a firm‘s ability to offer debt and equity securities.

 Tax policy on Interest and Dividends: Although each management makes

its own decisions on its capital sources, there are certain general factors
which seem to influence the overall capital structure.

General Factors -

 Size of Business and character of Capital Requirements: New and big

firms are conventionally financed. But they are likely to issue new securities
to the public. If an enterprise is successful, it grows rapidly and may issue
bonds and preferred stock without diluting equity stock interest. For
companies which expand rapidly, even though their current earnings are
low, the sale of equity stock is not desirable. However, if assets are
plentiful, borrowing is possible. The tradition of issuing mortgage bonds
encourages borrowings by those firms that have a heavy investment in fixed

21
 Working assets. In some industries, very large quantities of current assets account for
Capital
abigger proportion of the total assets.
Management
and Investment  Growth Age and size of Firms: The capital structure of firms is dependent
on the various stages of their development. In the early years of rapid
development, equity capital and short-term growth are principal sources. As
earnings improve re-invested landings and long-term debts constitute
additional capital. As a firm grows in size, the rate of its internal expansion
declines and retained earning replace the sources of the bonded debts,
probably through sinking fund payments in each field of economic activity;
and equity rations tend to vary directly with this size.

 Operational Characteristics: Businesses differ in their operational

characteristics and their need for funds. Merchandising firms operate on a
small margin of gross profit, mainly with current assets. Public utilities, on
the other hand, have small gross incomes relative to their capital and require
extensive capital. The margin of profit of high investment is heavy in fixed
assets. Public utilities are thrown into bankruptcy only if their fixed changes
are not covered.

 Continuity of Earnings: A firm must have stable earnings in order to

handle recurring fixed charges. Non-durable consumer goods enjoy stability
of demand and rigidity in prices is compared to durable consumer goods.
The earnings of some individual companies are fairly regular; though many
of them suffer from changes in economic conditions. The capital structure of
all firms in the industries should be more conservative than that of industries
which are stable. In the final analysis, the nature of earnings should be the
guiding principle in determining the capital structure of an enterprise.

 Flexibility: A firm which is conservatively financed carries a fairly small

debt, and the one which is heavily mortgaged is no longer able to choose
from among the financial alternatives available to it; but has to get funds by
whatever means open to it. The nature of the capital structure is influenced
by a struggle to maintain managerial control. If a wise dispersal of
ownership is desired, a firm will save additional stocks.

 Marketability of Securities: The financial management of a corporation

watches changes in market psychology and considers them carefully in
planning new security offerings. General economic conditions develop new
attitudes in the market.

22
 Government Influence: Taxes exercise a major influence on the capital Working
Capital
structures of the business. Corporate income-tax has reduced the net
Management-I
earnings of companies. Debt financing is encouraged because of income-tax
leverage.

 Financial Leverages: Unfavourable financial leverage indicates a low level

of profitability and makes borrowings more costly than the returns on
investment. Stated in another way, the rate of return is less than the rate of
interest, it is difficult for a firm to issue additional stock when profits are
low. The only alternative for the firm, therefore, is to raise profits and
improve its financial leverage.

 Market Price of Equity Stock: Equity shareholders usually view additional

debt as a risk-increasing measure. It may also be interpreted in terms of a
favourable financial leverage. In that case, it may act as a stimulant to equity
stockholders and equity shareholders may assume that the firm cannot
afford to pay a higher cost of capital and that its project may, therefore, earn
low rates of return. On the other hand, if the cost of capital is high, it may be
assumed that a firm cannot exploit lucrative profit opportunities. The effects
on the market price of common stock cannot, therefore, be easily predicted.
In other words, the behaviour of equity stockholders in the market is rather
unpredictable.

 Corporate Taxation: Corporate taxes have several effects on capital

structure. Interest charges are tax deductible. The use of debt securities thus
provides a lower cost of financing than preferred stock or equity securities.
The level of taxes affects the cost of capital, because the power cost of debt
resulting from tax leverage reduces the overall cost of capital.

Types of Capital Structure:

These can be following four types of capital structures.

 (E) = Only Equity

 (E+P) = Equity and Preference capital

 E+D = Equity and Debentures. (Or borrowed funds)

 E+P+D = Equity, preference capital with Debentures

Characteristics of Security
These can be grouped under four classes:

 Ownership rights

23
 Working  Repayment obligations
Capital
Management  Claim on assets
and Investment
 Claim on profits

Check your progress 7

1._____refers to the composition of long term sources of funds such as
debentures, long term debts; preference share capital, and equity share
capital including reserves and surplus.

a. Capital
b. Capital structure

2. The use of the _________sources of funds, such as debt and preference

capital with owners equity in the capital structure is described as financial
leverage or training on equity.
a. fixed

b. variable

1.9 Leverages
1.9.1 Concept of Leverages
Leverage has been defined as ‗the action of a lever and mechanical
advantage gained by it‘. A lever is a rigid piece that transmits and modifies force
or motion where forces are applied at two pointsand turns around a third. In
simple words, it is a force applied at a particular point to get the desired result.
The physical principle of the lever is instinctively appealing to most. It is the
principle that permits the magnification of force when a lever is applied to a
fulcrum.

Leverage is ‗the employment of assets or funds for which the firm pays a
fixed cost or fixed return‘ (James Horne). Leverage is a financial operation
concerning gearing. It is a tool in financial planning. Leverage helps the
management in controlling the fixed costs relating to sales. Thus leverage is a cost
depicting tool. The main aim of any business unit is to maximize the wealth of the

24
firm and increase return to the equity holders of the company. Earnings per share Working
are a barometer through which performance of an industrial unit can be measured. Capital
Management-I
This should be achieved by applying the principle of financial leverage. In the
modern business context, this has been widely used. Financial leverage helps the
finance manager to select an appropriate mix of capital structure. Capital is
required for the purpose of meeting both long term and short term financial
requirements of a business unit. This could be raised through long term as well as
short term sources, namely equity shares, debentures, preference shares, public
deposits, etc. Over draft, cash credit, bill discounting, etc. can be raised to fulfil
the short term requirements. Each of these instrument is directly associated with
the cost.

Irrespective of the size of the sales, certain costs are bound to incur. These
costs have direct relationship to profits. By reducing the cost one can increase the
profit. The process of reducing these costs is assisted by the tools of leverages.
These tools help the management in knowing the relative change of sales. If the
leverage is high, even little change in sales volume will result in higher profit. The
opposite is the situation when there is a low degree of leverage. Thus, following
are the main features of leverage.

 Leverage is a financial tool in the hands of an analyst.

 It quantifies the relative changes in profit due to the change in sales.

 It depicts the change in fixed cost incurred to sell the goods. (Thus it is
known as cost depicting tool).

 It helps the management in controlling operating costs or varying the profit

with an element of risk. It also helps in forecasting profit and evaluating
various financial plans.

 It establishes the relationship between the volume of sales and operating

profit. The two variables when varied show the relative changes. This
variation is called ‗Degree of Language‘.

 It helps in selecting an appropriate mix of capital structure.

1.9.2 Types of Leverages

There are 3 Types of Leverages. They are -

1. Operating Leverage
2. Financial Leverage

25
 Working 3. Combined Leverage
Capital
Management
and Investment
1. Operating Leverage
As we know that the cost structure of any firm consist of two variables, viz,
a) Fixed Cost and b) Variable cost.The operating leverage has a bearing on fixed
costs. This is a tendency of the profit to change, if the firm employs more of fixed
costs in its production.

The operating leverage will beat a low degree, when fixed costs are less in
the production process. Operating leverage shows the ability of a firm to use fixed
operating cost to increase the effect of changes in sales on its operating profits.
It shows the relationship between the changes in sales and the changes in
fixed operating income. Thus the operating leverage has its impact mainly on
fixed cost, variable cost and contribution. It indicates the effect of change in sales
revenue on the operating profit (EBIT). Higher operating leverage indicates higher
amount of fixed cost which reduces the operating profit and increases the business
risks.

The following equation is to compute leverage:

% Changes in EBIT Contribution

Operating leverage = ————————
% changes in sales
Contribution = Sales - Variable

Degree of operating leverage

The increase in operating income due to the percentage in sales is called as

‗Degree of Operating leverage‘. This is calculated as follows:
Degree of operating leverage = Percentage change in income

Percentage change in sales

Example (1)

A firm has the following sales and cost data: Sales 5,0000 units @ Rs.6 per
unit. Variable expenses Rs.2 per unit. Fixed expenses Rs. 1, 00,000

The earning will be:

26
 Working
Sales 50,000 x Rs. 6 Rs. 3,00,000 Capital
Management-I
Less: Variable Expenses (Rs. 2 x 50,000) (-) 1,00,000

2,00,000

Less: Fixed Expenses (-) 1,00,000

Earning before interest and Tax (EBIT) 1,00,000

Let us assume that sale is dropped to 25000 units. Then,

Sales (25,000 x 6) 1,50,000

Less: Variable Expenses (-) 50,000

1,00,000

Less: Fixed Cost (-) 1,00,000

(EBIT) Nil

From the above example it can be observed that when the production was
50,000 units the profit was Rs.1,00,000. But when the production fell down to
25,000 units or by 50% (25,000 x 100/50,000) the earnings fell by 100% to NIL.
This exhibits that operating leverage has direct function with the fixed cost. The
operating leverage is computed by adopting the above said equation.
Operating leverage = Contribution/ Operating profit
Contribution = Sales - Variable cost

= sales (for 50000 units) (-) variable cost = 3,00,000 - 1,00,000 = Rs.
2,00,000

Operating Profit = Contribution - Fixed cost

Rs. 1,00,000= Rs. 2,00,000 Rs. 1,00,000

Operating leverage = Contribution = 2,00,000 = 2 times

Operating profit 1,00,000

Supposing the fixed costs are only Rs. 50,000 then operating leverage will
be Rs 200000 = 1.33
150000

27
 Working Thus, when fixed costs are lower, the operating leverage shows a lesser
Capital
degree and will have EBIT (Earnings before Interest and Tax). Supposing, if the
Management
and Investment sales has dropped to Rs. 1,50,000, Variable Cost = Rs. 50,000 and fixed cost = Rs.
1,00,000.

Contribution
Operating leverage 
EBIT/Operating profit

Sales Rs. 1,50,000

Less: Variable Cost 50,000

Contribution 2,00,000

Less: Fixed expenses 1,00,000

EBIT/Operating Profit Nil

1,00,000
Operating leverage = =0
0
Hence, if the production is reduced to 25,000 units (50%), it is not possible
for them to have operating profit.

In the previous example, we have learnt 25,000 units of production will not
yield any operating profit or the company has reached the breakeven point.

Example:-
The following details are available for the year 2000 and 2001

Particulars 2000 2001

Sales: Rs. 4 per unit 50,000 units 55,000 units

Variable cost Rs. 2 per unit Rs. 50,000 Rs. 50,000

Fixed Cost

28
Solution: Working
Capital
Particulars 2000(Rs) 2001 (Rs) Variations Management-I

Sales: 50,000 x 4 2,00,000 55,000 x 4 2,20,000 20,000

Variable cost 50,000 x 2 1,00,000 55,000 x 2 1,10,000 10,000

Contribution 1,00,000 1,10,000 10,000

Less: Fixed Cost 50,000 50,000 Nil

EBIT/Operating Profit 50,000 60,000 10,000

C 1,00,000 1,10,000
The degree of operating leverage = = = =10,000 = 2 times =1.83 times
EBIT 50,000 60,000
In the year 2000, 2 times and in year 2001, 1.83 times

Increase in sales revenue in 2001 is 10% (i.e. 20,000/2, 00,000 x 100).

Therefore, when sales revenue goes up by 10%, EBIT (Earnings before Interest
and Tax) or operating income will increase by 1.83 x 10% = 18.3% and increase
in EBIT by Rs. 10,000.
Thus, operating leverage assists the firm in ascertaining the impact of fixed
cost on sales and operating profit.

Format to calculate the leverages

Common table to calculate the leverages

Amount (Rs.)

Sales -----------------

Less: Variable Cost -----------------

Contribution -----------------

Less: Fixed Cost -----------------

Operating Profit/Earning -----------------

Before Interest and Tax (EBIT) -----------------

29
 Working
Capital Less: Interest -----------------
Management
and Investment Earnings Before Tax (EBIT) -----------------

Less: Tax -----------------

Earning after tax -----------------

Less: Preference dividend -----------------

Earnings available to Equity shareholders -----------------

2. Financial Leverages:
The financial leverage signifies the relationship between the earning power
on equity capital and rate of interest on borrowed capital or debt. By adopting this
leverage, the rate of return on equity capital is modified. When the income on
equity increases (earning per share) because of financial leverage, the position is
said to be favourable leverage. On the other hand if the rate of return to equity
holders falls or if the interest bearing securities get abig share in the earning of the
firm, then there will be ‗unfavourable leverage‘.

The more accepted ratio between ‗debts to equity‘ is 2:1. This ratio favours
leverage effect on equity share and debt.

Illustration 1
A firm has sales of Rs. 10, 00,000; variable cost of Rs. 7,00,000 and fixed
costs of Rs. 2,00,000, and debt of Rs. 5,00,000 at 10% rate of interest. What are
the operating, financial and combined leverages? If the firm wants to double it‘s
earnings before interest and tax (EBIT), how much of rise in sales would be
needed on a percentages basis?

Solution

Statement of existing profit Rs.

Sales 10,00,000

(-) Variable cost (-) 7,00,000

Contribution (-) 3,00,000

30
 (-) Fixed cost 2,00,000 Working
Capital
EBIT 1,00,000 Management-I

(-) Interest @ 10% on 5,00,000 (-) 50,000

Profit before tax (PBT) 50,000

Contribution 3, 00, 000

i) operating leverage =  3
EBIT 1, 00, 000

EBIT 1, 00, 000

ii) Financial leverage =  2
PBT 50, 000

Statement of sales needed to double the Earnings before Interest and Tax (EBIT):
Operating leverage is 3 times i.e. 33 V3% increase in sales volume causes a
100% increase in operating profit or EBIT (Earnings before Interest and Tax).
Thus at the sales of Rs. 13,33,333 the operating profit or EBIT will become Rs.
2,00,000 i.e. doubling the existing one would get higher percentage of earnings.

Sales Variable Rs. 13,33,333

Cost (70%) 9,33,333

Contribution

Fixed Cost 4,00,000

EBIT 2,00,000

2,00,000

Verification:

31
 Working Illustration: 2
Capital
Management The balance sheet of ABC Co. is as follows.
and Investment
Liabilities Rs. Assets Rs

Equity share Capital 60,000 Fixed Assets 1,50,000

Retained Earning 20,000 Current Assets 50,000

10% Long term debt 80,000

Current Liabilities 40,000

2,00,000 2,00,000

The company‘s total assets turnover ratio is 3. Its fixed operating cost is Rs.
1,00,000 and its variable operating ratio is 40%. The income tax is 50%. Calculate
different types of leverages given that the face value of the share is Rs. 10.

Solution:

Sales
Total (assets turnover ratio =
Total Assests

Rs.

Sales 6,00,000

Variable operating cost (40%) (-) 2,40,000

Contribution 3,60,000

Less: Fixed operating cost (-) 1,00,000

EBIT (Earning before interest and tax) 2,60,000

Less: Interest on debt (10% of 80,000) (-) 8,000

2,52,000

Tax 50% (-) 1,26,000

PAT (Profit after tax) 1,26,000

Number of share (6000)

32
EPS Earning per share (1, 26,000 + 6,000) i.e. Rs. 21. Working
Capital
Contribution 3, 60, 000 Management-I
Degree of operating leverage =   1.38
EBIT 2, 60, 000

EBIT 2, 60, 000

Degree of financial leverage =   1.03
PBT 2,52, 000

 Contribution 3,60,000 
Degree of combimed leverage = 1.38=1.03=1.42 or  = =1.42
 PBT 2,52,000 

Illustration: 3
It is proposed to start abusiness requiring a capital of Rs. 10, 00,000 and an
assured return of 15% on investment. Calculate the EPS if (i) the entire capital is
raised by means of Rs. 100 equity share; and (ii) if 50% is raised from equity
share and 50% capital is raised by means of 10% debentures, (ignoring tax).
Solution: i) If the entire capital is raised through Equity: (Assume 50% tax)

Return on investment = 15/100 x 10,00,000 Rs. 1,50,000

Less: Tax @ 50% Rs. 75,000

Rs. 75,000

Total equity capital 75,000

No. of equity shareholders    Rs. 7.50 per share
Face value of shares 10,000

Earnings on investment 75, 000

EPS    Rs. 7.50 per share
No. of equity shares 10, 000

ii) If 50 raised through equity and remaining 50% through dept by

ignoring tax:

Return on Investment = 15/100 x Rs. 10,00,000 1,50,000

Less: Interest on debentures Rs. (10/100 x 5,00,000) 50,000

Earnings available to equity shareholders

Rs. 1,00,000

Earnings 1, 00, 000

EPS    Rs. 20 per share
No. of equity shares 5, 000

33
 Working iii) If 50% raised through equity and remaining 50% through debt by assuming
Capital
50% tax
Management
and Investment
Return on investment = 15/100 x 10,00,000 Rs. 1,50,000

Less: Interest on debentures (10/100 x 5,00,000) Rs. 50,000

EBT Rs. 1,00,000

Less: Income Tax Rs. 50,000

EAT Rs. 50,000

Earning after tax 50, 000

EPS =   Rs.10per share
No. of equity share holder 5, 000

Illustration 4:
From the following data calculate financial, operating and combined
leverage
Sales:

10,000 units Rs. 25 per unit as the selling price Variable cost: Rs. 5 per unit
Fixed cost. Rs, 30,000 Interest cost: Rs. 15,000

Solution:

Sales (10,000 x Rs. 25 per unit) Rs. 2,50,000

Less: Variable cost (10,000 x Rs. 5 per unit 50,000

Contribution 2,00,000

Less: Fixed cost 30,000

Operating profit (EBIT) 1,70,000

Less: Interest 15,000

Earning before tax 1,55,000

34
 EBIT ( Operating profit) 1, 70, 000 Working
a) Financial leverage =   1.09 Times
EBT (Earning before Tax) 1,55, 000 Capital
Contribution 2, 00, 000 Management-I
b) Operating leverage =   1.17 Times
EBIT (Operating profit) 1, 70, 000
Contribution EBIT
c) Combined leverage = Finance leverage x Operating leverage or = x
EBIT EBT
2, 00, 000 1, 70, 000 2, 00, 000
=    1.29 Times
1, 70, 000 1,55, 000 1,55, 000

Illustration 5
From the following data, calculate operating, financial and combined leverage.

Interest: Rs. 10,000; Sales: 15,000 units @ Rs. 10 per unit,

Variable cost: x Rs. 4 per unit; Fixed cost: Rs. 20,000

Solution:

Sales (15,000 x Rs. 10 per unit) Rs. 1,50,000

Less: Variable cost (15,000 x Rs. 4 per unit 50,000

Contribution 90,000

Less: Fixed cost 20,000

Operating Profit (EBIT) 70,000

Less: Interest 10,000

Earning before tax 60,000

Contribution 90, 000

a) Operating leverage =   1.28 Times
EBIT/Operating profit 70, 000

JBIT (Operating profit) 70,000

b) Financial leverage =   1.66 Times
EBT(Earning before Tax) 60,000

c) Combined leverage = Financial leavrage X Operating leverage = 1.28 x 1.166 =

1.49 time

35
 Working Illustration 6
Capital
Management Evaluate two companies in terms of its financial and operating leverages.
and Investment
Solution

Firm A Firm B

Sales Rs. 20,00,000 Rs. 30,00,000

Variable Cost 40% Sales 30% Sales

Fixed Cost Rs. 5,00,000 Rs. 7,00,000

Interest Rs. 1,00,000 Rs. 1,25,000

Solution:

Firm A (Rs.) Firm B (Rs.)

Sales 20,00,000 30,00,000

Less: Variable Cost

A: 40/100 x 20,00,000 8,00,000

B: 30/100 x 30,00,000 9,00,000

Contribution 12,00,000 21,00,000

Less: Fixed cost Firm A 5,00,000

Firm B 7,00,000

Operating Profit (EBIT) 7,00,000 14,00,000

Less: Interest 1,00,000

1,25,000

EBT 6,00,000 12,75,000

36
 EBIT 7, 00, 000 14, 00, 000 Working
a) Financial leverage = A= ;B  Capital
EBT 6, 00, 000 12, 75, 000
Management-I
Firm A = 1.16 Times; Firm B = 1.09 Times
Contribution 12, 00, 000 21, 00, 000
b) Operating leverage = A= ;B 
EBIT 7, 00, 000 14, 00, 000
Firm A = 1.71 Times; Firm B = 1.5 Times

Firm A has greater business and financial risk then Firm B.

Illustration 7
Consider the following data of XYZ Ltd:
Selling price per unit : Rs. 60; Variable cost per unit : Rs. 40;

Fixed Cost : Rs. 3, 00,000; Interest burden : Rs. 1,00,000;

Tax rate 50% Preference dividend Rs. 50,000.

Calculate the three types of leverages if the number of units sold is 10,000.

Solution:

Sales (10,000 x Rs. 60 per unit) Rs. 6,00,000

Less: Variable cost (10,000 x Rs. 40 per unit 4,00,000

Contribution 2,00,000

Less: Fixed cost 3,00,000

Operating Profit (EBIT) 1,00,000

Add: Interest 1,00,000

Total operating loss (EBIT) 2,00,000

EBIT 1, 00, 000

a) Financial leverage = =  1.5 Times
EBT 2, 00, 000
Contribution 2, 00, 000
b) Operating leverage = =  2 Times
EBIT/Operating profit 1, 00, 000
c) Combined leverage = Financial leverage x Operating leverage = -2 x 0.5 = -1 Times

37
 Working Illustration 8
Capital
Management The following dataare available for the company x Ltd.
and Investment
Selling price per unit Rs120

Variable cost per unit Rs70

Total fixed cost Rs. 2, 00,000

What is the operating leverage when X Ltd. produces and sells 6,000 units ii)
what is the percentage change that will occur in the EBIT (Earnings before
Interest and Tax) of X Ltd., if output increases by 5%

Solution:
i) Let us first take 6,000 units

Rs.

Sales (6,000 x Rs. 120 per unit) 7,20,000

Less: Variable cost (6,000 x Rs. 70 per unit) 4,20,000

Contribution 3,00,000

Less: Fixed cost 2,00,000

Operating Profit (EBIT) 1,00,000

Contribution 3, 00, 000

Operating leverage = =  3 Times
EBIT/Operating profit 1, 00, 000
ii) Influence of 5% increase in output on EBIT

Rs.

Sales = (6,000 + 6,000 x 5/100 = 6,300 x Rs. 120 per unit) 7,56,000

Less: Variable cost = 6,300 x Rs. 70 per unit (-) 4,41,000

Contribution 3,15,000

Less: Fixed cost 2,00,000

Operating Profit (EBIT) 1,15,000

38
Percentage change in EBIT (Earnings before Interest and Tax) at 5% increase in Working
Capital
output
Management-I
At 6,000 units EBIT is Rs. 1,00,000. At 6,300 units EBIT is Rs. 1, 15,000

15,000

Illustration 9
Shrirang Ltd. has an equity share capital of Rs. 5, 00,000 divided into shares
of Rs. 100 each. It wishes to raise Rs. 3, 00, 000 for modernization plans. The
company plans the following financing schemes:

1. All equity shares

2. Rs. 1, 00,000 in equity share and Rs. 2, 00,000 in debt @ 10% p.a.

3. All debt at 10% p.a.

4. Rs. 1, 00,000 in equity shares and Rs. 2, 00,000 in preference share capital
with rate of dividend at 8%
The company estimated the Earnings before Interest and Tax (EBIT) as Rs.
1, 50,000. The corporate rate of tax is 50%. Calculate the Earnings per Share
(EPS) in each case. Give a comment as to which capital structure is suitable?

Solution:

a. All Equity shares:

Rs.

EBIT Rs. 1,50,000

Less: Tax @ 50% 75,000

Earnings available to equity shareholder 75,000

Rs.5,00,000+Additional capital of Rs. 3,00,000 8,00,000

No. of equity shares = =  8,000 Shares
Face Value of the shares Rs. 100 100
Earnings available to equity shareholders 75,000
EPS = =  Rs. 9.37 per share
No. of equity shareholders 8,000

39
 Working b. Rs. 1,00,000 in equity shares and Rs. 2,00,000 in debt @ 10%
Capital
Management
Total Capital composition Rs.
and Investment
Original equity capital (5,000 x Rs. 100 each) 5,00,000

b) Planed equity capital (1,000 x Rs. 100 each) 1,00,000

10% debentures (2,000 x Rs. 100 Each) 2,00,000

8,00,000

Earnings before interest and tax 1,50,000

Less: Interest @ 10% on 2,00,000 20,000

Earning before Tax 1,30,000

Less: Tax @ 50% 65,000

Earnings available to equity shareholders 65,000

Comments: Financial plan c) is preferred when compared to plan a) and b)

as plan c) offers Rs. 12.00 per share which is highest as compared to other plans.

Illustration: 10
A firm has sales of Rs. 10,00,000 Variable Cost Rs. 7,00,000 and Fixed cost
Rs. 2,00,000 and debt of Rs. 5,00,000 at 10% rate of interest. What are the
operating and financial leverages?
If the firm wants to double up its earnings before interest and tax, how much
of a rise in sales would be needed on a percentage basis.

Solution:

Statement of Present level of Profit

Rs.

Sales 10,00,000

Less: Variable cost 7,00,000

Contribution 3,00,000

40
 Working
Less: Fixed cost 2,00,000 Capital
Management-I
EBIT 1,00,000

Less: Interest 50,000

Earnings before tax 50,000

EBIT 1,50,000
A) Finance leverage = = =2 Times
EBT 50,000
Contribution 3,00,000
B) Operating leverage = = =3 Times
EBIT 1,00,000
C) Combined leverage = OL= FL=3 x 2 = 6 Times

Calculation of sales required to double EBIT;

Since operating leverage is 3 times, 33 1/3% increase in sales volume causes

a 100% increase in operating profit (EBIT). Thus at the sales of Rs. 13, 33,333,
EBIT will become Rs. 2, 00,000. i.e. doubling the existing one. Therefore, an
increase in sales volume by 33 1/3% would double the EBIT.

Illustration: 11
The following data pertain to Forge Limited:
Existing capital structure: 10 lakh Equity shares of Rs. 10 each

Tax Rate: 50%

Forge Limited plans to raise additional capital of Rs. 100 lakhs for financing
an expansion project. It is evaluating two alternative financing plans : i) Issue of
10,00,000 equity shares of Rs. 10 each and ii) Issue of Rs. 100 lakh debentures
carrying 14% interest.
You are required to compute indifference point of EBIT.

Solution:
Plan I = 10, 00,000 equity shares to be issued as Rs. 10/- each

Plan II = 14% debentures to be issued of Rs. 100, 00,000

Indifference level of EBIT for these two financial plans may be as follows:

EBIT (1-t) (EBIT-lnt)(1-t)

41
 Working Where, N, = Number of shares in plan I N2 = Number of shares in plan II Int =
Capital
Management Interest payment in plan II
and Investment
Now,

EBIT (1-0.5) (EBIT-14,00,000) (I-0.5)

20,00,000

10,00,000
10,00,000 x 0.5 EBIT = 0.5 EBIT (20,00,000) - 0.5 x 20,00,000 x 14,00,000

EBIT = Rs. 28,00,000

So, indifference level of EBIT for two plans is Rs. 28,00,000.

Illustration: 12
The following data relates to two companies:

P Ltd Q Ltd

(in Rs. Lakhs) (in Rs. Lakhs)

Sales 500 1000

Variable 200 300

Cost 300 700

Contribution 150 400

Fixed 150 300

Cost EBIT 50 100

Interest 100 200

EBT

Your are required to calculate the operating, financial and combined

leverages for the companies.

42
 Working
Solution:
Capital
Management-I
P Ltd Q Ltd

Contribution 3, 00, 000 7, 00, 000

Operating leverage = 2  2.33
EBIT 1,50, 000 3, 00, 000

EBIT 1,50, 000 3, 00, 000

Financial leverage =  1.5  1.5
PBT 1, 00, 000 2, 00, 000

Combined leverage = O.L x F.L 2 x 1.5 = 3 2.33 x 1.5 = 3.5

Illustration: 13
Anall equity firm has 10 lakh equity shares of Rs. 10 each. It is planning to
double the plant capacity. The financing plans under consideration are: i) issue 10
lakh equity shares of Rs. 10 each; ii) issue 14% debentures.

If the firm is subject to 50% tax rate, determine indifference point of EBIT
and interpret results.

Issue of 10 lacks shares Issue of 14% debentures

of Rs. 10 each

No. of existing shares 10,00,000 10,00,000

No. of new shares 10,00,000 ----

Total Shares 20,00,000 10,00,000

EPS EBIT (1-0.5) (EBIT - 14,00,000) (1 - 0.5)

20,00,000 10,00,00

Difference level of EBIT is the value of EBIT in the following equation.

EBIT (1-0.5) (EBIT - 14,00,000) (1 - 0.5)

 EBIT = Rs. 28,00,000
20,00,000 10,00,00

The indifference level of EBIT i.e. Rs. 28, 00,000, shows that if the firm
achieves an EBIT of Rs. 25 00,000, then the EPS (Earnings per Share) of the firm
would be same whether it adopts the financial plan (i) or financial plan (ii).

43
 Working Illustration: 14
Capital
Management X Ltd. has estimated that for new product, its BEP (Breakeven Point) is
and Investment 2,000 units if the item is sold for Rs. 14 per unit. The Cost Accounting
Department has currently identified variable cost of Rs. 9 per unit. Calculate the
degree of operating leverage for sales volume of 2,500 unitsand 3,000 units.

What do you infer from the degree of operating leverage at the sales
volume 2,500 units and 3,000 units and their difference, if any?

Solution:
Statement of Operating Leverage

Particulars 200 units 2500 units 3000 units

Per unit Total Per unit Total (Rs.) Per unit Total
(Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.)

Sales 14 28,000 14 35,000 14 42,000

Less: Variable 9 18,000 9 22,000 9 27,000

cost

Contribution 5 10,000 5 12,500 5 15,000

Less: Fixed 10,000 10,000 10,000

cost

EBIT Nil 2,500 5,000

Contribution 15,000 15,000

Operating leverage = = = 5 Times = = 3 Times
EBIT 2,500 5,000

Inference: If the sales volume is increased by 25% (from 2000 to 25000

units), the operating income increased up to Rs. 2,500 from the Breakeven Point
(BEP). If the incremental sales is further increased by 20% (from 2,500 to 3,000),
the operating income has increased up to Rs. 5,000, which is double than Rs.
2,000 at 2,500 units of sales. Therefore, fixed assets were exploited more to get
higher operating profit.

44
Illustration: 15 Working
Capital
Bhagavti Stores Ltd. has a total capitalization of the 10 lakhs entirely of Management-I
equity shares of Rs. 50 each. It wishes to raise another Rs. 5 lakhs for expansion
through one of its two possible financial plans, i) All equity shares of Rs, 50 each
ii) All debentures carrying 9% interest. Assume EBIT (Earnings before Interest
and Tax) at Rs. 1,40,000 and Income Tax 50%. Calculate financial leverage and
the Earnings per Share (EPS) of these financial plans.

Solution:
Financial plan I: All through equity shares of Rs. 50 each

Total Capitalisation Rs.

Original equity capital (20,000 x Rs. 50 each) 10,00,000

Additional capital (10,000 x Rs. 50 each) 5,00,000

Total capital 15,00,000

EBIT 1,40,000

Less: tax @ 50% 70,000

EAT 70,000

Earning after Tax 70,000

EPS = = = Rs. 2.33 Times
No. of equity shareholders 30,000
EBIT 1,40,000
Financial leverage = - =1 time
EBIT-1 1,40,000-0

There is no leverage effect as there is no element of debt in this plan.

Financial Plan II : All debentures carrying 9% interest.

45
 Working
Capital Total Capitalisation Rs.
Management
and Investment Original equity capital (20,000 x Rs. 50 each) 10,00,000

Additional capital through Debt @ 9% 5,00,000

Total capital 15,00,000

EBIT 1,40,000

Less: Interest @ 9% on 5,00,000 45,000

Earnings before Tax 95,000

Less: tax @ 50% 47,500

Earnings available to equity shares 47,500

Earning available to Equity shareholders 47,500

EPS = = = Rs. 2.37 Times
No. of equity shareholders 20,000
EBIT 1,40,000
Financial leverage = - = 1.47 Times
EBIT-1 1,40,000-45,000

Illustration: 16
An Analytical statement of X Ltd. is shown below. It is based on an output (sales)
level of 80,000 units.

Sales 9.60. QD and

Less: Variable cost V<< 5,60,000

Contribution 4,00,000

Less: Fixed cost 2,40,000

Exit 1,60,000

Less: Interest 60,000

Earnings before tax 1,00,000

Less: Income tax 50,000

46
 Working
Net Income 50,000 Capital
Management-I
Calculate: a) Operating leverage b) Financial leverage and c) Combined leverage

Solution:

EBIT 1, 60, 000

a) Financial leverage    1.6 times
EBT 1, 00, 000

Contribution 4, 00, 000

b) Operating leverage    2.5 times
EBIT 1, 60, 000

c) Combined leverage  OL x FL  2.5 x 1.6  4 times

Strategies in Working Capital Management

So far the banks were the sole source of funds for working capital needs of
business sector. At present more finance options are available to a Finance
Manager to see the operations of his firm goes smoothly. Depending on the risk
exposure of business, the following strategies are evolved to manage the working
capital.

Conservative Approach

A conservative strategy suggests not taking any risk in working capital

management and carrying high levels of current assets in relation to sales. Surplus
current assets enable the firm to absorb sudden variations in sales, production
plans, and procurement time without disrupting production plans. It requires to
maintain a high level of working capital and should be financed by long-term
funds like share capital or long-term debt. Availability of sufficient working
capital will enable the smooth operational activities of the firm and there would be
no stoppages of production for want of raw materials, consumables. Sufficient
stocks of finished goods are maintained to meet the market fluctuations. The
higher liquidity levels reduce the risk of insolvency. But lower risk translates into
lower return. Large investments in current assets lead to higher interest and
carrying costs and encouragement for inefficiency. But conservative policy will
enable the firm to absorb day to day business risk. It assures continuous flow of
operations and eliminates worry about recurring obligations. Under this strategy,
long-term financing covers more than the total requirement for working capital.
The excess cash is invested in short-term marketable securities and in need these
securities are sold-off in the market to meet the urgent requirements of working
capital.

47
 Working Financing Strategy
Capital
Management Long-term funds = Fixed assets + Total permanent current assets + Part of
and Investment temporary current assets

Short-term funds = Part of temporary current assets

Aggressive Approach

Under this approach current assets are maintained just to meet the current
liabilities keeping any cushion for the variations in working capital needs. The
core working capital is financed by long-term sources of capital and seasonal
variations are met through short-term borrowings. Adoption of this strategy will
minimize the investment in net working capital and ultimately it lowers the cost of
financing working capital. The main drawback of this strategy is that it
necessitates frequent financing and also increases risk as the firm is vulnerable to
sudden shocks. A conservative current asset financing strategy would go for more
long-term finance which reduces the risk of uncertainty associated with frequent
refinancing. The price of this strategy is higher financing costs since long-term
rates will normally exceed short term rates. But when aggressive strategy is
adopted, sometimes the firm runs into mismatches and defaults. It is the cardinal
principle of corporate finance that long-term assets should be financed by long-
term sources and short-term assets are a mix of long and short-term sources.

Financing Strategy

Long-term funds = Fixed assets + Part of permanent current assets

Short-term funds = Part of permanent current assets + Total temporary
current assets

Matching Approach

Under matching approach to financing working capital requirements of a

firm, each asset in the balance sheet assets side would be offset with the financing
instrument of the same approximate maturity. The basic objective of this method
of financing is that the permanent component of current assets,and fixed assets
would be met with long-term funds and the short-term or seasonal variations in
current assets would be financed with short-term debt. If the long-terra funds are
used for short-term needs of the firm it can identify and take steps to correct the
mismatch in financing. Efficient working capital management techniques are
those that compress the operating cycle. The length of the operating cycle is equal
to the sum of the lengths of the inventory period and the receivables period. Just-

48
in-time inventory management technique reduces carrying costs by slashing the Working
time that goods are parked as inventories. To shorten the receivables period Capital
Management-I
without necessarily reducing the credit period, corporate can offer trade discounts
for prompt payment. This strategy if also called as ‗hedging approach‘.

Financing Strategy

Long-term funds = Fixed assets + Total permanent current assets Short-term

funds = Total temporary current assets]

Zero Working Capital Approach

This is one of the latest trends in working capital management. The idea is
to have zero working capital i.e., at all times the current assets shall equal the
current liabilities. Excess investment in current assets is avoided and firm meets
its current liabilities out of the matching current assets. As current ratio is 1 and
the quick ratio is below 1, there may be apprehensions about the liquidity, but if
ail current assets are performing and are accounted at their realizable values, these
fears are misplaced. The firm saves opportunity cost on excess investments in
current assets and as bank cash credit limits are linked to the inventory levels,
interest costs are also saved. There would be a self-imposed financial discipline on
the firm to manage their activities within their current liabilities and current assets
and there may not be a tendency to over borrow or divert funds. Zero working
capital also ensure a smooth and uninterrupted working capital cycle, and it would
pressurise the Financial Management to improve the quality of the current assets
at all times to keep them 100% realizable. There would also be a constant
displacement in the current liabilities and the possibility of having over dues may
diminish. The tendency to postpone current handily payments has to be curbed
and working casual always maintained at zero. Zero working capital would call
for a fine balancing act in Financial Management, and the success in this
endeavour would get reflected in healthier bottom lines.
Total Current Assets = Total Current Liabilities or Total Current Assets-
Total Current Liabilities = Zero

Working Capital Policies

The degree of current assets that a company employs for achieving a desired
level of sales is manifested in working capital folio. In practice, the business
concerns follow three forms of working capital policies which are discussed in
brief as follows:

49
 Working Restricted Policy: It involves the rigid estimation of working capital to the
Capital
requirements of the concern and then forcing it to adhere to the estimate.
Management
and Investment Deviations from the estimate are not allowed and the estimate will not provide for
any contingencies or for any unexpected events.
Relaxed Policy: It involves the allowing of sufficient cushion for fluctuations in
kinds of requirement for financing various items of working capital. The estimate
is made after taking into account the provision for contingencies and unexpected
events.
Moderate Policy The relationship of sales and corresponding level of investment
in current assets is shown in figure.

Illustration 17
From the following details you are required to make an assessment of the
average capital requirement of Hindustan Ltd.

Particulars Average period Estimate for

st
the 1 year
of credit
(Rs.)

Purchase of material 6 weeks 26,00,000

Wages 1½ Weeks 19,50,000

Overheads:

Rent, Rates, etc 6 months 1,00,000

Salaries 1 month 8,00,000

Other overheads 2 months 7,50,000

Sales cash 2,00,000

Credit sales 2 months 60,00,000

Average amount of stocks and work-in- 4,00,000

progress

Average amount of undrawn profit 3,00,000

50
 Working
It is assumed that all expenses and income were made at even rate for the
Capital
year Assessment of Average amount of working capital Requirement Management-I

Current Assets

Stock and work-in-process 4,00,000

Debtor (Rs. 60,00,000 x 2/12) 10,00,000

(a) 14,00,000

Current Liabilities:

Lag in payments:

Purchases (Rs. 26,00,000 x 6/52) 3,00,000

Wages (Rs. 19,50,000 x 1.5/52) 56,250

Rent (Rs. 1,00,000 x 6/12) 50,000

Salaries (Rs. 8,00,000 x 1/12) 66,667

Other overheads (Rs. 7,50,000 x 2/12) 1,25,000

(b) 5,97,917

Total Working Capital (a) – (b) 8,02,083

Less: Average amount of un 3,00,000

drawn profit

Net Working Capital 5,02,083

Required

Illustration 18
Estalla Garment Co. Ltd is a famous manufacturer and exporter of garments
to the European countries. The Finance Manager of the company is preparing the
working capital forecast for the next year. After carefully screening the entire
document he collected the following information -

51
 Working Production during the previous year was 15,00,000 units. The same level of
Capital
activity is intended to be maintained during the current year. The expected ratios
Management
and Investment of cost to selling price are:

Raw material 40%

Direct wages 20%

Overheads 20%
The raw materials ordinarily remain in stores for 3 months before
production. Every unit of production remains in the process for 2 months and is
assumed to be consisting of 100% raw material, wages and overheads. Finished
goods remain in warehouse for 3 months. Credit allowed by the creditors is a
month from the date of the delivery of raw material and credit given to debtors is
3 months from the date of dispatch.
Estimated balance of cash to be held Rs. 2, 00,000

Lag in payment of wages 1/2 month

Lag in payment of expenses 1/2 month

Selling price is Rs. 10 per unit. Both production and sales are in a regular
cycle.You are required to make a provision of 1.0% for contingency (except
cash).Relevant assumptions may be made. You have recently joined the company
as an Assistant Finance Manager. The job of preparing the forecast statement has
been given to you. You are required to prepare the forecast statement. The
Finance Manager is particularly interested in applying the quantitative techniques
for forecasting the working capital needs of the company. You are also required to
explain the approach in brief.

52
Calculation and Estimation of Profit Margin Working
Capital
Management-I

Fig 1.5 Profit margin calculation and estimation of Jet airways

Financial leverage and trading on equity

Financial leverage is a tool with which a financial manager can maximize
the return to the equity shareholders. The capital of a company consists of equity,
preference, debentures, public deposits and other long term sources of funds. He
has to carefully select the securities to mobilize the funds. The proper blend of
debt equity should be maintained. The ratio through which he balances the mix of
debt applied on the capital mix offers benefits to the equity shareholders is known
as Trading on Equity. As the debits associated with the cost of interest, that can be
directly changed to profit and loss account or changed against the profit, thereby
can reduce the burden of income tax. The benefit so gained will be passed on the
equity shareholders. In such circumstances the EPS (Earnings per Share) will be
more. If the company prefers to raise the account of debt through equity, it will
lose the opportunity of charging the interest directly against the profit. As a result
of this, it had to pay more tax to the Government and in turn availability to equity
shareholder would reduce.

53
 Working Financial leverage and Operating leverage
Capital
Management The two quantifiable tools viz., operating and financial leverage are adopted
and Investment to know the earnings per share and also the market value of the share. Thus,
financial leverage is a better tool compared to operating leverage. Change in the
Earnings per Share (EPS) due to changes in EBIT (Earnings before Interest and
Tax) results in variation in market price. Therefore financial and operating
leverages act as a handy tool to the analyst or to the financial manager to take the
decision with regard to capitalization. He can identify the exact relationship
between the EPS (Earnings per Share) and the EBIT (Earnings before Interest and
Tax) and plan accordingly. High leverage indicates high financial risks which
would signal the finance manager to select the securities carefully.

Financial leverage = Operating income/EBIT or EBIT = EBIT

Taxable income/EBIT EBIT (-) EBT

Where, EBIT = Earnings before interest and tax EBT = Earnings Before tax
= Interest
Example:-

A company has the following capital structure:

Solution:

EBIT EBIT 2,00,000

Financial leverage  or 
EBIT EBIT-1 2, 00, 000  75, 000
EBIT = EBIT - Interest
1,25,000=2,00,000-75,000
2, 00, 000
Now financial leverage =  1.6 Times
1, 25, 000

This shows that increase in the Earnings before Interest and Tax (EBIT) by
a rupee will result in increase of the Earnings per Share (EPS) by 1 .6 or 16 %.

Combined leverage
This leverage shows the relationship between a change in sales and the
corresponding variation in taxable income. If the management feels that a certain
percentage change in sales would result in percentage change in taxable income
they would like to know the level or degree of change and hence they adopt this
leverage. Thus, degree of leverage is adopted to forecast the future study of sales
levels and the resultant increase/decrease in taxable income. This degree
establishes the relationship between contribution and taxable income.

54
This can be computed by adopting the following formula. Working
Capital
Combined leverage = Operating leverage x Financial leverage
Management-I
Contribution EBIT
Combined leverage  x
Operating profit/EBIT EBT
Contribution
Combined leverage 
Earning before tax
Contribution
Combined leverage 
Taxable income (PBT)

Example:
A Company has a sales of Rs. 2, 00,00. The variable costs are 40% of the
sales and the fixed expenses Rs. 60,000. The interest on borrowed capital is
assumed to be Rs. 20,000.
Compute the combined leverage and show the impact on taxable income
when sales increases by 10%.

Sales Rs. 2,00,000 Therefore Combined

C
Less: Variable costs (40% of sales) (-) 80,000 leverage 
PBT
1, 20, 000
Contribution (C) 1,20,000  3
40, 000
Less: Fixed Expenses 60,000

EBIT 60,000

Less capital: Interest on borrowed (-) 20,000

capital

Taxable income (PBT) 40,000

This leverage of 3 tells that wherever the sales increase by Rs.1, the taxable
income also increase by Rs. 3. This can be examined by taking the sales increase
by 10%

Original Sales (As above) 2,00,000

New sales (10% more) 2,20,000

Less – Variable cost (40%) (-) 88,000

55
 Working
Capital Contribution (c) 1,32,000
Management
and Investment Less: Fixed cost (-) 60,000

Operating profit/PBIT 72,000

Less interest on borrowed capital (-) 20,000

Taxable income PBT (or EBT) 52,000

This shows that there is an increase in profit by Rs. 12,000. (i.e. 52,000 -
40,000) because of increase in sales by 10%. Again the leverage 3 for an increase
of 10% on sales, the taxable income will increase by 10 x 3 - 30%. Accordingly
Increase in taxable income = Incremental profit x 100 = 12,000 x 100 = 30%
Original Profit 40,000

Check your progress 8

1. In simple words, __________ is a force applied at a particular point to get
the desired result.

a. Asset
b. Leverage

2. ___________is a tool with which a financial manager can maximize the

return to the equity shareholders.

a. Financial leverage

b. management

1.10 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we have discussed the importance of working capital in detail.

In this unit we studied that the working capital is circulating capital. In

healthy human body proper circulation of blood is necessary, similarly in healthy
business adequate circulating capital is necessary. Working capital requirements
vary from industry to industry.Capital structure decision lead either to high
gearing or low gearing.We even had a discussion on business risk and studied that

56
business faces business risk which is measured by operating leverages. It also Working
Capital
faces financial risk if it borrows on long term basis this is measured by financial
Management-I
leverages. We eve studied about working capital management and studied that it
includes management of various components of current assets as well as current
liabilities. The various types of working capital were also discussed over here.
There are different policies for financing current assets. Types of working capital
include Net working Capital, Gross Working Capital, Permanent Working
Capital, Temporary or Variable Working Capital, Balance sheet working capital,
Cash working capital and Negative working Capital.We even discussed the
Factors determining working capital and studied that these factors include Nature
of Industry, Demand of Industry, Cash Requirements, Nature of Business, Time,
Volume of Sales, Terms of purchase and Sales, Inventory Turnover, Receivable
Turnover, Business Turnover, Business Cycle, Volume of Current Assets,
Variation of Sales, Production Cycle, Credit Controls, Liquidity and Profitability,
Inflation, Seasonal Fluctuations, Profit Planning and Control, Repayable Ability,
Cash Reserves etc. We even studied the operating cycle and studied that
operating cycle consists of four stages: The raw materials and stores inventory
stage, the work- in- progress stage, the finished goods inventory stage and the
receivable stage. There are some internal, external and general factors which
affect the capital structure decisions. We also covered the concept of leverages
and its types – Operating, Financial and combined leverage.
This unit is going to be of great help for the students in understanding the
concept of working capital and various other concepts associated with it.

1.11 Answers for Check Your Progress

Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-b), (2-b), (3-a)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

57
 Working
Capital Check your progress 4
Management
and Investment Answers: (1-b), (2-a),

Check your progress 5

Answers: (1-b), (2-b)

Check your progress 6

Answers: (1-a), (2-a)

Check your progress 7

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

Check your progress 8

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

1.12 Glossary
1. Working Capital -A firm's investment in short-term assets--cash,
marketable securities, inventory, and accounts receivable.

1.13 Assignment
Explain the concept of leverage and its types.

1.14 Activities
What are the various factors that will affect the requirement of working
capital?

1.15 Case Study

Visit a manufacturing company in your city and understand the working
capital management of the company.

58
 Working
1.16 Further Readings Capital
Management-I
1. Financial Management - R V Kulkarni

2. Financial Management - Prof. Dr. Mahesh A. Kulkarni

3. Financial Management – Ravi M. Kishore

4. Management Accounting for T.Y. B.Com. By Chopda Chaudhary

5. Financial Management - ICFAI

59
 Working
Capital UNIT 2: WORKING CAPITAL
Management
and Investment MANAGEMENT - II
Unit Structure
2.0 Learning Objectives

2.1 Introduction
2.2 Inventory Management
2.2.1 Purpose of Holding Inventories

2.2.2 Types of Inventories

2.2.3 Inventory Management Techniques

2.2.4 Pricing of Inventories

2.3 Receivables Management

2.3.1 Purpose of Receivables
2.3.2 Cost of Maintaining Receivables

2.3.3 Monitoring Receivable

2.4 Cash Management

2.4.1 Reasons for Holding Cash
2.4.2 Factors for Efficient Cash Management

2.5 Let Us Sum Up

2.6 Answers For Check Your Progress

2.7 Glossary
2.8 Assignment
2.9 Activities
2.10 Case Study

2.11 Further Readings

60
 Working
2.0 Learning Objectives Capital
Management-II
After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 Discuss inventory management

 Explain Receivables management

 Practise cash management techniques

 Know the purpose of inventory

 List inventory management techniques

2.1 Introduction
Inventories form a major chunk of current assets of a company and huge
amount of funds are often invested in them. Hence, it is extremely important that a
firm manages its inventories in an efficient and most effective manner.

2.2 Inventory Management

Inventories are asset items held for sale in the ordinary course of business or
goods that will be used or consumed in the production of goods to be sold. The
description and measurement of inventory require careful attention because the
investment in inventories is frequently the largest current asset of merchandising
(retail) and manufacturing businesses.

An inventory can be defined as the raw materials, work-in-process goods

and completely finished goods that are considered to be the portion of a business's
assets that are ready or will be ready for sale. Inventory represents one of the most
important assets that most businesses possess, because the turnover of inventory
represents one of the primary sources of revenue generation and subsequent
earnings for the company's shareholders/owners.

2.2.1 Purpose of Holding Inventories

Keeping the stock of inventories involves locking of the company‘s funds
and increase in storage and handling costs. Companies hold inventories basically
for 3 motives.

 Transactions motive i.e. to ensure smooth production and sales operations.

61
 Working  Precautionary motive i.e. to guard against the volatility of demand and
Capital
Management
supply factors.
and Investment  Speculative motive which is done to take benefit of price fluctuations.

Let us see these specific motives in detail.

2.2.2 Types of Inventories

The various forms of inventories include

 Raw material inventories are the ones that form the basic ingredients to be
converted into finished products by means of manufacturing process. A
company buys and stores the raw materials to be used later.

 Work-in-process inventories are semi-finished goods and require more

processing before becoming finished goods that are ready for sale.

 Finished goods inventories are completely ready products that can be sold.

 Other than above three basic inventories, there is one more inventory type
called as supplies, also known as stores and spares. Though they are not
directly into production, but are required for the process of production.
Examples of supplies are materials like soaps, brooms, oil, fuel, light, etc.
Inventory Management aims at reducing the direct and indirect costs that are
associated with the inventory. It also includes maintaining an appropriate and
sufficient inventory supply for the smooth production and sales activities. The
severity of inventory management of a firm depends upon the extent to which the
firm has invested in inventories. An ideal and efficient inventory management -

 Must ensure that the raw materials are supplied at the right time and
quantities for smooth production operations.

 Should anticipate price fluctuations and accordingly keep enough supply of

raw materials in times of shortage.

 Maintain a healthy supply of finished goods for better customer service as

well as smooth sales activities.

 Reduce the carrying time and expenses.

 Exercise control over investments made in inventories.

62
2.2.3 Inventory Management Techniques Working
Capital
To determine the optimum level of inventory, there should be proper Management-II
inventory management techniques which in turn should be in accordance with the
shareholders‘ wealth maximization. The importance of effective inventory
management depends on the size of the investment of the inventory. A firm
should use a systematic approach to manage its inventory. There are 3 different
inventory management techniques.

 Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)

 Reorder Point

 Stock Level

Economic Order Quantity (EOQ)

The Economic Order Quantity is the optimal order size that results in the
lowest total of order and carrying cost for an item of inventory given its expected
usage, carrying cost and ordering cost. The EOQ determines the order size which
will minimize the total inventory cost.

Total Inventory Cost = Ordering Cost + Carrying Cost

The ordering cost includes the cost of acquiring raw material. It includes the
activities like purchase ordering, transporting, storing and inspecting.
The carrying cost is the cost incurred for maintaining a given level of
inventory.
Examples:

 Size of order (units) : 300

Number of orders in a year : 8

Total ordering cost at Rs. 100 per order = 800

 Size of order (units) : 400

Number of orders in a year: 6

Total ordering cost at Rs. 100 per order = 600

63
 Working  Size of order (units) : 600
Capital
Management Number of orders in a year: 4
and Investment
Total ordering cost at Rs. 100 per order = 400

From the above examples, we can see that a company can reduce its total
ordering cost by increasing the order size which will reduce the number of orders.

EOQ Formula
= √(2AO / C ) i.e sqroot (2AO / C)
where A = total requirement

O = order cost
C = carrying cost

Example:
The total requirement is 2000 units. Ordering cost per order is Rs 40 and
carrying cost per unit is Rs 2. The EOQ will be
EOQ = √ (2 X 2000 X 40 / 2)

= 282.84
= 283 units

Reorder point

After EOQ, the second technique for inventory management is reorder point
where the reorder point is the inventory level at which an order should be given to
restock the inventory. To decide the reorder point, we should know

 Lead time

 Average usage

 Economic order quantity

Lead time is the time taken to restock the inventory once the order is given.
Reorder point = Lead time X Average usage

Suppose, EOQ = 1000 units and the lead time is 4 weeks and average usage
is 100 units per week. Here the new order should be placed at the end of 10th
week. But as there is lead time of 4 weeks, the order should be placed at the end
of 6th week. So, here the reorder point = 100 units X 4 weeks = 400 units.

64
Stock Level Working
Capital
This technique keeps track of the goods the company has, the issue of goods Management-II
and the receipt of orders. It keeps track of the level of inventory it has. If this
technique or system reports that an item is at or below the reorder point level, the
firm places an order for the item.

2.2.4 Pricing of Inventories

Following are the different ways of valuing the inventories and these
methods are important to have an efficient inventory management process. These
methods are used to value the raw materials:
 First-in-first-out (FIFO)
 Last-in-first-out (LIFO)
 Weighted Average Cost method
 Standard Price method
 Replacement or Current Price method
Inventory Pricing

Method Assumption Income Statement Balance Sheet

Effect Effect

FIFO When a company The older inventory The remaining

sells an item from was cheaper, so cost inventory carried on
inventory the oldest of sale is less and the balance sheet is
one is sold income is higher the re west, and most
valuable

LIFO When an item is The never (more Remaining inventory

sold from inventory expensive) inventory is shown as an older
the newest one is is sold, so the cost of and less valuable
sold sales is higher and asset
income is lower

Average The average cost of Both cost of sales Inventory asset will
cost all inventory is used and income will be be between the
for both cost of between the levels levels recorded
sales and inventory recorded under under LIFO or FIFO
LIFO or FIFO

65
 Working Source- Inventory Accounting Methods: LIFO, FIFO, Weighted Average
Capital
and Specific Identification, financial-education.com
Management
and Investment  First-in-first-out (FIFO): In this method, the raw materials from the stores
will be issued in the order in which they are received. Hence, the cost of
material obtained first will determine the pricing in this method.

 Last-in-first-out (LIFO): In LIFO method, the recently purchased material

will determine the price of the issued material.

 Weighted Average Cost Method: The issued material will be priced purely
on the basis of weighted average where, the weights will be decided based
on the quantity.

 Standard Price method: In this method, a predetermined standard cost will

be used to price the issued material. On purchase of the material, this
standard price will be deducted from the stock account.

 Replacement / Current Price method: This method prices the material at

the value that is realized at the time of issuance.

Consolidated Income Statement Projections (USD Mns) of Kingfisher

Airlines

Particulars 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012

Total Operating Revenues 1,040 1,787 2,430 2,885 3,339

1

Total Operating Expenses 1,360 1,812 2,054 2,374 2,772

Operating Income (Loss) (320) (24) 375 511 619

EBIT

EBITDA (295) (2) 399 538 650

Total Other Income (Expense) (55) (1) (26) 32 77

Net Profit (Loss) (376) (25) 349 543 696

66
 Working
Check your progress 1 Capital
Management-II
1. The __________is the optimal order size that results in the lowest total of
order and carrying cost for an item of inventory given its expected usage,
carrying cost and ordering cost.
a. LIFO

b. Economic Order Quantity

2. The __________the order size which will minimize the total inventory cost.

a. Economic Order
b. EOQ determines

2.3 Receivables Management

To increase the sales from the customers who cannot borrow from other
sources, the companies generally sell goods on credit. If the credit is given to the
customersand when such finished goods are sold, they get converted into
receivables which in turn can be converted into cash. The balance in the
receivables account is – average daily credit sales X average collection period.
Let‘s say, if the average daily credit sales of a firm is Rs. 5,00,000 and the
average collection period is 30 days, the average balance in the receivables
account would be

5, 00,000 X 30 = Rs. 1,50,00,000.

In many organizations, receivables form an important part of the total assets.
Receivables management is time consuming for the finance manager.

2.3.1 Purpose of Receivables

In order to understand the purpose of receivables, it is very important to
understand the main aim of receivables management. The primary aim of
receivable management is promotion of sales and gains till a certain limit where
the returns obtained by funding of receivables is less than the cost that the
company is required to incur in order to fund these receivables. So, the purpose of
receivables include

 Maximizing the sales by selling the goods on credit rather than insisting on
immediate payment of cash.

67
 Working  When the goods are sold on credit, higher profit margins are charged unlike
Capital
Management
cash sales, resulting in increased profits.
and Investment  In today‘s competitive world, the company will have to give better credit
terms than offered by its competitors.

2.3.2 Cost of Maintaining Receivables

1. Blockage of additional funds: If the firm is granting credit to the customer,
then there would be some time lag between the credit sale to the customer
and receipt of cash from the customers. Since additional funds are required
to maintain these receivables, the company has to manage the finances
required for other purposes. Since the company has to invest in additional
funds, the outgo will be in the form of interest or the opportunity cost of
funds.

2. Maintenance cost: Since the company is into receivables management, it

has to incur additional expenses in the form of clerk salary, investigation of
the debtors, credit checks. In short, the administrative cost will increase due
to the receivables management.

3. Defaulting cost: Many times the company incurs loses from bad debts. The
bad debts are result of default in payments by the customers who were
offered credit.
4. Collection cost: Collection costs are the costs which are incurred for the
collection of money from the customers at the right time.

Exhibit: Why do companies in India grant credit?

Companies in practice feel the necessity of granting credit for several reasons.

 Competition: Generally, the higher the degree of competition, the more

credit is granted by a firm. However, there are exceptions such as firms in
the electronics industry in India.

 Company’s bargaining power: If a company has a higher bargaining

power vis-à-vis its buyers, it may grant no or less credit. The company will
have a strong bargaining power if it has a strong product, monopoly power,
brand image, large size or strong financial position.

 Buyer’s requirements: In a number of business sectors, buyers/dealers are

not able to operate without extended credit. This is particularly so in the
case of industrial products.

68
Buyer’s status Working
Capital
Large buyers demand easy credit terms because of bulk purchases and higher Management-II
bargaining power. Some companies follow a policy of not giving much credit to
small retailers since it is quite difficult to collect dues from them.

 Relationship with dealers: Companies sometimes extend credit to dealers

to build long term relationships with them or to reward them for their
loyalty.

 Marketing tool: Credit is used as a marketing tool, particularly when a new

product is launched or when a company wants to push its weak product.

 Industry practice: Small companies have been found guided by industry

practice or norms more than the large companies. Sometimes companies
continue giving credit because of past practice rather than industry practice.

 Transit delays: This is a forced reason for extended credit in the case of a
number of companies in India. Most companies have evolved systems to
minimize the impact of such delays. Some of them take the help of banks to
control cash flows in such situations.

2.3.3 Monitoring Receivable

In order to ensure the efforts put into collections, a firm should continuously
monitor its payment of receivables. The four methods for managing receivables
are –
1. Average collection period (ACP)

2. Ageing schedule.
3. Days Sales Outstanding

4. Collection Matrix

1. Average collection period (ACP)

The average collection period is primarily based on outstanding receivables
on year-end. In order to exercise internal control, monitoring should be done
frequently. If the sales are seasonal or tend to grow towards the year-end, then, the
outstanding balance at the end of year can be misleading.

69
 Working 2. Ageing schedule
Capital
Management Ageing schedule depicts the age-wise distribution of accounts receivable at
and Investment any particular time. In other words, the receivables are broken down based on the
time period for which they have been outstanding.
The behavioural changes in the payments made by customers can be easily
identified by comparing the ageing schedules periodically.
The ageing schedule can be compared with the company‘s extended credit
period.
If the degree of receivables that belongs to high-age groups is found to be
above the stipulated norm, then suitable action should be taken before it turns into
bad debts.

3. Days Sales Outstanding

The average number of days sales outstanding at any particular period of
time say at the end of a quarter or at the end of the month can be given by the
following formula.

Days sales outstanding (DSO) = Accounts receivable at a particular time

/ average daily sales
The status of receivables of a company can be said to be under control, if the
daily sales outstanding lies within a pre-specified norm which is linked to the
credit period followed by the company. A higher daily sale outstanding indicates
that the collection process is slow and so the collection policy should be made
more stringent.

4. Collection Matrix
In order to analyze the behavioural changes in the payments made by the
customers, it is necessary to study the collection patterns associated closely with
the credit sales.
For example, the credit sales in the month of January are as follows.

20% in January, 22% in February, 25% in March, and 30% in April

By observing the collection pattern, one can make out whether the collection
is improving or is constant or is decreasing.
Anadvantage of this method is that we can maintain percentage of collections that
can be used to be projected in monthly receipts for each budgeting period.

70
 Working
Check your progress 2 Capital
Management-II
1. _________is used as a marketing tool, particularly when a new product is
launched or when a company wants to push its weak product.

a. Finance
b. Credit

2. ___________depicts the age-wise distribution of accounts receivable at any

particular time.

a. Ageing schedule
b. Cost

2.4 Cash Management

Cash is considered of crucial importance because it is the most liquid asset
and the life blood of the firms. Since cash is the life blood of the business, it is a
decisive factor in the solvency of the company.

Difference between profit and cash

Normally, we think profits and cash is the one and the same concept.
Profitsare the excess of income over the expenditure of the companies for a year.
It includes cash and non-cash items. (Cash items like sales, interest on
investments, dividend etc. and non-cash items like credit sales, excess provisions
for doubtful debts)
Cash means the cash and bank balances of the company for the particular
year given in the balance sheet. Profits of the company depict earning capacity of
the company and cash shows the company‘s liquidity position.

Normally, cash in a narrow sense is cash and bank balances and demand
deposits with the bank and in the broader sense it includes cash and bank balances
and demand deposits with the bank plus marketable securities that can be
converted into cash.

2.4.1 Reasons for Holding Cash

Let us see why the companies hold the cash.
1. Transaction Motive

71
 Working 2. Precautionary Motive
Capital
Management 3. Speculative Motive
and Investment
4. Cash Flow Management

1. Transaction Motive
Since the companies enter into transactions with the other companies and
some of these transactions are cash based and rest of them are credit based, the
company has to strike abalance between cash inflow and cash outflow. The
company keeps some amount as cash to deal with such transactions where
transactions are cash based.

2. Precautionary Motive
Contingencies like sudden fire, accidents, employee strike, early payment to
the creditors, mismatch between receipt and payments can occuranytime. The
company maintains some amount in the form of cash to safeguard against such
incidents.

3. Speculative Motive
Speculative motives play abig role in holding the cash by the
corporate. To take the advantage of sudden decrease in the raw material prices or
to invest in investment opportunities which are short term, the companies keep
some amount of cash with them.

4. Cash Flow Management

In cyclical and seasonal industries like automobile, tea, jute there is
mismatch between cash inflow and cash outflow. These companies hold more
cash than required to safeguard against seasonal or cyclical changes.

2.4.2 Factors for Efficient Cash Management

We need to consider following factors to enhance the efficiency of cash
management.
1. Immediate preparation of bills

2. Collection of cash and cheques.

3. Centralized purchasing system

72
1. Immediate preparation of bills Working
Capital
First and foremost step in efficient cash management is bridging the time Management-II
gap between the date of dispatching goods and the date of preparing the bills and
sending them to the customers. This means, it will help reduce the delay in bill
payment and will result in prompt receipt of cash.

2. Collection of cash and cheques

The company must deposit the cash and the cheques it received in the bank
on the same day. This can be done by

 Keeping a dedicated staff for such work

 The customers can make the payment directly by depositing the cash in the
company‘s account.

3. Centralized purchasing system

When the company goes for centralized purchasing system, it can achieve
many advantages like the company can go for bulk purchase and can gain
discounts which will effectively reduce the cost allocations. Here, the company
can reduce the cost of transportation, handling, and storage.

Check your progress 3

1. ______are the excess of income over the expenditure of the companies for a
year.
a. Cash

b. Profits
2. Speculative motives play a big role in holding the cash by the
_________________
a. corporate

b. Incorporate

73
 Working
Capital 2.5 Let Us Sum Up
Management
In this unit we had a very detailed discussion on the working capital
and Investment
management and on the inventory management. This chapter covered the basics
of working capital management and it included areas like receivables
management, cash management and inventory management. In this unit we
discussed that companies hold inventories basically for 3 motives -Transactions
motive i.e. to ensure smooth production and sales operations, Precautionary
motive i.e. to guard against the volatility of demand and supply factors,
Speculative motive which is done to take benefit of price fluctuations.Other
purposes of holding the inventory are - To safeguard against lost sales, to gain
trade discounts, Reducing operational cost, Ensuring efficient production
activities.We covered inventory management techniques like - Economic Order
Quantity (EOQ), Reorder point, and Stock Level. We price the inventories by five
methods namely - First-in-first-out (FIFO), Last-in-first-out (LIFO), Weighted
Average Cost method, Standard Price method and Replacement or Current Price
method.Purpose of the receivables include - Maximizing the sales by selling the
goods on credit rather than insisting on immediate payment of cash. When the
goods are sold on credit, higher profit margins are charged unlike cash sales,
resulting in increased profits and third being the company will have to give better
credit terms than offered by its competitors. We know that cost of maintaining the
receivables are high and that include Blockage of additional funds, Maintenance
cost, Defaulting cost, Collection cost. There are four methods of managing the
receivables. They are - Average collection period (ACP), Ageing schedule, Days
Sales Outstanding and Collection Matrix.We saw the difference between the cash
and profit concept. There are four reasons to hold the cash - Transaction motive,
Precautionary motive, Speculative motive, Cash flow management.

So at the end of this unit the readers would have got the sufficient idea of
working capital and inventory management and various other concepts which are
considered to be very important.

74
 Working
2.6 Answers for Check Your Progress Capital
Management-II
Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-b), (2-b)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

2.7 Glossary
1. Working Capital Policy - Basic policy decision regarding (1) target levels
for each category of current assets and (2) how current assets will be
financed.

2.8 Assignment
What is working capital management in the context of receivables
management and cash management?

2.9 Activities
Explain inventory management techniques

2.10 Case Study

Visit a company nearest to you and find out how does the company manage
its receivables, cash and inventories?

75
 Working
Capital 2.11 Further Readings
Management
1. Financial management - ICFAI.
and Investment
2. Financial management – I. M. Pandey

76
UNIT 3: INVESTMENTS AND FUND
Unit Structure
3.0 Learning Objectives

3.1 Introduction
3.2 Meaning of Capital Budgeting
3.2.1 Principles of Capital Budgeting

3.3 Kinds of Capital Budgeting Proposals

3.4 Kinds of Capital Budgeting Decisions

3.5 Capital Budgeting Techniques

3.6 Estimation of Cash Flow for new Projects

3.7 Sources of Long Term Funds

3.8 Let Us Sum Up

3.9 Answers for Check Your Progress

3.10 Glossary
3.11 Assignment

3.12 Activities
3.13 Case Study

3.14 Further Readings

3.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 Why capital should be carefully evaluated before it is incurred?

 The role of accounting profit in capital budgeting.

 Distinguish between cash flow and accounting profit.

 Calculate NPV and the Internal Rate of Return (IRR).

 Estimate cash flow for new projects.

77
 Working
Capital 3.1 Introduction
Management
The term Capital budgeting contains the relatively scarce, non-human
and Investment
resource of production enterprise, and budgeting, indicating a detailed quantified
planning which guides future activities of an enterprise towards the achievement
of its profit goals. ―Capital‖ refers to total funds employed in an enterprise as a
whole.

3.2 Meaning of Capital Budgeting

The Capital fund is increased by an inward flow of cash and decreased by an
outward flow of cash and as such it is important for an enterprise to plan and
arrange cash flows properly.
Capital budgeting, then, consists in planning the development of available
capital for the purpose of maximizing the long-term profitability.
Capital budgeting may be defined as the decision-making process by which
a firm evaluates the purchase of major fixed assets, including buildings,
machinery, and equipment. It deals exclusively with major investment proposals
which are essentially long-term projects and is concerned with the allocation of
firm‘s scarce financial resources among the available market opportunities, a
search for a new and more profitable investment proposal and the making of an
economic analysis to determine the profit potential of each investment proposal.
They are large, permanent commitments which influence its long-run flexibility
and earning power.
It is a process by which available cash and credit resources are allocated
among competitive long-term investment opportunities so as to promote the
greatest profitability of company over a period of time. It refers to the total
process of generating, evaluating, selecting and following up on capital
expenditure alternatives.

3.2.1 Principal of Capital Budgeting

Capital expenditure decision should be taken on the basis of following factors-

 Creative search for Profitable opportunities-The first stage is the conception

of profit making idea. Profitable investment opportunities should be sought
to supplement existing proposals.

78
 Investments
 Long range capital planning-A flexible programme of a company‘s expected
and Fund
future development over a long period of time should be prepared.

 Short range capital planning -This is for short period. It indicates its sectoral
demand for funds to stimulate alternative proposals before the aggregate
demand for funds is available.

 Measurement of project work-The economic worth of a project to a

company is evaluated at this stage. The project is ranked with other projects.

 Screening and Selection-The project is examined on the basis of selection

criteria, such as supply and cost of capital, expected returns, alternative
investment opportunities, etc.

 Control of authorized outlays-Outlay should be controlled in order to avoid

costly delays and cost over-runs.

 Post Mortem-The ex-post routines of a completed investment project should

be re-evaluated in order to verify their exact conformity with exact
projections.

 Forms and Procedures-These involve the preparation of reports necessary

for any capital expenditure programme.

 Economics of capital budgeting-It includes estimating the rate of return on

capital expenditure. Knowledge of economic theory underlying investment
decisions is needed for this purpose.

Check your progress 1

1. _______may be defined as the decision-making process by which a firm
evaluates the purchase of major fixed assets, including buildings, machinery,
and equipment.
a. Capital structure

b. Capital budgeting

2. Economics of capital budgeting-It ___________ the rate of return on capital

expenditure.
a. includes estimating

b. estimates

79
 Working
Capital 3.3 Kinds of Capital Budgeting Proposals
Management
and Investment
 Replacement

 Expansion

 Modernization of Investment Expenditures

 Strategic Investment Proposals

 Diversification

 Research and Development

Check your progress 2

1. ____________decision includes expenses incurred on modernization of
investment expenditures on existing asset.

a. Capital structure
b. Financial budgeting
c. accounting

d. Capital budgeting

3.4 Kinds of Capital Budgeting Decisions

Capital budgeting refers to the total process of generating, evaluating,
selecting and following upon capital expenditure alternatives. The firm allocates
or budgets financial resources to new investment proposals. Basically the firm
may be confronted with three types of capital budgeting decisions -

 Accept-reject decisions

 Mutually Exclusive Project decisions

 Capital rationing decisions.

80
 Investments
Check your progress 3 and Fund
1. The firm allocates or budgets _______to new investment proposals on the
basic of capital budgeting techniques

a. asset
b. financial resources

2. ___________refers to the total process of generating, evaluating, selecting

and following upon capital expenditure alternatives

a. Capital budgeting
b. Financial budgeting

3.5 Capital Budgeting Techniques

Fig 3.1 Capital Budgeting Techniques

Pay Back Method

The pay back method (PB) is the traditional method of capital budgeting. It
is the simplest and perhaps, the most widely employed quantitative method for
appraising capital expenditure decisions. This method answers the question - How
many years will it take for the cash benefits to pay the original cost of an
investment? Cash benefits here represent CFAT (cash flows after taxes) ignoring
interest payment. This method measures the number of years required for the
CFAT to pay back the original outlay required in an investment proposal.

81
 Working There are two ways of calculating the PB period. The first method can be
Capital
applied when the cash flow stream is in the nature of annuity for each year of the
Management
and Investment project‘s life i.e. CFAT are uniform.

PB Period = Investment
Constant annual cash flow

The second method is used when a project‘s cash flows are not equal, but
vary from year to year. In such a situation, PB is calculated by the process of
cumulative cash flows till the time when cumulative cash flows become equal to
the original investment outlay.

If the actual payback period is less than the pre-determined pay back, the
project would be accepted; if not, it would be rejected. When mutually exclusive
projects are under consideration, they may be ranked according to the length of
the payback period.Thus, the project having the shortest pay back may be
assigned rank one.

Example:
1. A project requires an initial investment of Rs. 1,80,000and yield an annual
cash inflow of Rs.60,000 for 8 years.
PB Period = 1,80,000 = 3 years

60,000
2. A project requires an initial cash outlay of Rs. 5,00,000/- and generates cash
inflows as under-

Year Cash Inflows

1 50,000
2 1, 00,000

3 1, 25,000
4 2, 00, 000

5 50,000
6 50,000

7 50,000
8 25,000

82
 Investments
Calculated payback period -
and Fund
Calculation of payback period
Year Cash Inflows(Rs.) Cumulative cash inflows
1 50,000 50,000
2 1,00,000 1,50,000

3 1,25,000 2,75,,000
4 2,00,000 4,75,000

5 50,000 5,25,000
6 50,000 5,75,000

7 50,000 6,25,000
8 25,000 6,50,000

PB period of project = 4.5 years i.e. 4 years and 6 months.

Advantages of Pay Back Method:-

 It is an important guide to investment policy.

 It lays a sufficient emphasis on liquidity.

 It is easy to understand, calculate and communicate.

 The method enables a firm to choose an investment which yields a quick

return on cash funds.

 It enables a firm to determine the period required to recover the original

investment with some percentage return and thus arrive at the degree of risk
associated with the investment.

 It is an adequate measure with every profitable investment opportunity.

 The method is quite the simplest of all the techniques used by the industry.

 It is undoubtedly an improvement over the criteria of urgency.

 Other than its simplicity, the main advantage claimed for the payback
method is that is abuilt-in safeguard against risk.

Disadvantages:

 The method is not consistent with the objective of maximizing the market
value of firm‘s share.

 It does not consider income beyond the payback period.

83
 Working  It does not measure the profitability of a project.
Capital
Management  The timing of the flow is not considered a vital factor.
and Investment
 The time value of money is ignored.

 There is no recognition of cash flow variation.

 It does not indicate how to maximize value and ignores the relative
profitability of the project.

Discounted pay-back period (DPP)

In this method the cash inflows are discounted at a rate which is equal to
cost of capital and then payback period is worked out. This is better than ordinary
payback period method as DPP considers the time value of money.
DPP = Investment

Discounted Annual Cash Inflow

The DPP is expressed in years and as long as the DPP is lesser than the
estimated life of the project, the project is economically feasible and it can be
accepted. Sometimes the two projects may have the same DPP although the
estimated life of the project may be different. In such a case it will be better to
calculate the relative payback index (RPI)
N x 100
As follows -
DPP

Where, N = Estimated life of the project

Average Rate of Return Method

This method is also known as Accounting Rate of Return. This method

considers A.R.R. which means the average annual yield of the project. Under this
method profit after tax and depreciation (also called as accounting profit) of a
percentage of total investment is considered.

The annual returns of a project are expressed as a percentage of the net

investment in the project. This method consists of aggregating all the earnings
after depreciation and dividing them by the profits in useful lifespan. The resultant
average earnings over the period is divided by the average investment over the
period. The average investment in a project is always ½ of the original
investment. For calculating ARR, sometimes the value of the initial investment is
used in the place of average investment. But average investment is more logical.

84
 Investments
Average Annual Earnings aftertaxes & depreciation
ARR = x 100 and Fund
Average Investment

Where,

Original investment
Average investment =
2

Advantages:

 It is easy to calculate because it makes use of reality available accounting

information.

 Where a number of capital investment proposals are being considered, a

quick decision can be taken.

 If high profits are required, this is certainly a way of achieving them.

 It is also simple to understand and easy to adopt.

 It can be calculated using the accounting data.

Disadvantages:

 It does not consider the length of life of projects.

 It ignores the fact that the profits earned can be reinvested.

 It does not consider the benefits accruing to the company as a result of sale.

 It does not take into accounting time value of money

 It uses the straight line method of depreciation. Once a change in method of

depreciation takes place the method will not be easy to use and will not
work practically.

Example:
ABC Ltd. is considering the purchase of a machine. Two machines are
available X and Y. The cost of each machine is Rs. 60,000. Each machine has an
expected life of 5 years. Net profit before tax during the expected life of the
machine is given below:

Year Machine x (Rs.) Machine Y (Rs)

1 15,000 5,000

2 20,000 15,000

85
 Working
Capital 3 25,000 20,000
Management
and Investment 4 15,000 30,000

5 10,000 20,000

Total 10,000 90,000

Following the method of return on investment ascertain which of the

alternatives will be more profitable.The average rate of tax may be taken as 50%.

Statement of Profitability

Year Machine X (Rs.) Machine Y (Rs)

Profit Tax at Profit Profit Tax at Profit

Before 50% After Tax Before 50% After
Tax (Rs.) (Rs.) (Rs.) Tax (Rs.) (Rs.) Tax
(Rs.)

1 15,000 7,500 7,500 5,000 2,500 2,500

2 20,000 10,000 10,000 15,000 7,500 7,500

3 25,000 12,500 12,500 20,000 10,000 10,000

4 15,000 7,500 7,500 30,000 15,000 15,000

5 10,000 5,000 5,000 20,000 10,000 10,000

85,000 42,500 42,500 90,000 45,000 45,000

Average Profit 42,500=5=8,500 45,000 + 5 = 9,000

(After tax) 60,000=2=30,000 60,000= 2=30,000

Investment (8,500=30,000) x 100 = (9,000 + 30,000) x 100 = 30%
28.33%
Rate of Return

Machine Y is more profitable (Note: It is presumed that net profit is arrived

after providing for depreciation).

86
Example: Investments
and Fund
The working results of two machines are given below

Machines 1 (Rs) Machines 11

(Rs)

Cost 45,000 45,000

Sales per Year 1,00,000 80,000

Total cost per year (excluding 36,000 30,000

depreciation)

Expected life 2 Years 3 Years

Which of the two should be preferred?

Solution:
Calculation of Annual Average Earnings

Machines I (Rs.) Machines II (Rs.)

Sales per year 1,00,000 80,000

Less: Cost per year 36,000 30,000

64,000 50,000

Less: Depreciation 22,500 15,000

Net Profit 41,500 35,000

Annual Average 41,500 35,000

Earnings

Annual Investment 22,500 22,500

Arr = 41,500 35, 000

x100  184% x100  156%
22,500 22,500

Machine I has higher ARR. Hence Machine I should be preferred.

Net Present Value (NPV) Method

87
 Working The objective of the firm is to create wealth by using existing and future
Capital
resources to produce goods and services. To create wealth, inflows must exceed
Management
and Investment the present value of all anticipated cash outflows. NPV is obtained by discounting
all cash outflows and inflows attributable to certain investment project by a
chosen percentage e.g. the entity‘s weighted average cost of capital. The method
discounts the net cash flows from the investment by the minimum required rate of
return and deducts the initial investment to give the yield from the funds invested.
If yield is positive the project is acceptable. If it is negative the project is unable to
pay for itself and is thus unacceptable.

The activity involved in calculating the present value is known as

discounting and the factors by which we have multiplied the cash flows are known
as the discount factors.

Ct
NPV  C0 
(1  r )t

C1 C2 Ct
NPV  C0    ... 
(1  r ) (1  r )
1 2
(1  r )t

Calculation of NPV (Net Present Value)

Discount factors= l

(l+r)n

Where, ‗r‘ is the rate of interest per annum

‗n‘ is the number of years for which we are discounting.

Advantages

 It is based on the assumption that cash-flows and dividends determine

shareholder‘s wealth.

 It recognizes the time value of money.

 It considers the total benefits arising out of proposals over its life-time.

 This method of project selection is instrumental in achieving the financial

objective i.e. the maximization of shareholder‘s wealth.

Disadvantages

 It is difficult to calculate as well as understand it as compared to accounting

rate of return method or PB method.

88
 Calculation of the desired rates of return presents serious problems. Investments
and Fund
Generally cost of capital is the basis of determining the desired rate. The
calculation of cost of capital is itself complicated. Moreover, desired rates of
return will vary from year to year.

 This method is an absolute measure. When two projects are being

considered, this method will favour the project which has higher NPV (Net
Present Value).

 This method emphasizes the comparison of NPV and disregards the initial
investment involved. Thus, this method may not give dependable results.

Example: 1)
A choice is to be made between two competing proposals which require an
equal investment of Rs.50, 000 and are expected to generate net cash flows as
under:
Cost of capital of the company is 10%.

Problem

Project X (Rs.) Project Y (Rs.)

1st Year end 25,000 10,000

2nd Year end 15,000 12,000

3rd Year end 10,000 18,000

4th Year end Nil 25,000

5th Year end 12,000 8,000

6th Year end 6,000 4,000

89
 Working Comparative Statement of Net Present Values
Capital
Management
Year PV Project X Project Y
and Investment
Factor
at 10% Cash Present Cash Present
Inflows Values Inflows Values

1 0.909 25,000 22,725 10,000 9,090

2 0.826 15,000 12,390 12,000 9,912

3 0.751 10,000 7,510 18,000 13,518

4 0.683 Nil Nil 25,000 17,075

5 0.621 12,000 7,452 8,000 4,968

6 0.564 6,000 3,384 4,000 2,256

Total Present 53,461 56,819

value Cash
Inflows

Initial 50,000 50,000

Investments
(Cash Outlay)

Net present Rs. 3,461 Rs. 6,819

value

Since project Y has the highest NPV (Net Present Value), Project Y should
be selected

Example 2
Project X initially costs Rs. 25,000. It generates the following cash follows

Year Cash inflows (Rs.) Discount Factor at 10% (Rs)

1 9,000 0.909

2 8,000 0.826

90
 Investments
3 7,000 0.751 and Fund

4 6,000 0.683

5 5,000 0.621

Taking the cut - off rate as 10%, suggests whether the project should be
accepted or not.

Solution:
Statement of Net Present Value

Year Cash P. V. Factor at Present Values of

Inflows 10% (Rs.) Cash Inflows
(Rs.)

1 9,000 0.909 8,181

2 8,000 0.826 6,608

3 7,000 0.751 5,257

4 6,000 0.683 4,098

5 5,000 0.621 3,106

Total Present Value of 27,249

Cash Inflows

Less: Initial Outlay 25,000

NPV 2,249

The Project should be accepted since the Net Present Value (NPV) is
positive.

Profitability Index Method

The profitability index (PI) is yet another method of evaluating the

investment proposals. It is also known as the benefit- cost ratio (B/c). It represents
a ratio of the present value of future cost benefit at the required rate of return to
the initial cash outflow of the investment. This is similar to the NPV approach.

91
 Working The PI approach measures the present value of returns per rupee invested. Where
Capital
projects with different initial investments are to be evaluated the PI approach is
Management
and Investment the best technique to be used.

Present value of cash inflows

PI 
Present value of cash outlay

In this method, the numerator measures the benefits and the denominator
measures the costs. The project is to be accepted when the PI is greater than 1 and
it will be negative when PI is less than 1.
The selection of the projects with the help of PI method can be affected on
the basis of ranking. The project with the highest PI is given the first rank
followed by others in the descending order.

Advantages

 This method takes into consideration the time value of money as also the
total benefits spread throughout the life span of the project. It can be
employed safely as sound investment criteria.

 The PI method is abetter evaluation technique than the NPV (Net Present
Value) method in a situation of capital rationing.

Disadvantages

 The PI method is not easy to understand, and is difficult to use in practice.

 It involves more tedious calculations than the traditional method.

Example 1)
The initial cash outlay of a project is Rs. 1,00,000 and it generates cash
inflow of Rs. 40,000. Rs.30, 000, Rs.50,000 and 20,000. Assuming 10% rate of
discount, calculate Profitability index.

Solution

Year Discount Factor at 10%

1 0.909

2 0.826

3 0.751

92
 Investments
4 0.683 and Fund

Calculation of Profitability Index

Year Cash Inflow at 10% Discount Factor Present (Rs.)

(Rs.) Value

1 40,000 0.909 36,360

2 30,000 0.826 24,780

3 50,000 0.751 37,550

4 20,000 0.683 13,6000

Total PV Rs. 1,12,350

PV of cash inflows 1,12,350

Profitability Index    1.1235
Initial Cash outlay 1, 00, 000

2) Problems
The initial outlay of the project is Rs.1,00, 000 and it generates cash inflows
of Rs.50,000, Rs.40,000, Rs.30,000 and Rs.20,000 in the years of its lifespan. You
are required to calculate the NPV (Net Present Value) and PI of the project
assuming 10% rate of discount.

Year Cash Inflows Discount Factor at 10% Present Values

(Rs.) (2x3) (Rs.)

1 50,000 0.909 45,450

2 40,000 0.826 33,040

3 30,000 0.751 22,530

4 20,000 0.683 13,660

1,14,680

93
 Working
Capital Less: Cash Outlay NPV 1,00,000
Management
and Investment 14,680

1,14,680
PI (Gross) = =1.1468 PI (Net)=1.1468-1=0.1468
1,00,000

Internal Rate of Return Method (IRR)

The IRR Method is yet another discounted cash flow technique which takes
into consideration the magnitude and timing of cash flows. It is also known as
time adjusted rate of return, marginal efficiency of capital, marginal productivity
of capital, and yield on investment and so on. It is employed with the cost of
investment and the annual cash inflows are known while the unknown rate of
earnings is to be ascertained.
The Internal Rate of Return (IRR) is that rate at which the sum of
discounted cash inflows equals the sum of discounted cash out flows. It is the rate
at which the NPV (Net Present Value) of the investment is zero. It is called
internal rate because it depends mainly on the outlay and proceeds associated with
the investment and not on any rate determined outside the investment.

Advantages

 The IRR method considers the time value of money like the NPV method.

 It takes into consideration the cash flows over the entire lifespan of the
project.

 Business executivesand non-technical people understand the concept of

Internal Rate of Return (IRR) much better than that of NPV.

 It is consistent with the overall objective of maximizing shareholder‘s

wealth.

Disadvantages

 It produces multiple rates which can be confusing.

 Selected project based on higher IRR may not be profitable.

 Unless the life of the project is accurately estimated, assessment of cash

flows cannot be correctly made.

 This method is difficult to understand as well as apply in practice because it

involves complicated calculations.

94
 Investments
 This method does not give unique answer in all situations. It yields negative
and Fund
rate or multiple rate under certain circumstances.

Example:
Project X involves an initial outlay of Rs.1, 60,000. Its lifespan is expected
to be three years. The cash streams generated by it are expected to be as follows:

Year Cash Inflows (Rs.)

1 80,000

2 70,000

3 60,000

You are required to calculate the l RR

Solutions

Year Cash Rate of Present Rate of Present Rate of Present

Inflows Discount Value Discount Value Discount Value
(14%) (Rs.) (164%) (Rs.) (15%) (Rs.)

1 80,000 0.877 70,160 0.862 68,960 0.870 69,600

2 70,000 0.769 53,830 0.743 52,010 0.756 52,920

3 60,000 0.675 40,500 0.641 38,460 0.658 39,480

Less: Initial Outlay 1,64,490 1,59,430 1,62,000

1,62,000 1,62,000 1,62,000

NPV (+) (-) 2,570 Zero

2,490

Practical Problems
Example - A company is considering a new project for which the investment
dataare as follows:
Capital outlay Rs. 2,00,000 Depreciation 20% p.a.

Forecasted annual income before charging depreciation but after all other
charges, are as follows:

95
 Working
Capital Year Rs.
Management
and Investment 1 1,00,000

2 1,00,000

3 80,000

4 80,000

5 40,000

4,00,000

On the basis of the available data, set out calculation, illustrating and
comparing the following method of evaluating the return:-
a) Payback method b) Rate of return investment c) Internal rate of return.

Solution
Since there is no tax, the annual income before depreciation and after other
charges is equivalent to cash flows (CF)
a) Capital outlay of Rs. 2,00,000 is recovered in the first two years, Rs.
1,00,000 (year) + Rs.1,00,000 (year2), therefore the payback period is two years.

B) Rate of return on original investment:

Year CF (Rs) Depreciation (Rs.) Net Income (Rs.)

1 1,00,000 40,000 60,000

2 1,00,000 40,000 60,000

3 80,000 40,000 40,000

4 80,000 40,000 40,000

5 40,000 40,000 --------

2,00,000

96
 Investments
Average Income = Rs. 2,00,000/5 = Rs. 40,000
and Fund
Average Income Rs.40,000
Rate of return= x100= 100=20%
Original investment Rs.2,00,000
C) Calculation of IRR
Total CF Rs. 4,00,000
Average CF= = = 80,000
No. of Year 5
Cash out Flows Rs. 2,00,000
PB value = = = 2.5 years
Average CF Rs. 80, 000

Factors close to PB value of 2.5 corresponding to 5 years (life of the project)

are 2.532 (28%) and @.436 (30%). Since the actual cash flow stream is higher in
initial years than average cash flows, higher discount rate of 33% may also be
tried along with 30%.

Year CF (Rs.) PVT at Total PV

(Rs.)

30% 33% 30% 33%

1 1,00,000 0.769 0.752 76,900 75,200

2 1,00,000 0.592 0.565 59,200 56,500

3 80,000 0.455 0.425 36,400 34,000

4 80,000 0.350 0.320 28,000 25,600

5 40,000 0.269 0.240 10,760 9,600

2,11,260 2,00,900

The IRR (Internal Rate of Return) of a project is the rate of discount at

which the NPV (Net Present Value) is 0. Since the NPV at 33% is Rs. 900 only
(i.e. Rs. 2,00, 900 - Rs. 2,00,000), the IRR (Internal Rate of Return) is 33%
(approximately).

97
 Working Example -
Capital
Management The cash flows from two mutually exclusive Projects A and B are as under:
and Investment
Years Project A Project B

0 Rs. –22,000 Rs. –27,000

(1-7 Annual) 6,000 7,000

Project life 7 Years 7 Years

i) Calculate NPV of the proposals at different discount rates of 15%, 16%,

17%, 18%, 19% and 20% ii) Advise on the project on the basis of the Internal
Rate of Return (IRR) method.

Solution:
Computation of Present Value of cash inflows of different Projects

Dis. Rate Cash Flow (Rs.) PVAF P.V. Cash Flow (Rs.)

Project A Project B Project A Project

B

15% 6,000 7,000 4,160 24,960 29,120

16% 6,000 7,000 4,040 24,240 28,280

17% 6,000 7,000 3,922 23,532 27,454

18% 6,000 7,000 3,812 22,872 26,684

19% 6,000 7,000 3,706 22,235 25,942

20% 6,000 7,000 3,605 21,630 25,235

98
Calculation of IRR Investments
and Fund
Dis. PV of inflows (A) NPV (A) PV of inflows (B) NPV (B)
Rate

15% Rs. 24,960 Rs. 2,960 29,120 Rs. 2,120

16% 24,240 2,240 28,280 1,280

17% 23,532 1,532 27,454 454

18% 22,872 872 26,684 (-) 216

19% 22,235 235 25,942 (-) 1,058

20% 21,630 -370 25,235 (-) 1,765

Calculation of the Internal Rate of Return (IRR)

Project A: Since outflow of Rs. 22,000 is falling between Rs. 22,235 and Rs
21,630, the IRR must be between 19% to 20%. So, interpolating the difference of
Rs. 605 between 19% and 20%, the IRR comes to 19.39%.
= 19% + Rs.22, 235-22,000 + 19% = 19.39%

Rs.235 Rs.22, 235-21,630 Rs.605

Project B: Since outflow of Rs. 27,000 is falling between Rs.27,454 and
Rs.26,684, the IRR must be between 17% to 18%. So, interpolating the difference
of Rs. 770 between 17% and 18%, the IRR comes to 17.59%

= Rs.27, 454-27,000 = Rs 454 + 17% = 17.59%

Rs.27, 454-26,686 Rs770

Conclusion:
As per the NPV technique, the Project is acceptable even if the discount rate
is as high as 19% whereas, the project B becomes invariable at 18%. As per IRR
(Internal Rate of Return) technique, the project A is acceptable and is having an
IRR of 19.39% against the IRR of 17.59% of Project B

99
 Working
Capital Check your progress 4
Management
and Investment 1. The ___________of Return (IRR) is that rate at which the sum of
discounted cash inflows equals the sum of discounted cash out flows.

a. Internal Rate
b. External Rate

2. The objective of the firm is to ___________by using existing and future

resources to produce goods and services.
a. create Health

b. create wealth

3.6 Estimation of Cash Flow for New Project

Evaluation of a project should rather be based on cash flows as distinct from
accounting profits.
Accounting profits are useful only for external reporting purposes and by
themselves cannot be used for the purpose of capital budgeting decisions.
Accounting profits are capable of distortion because of possible bias of individual
accountants. Different methods of providing depreciation and valuing closing
stocks can lead to different accounting figures. On the other hand, cash flows are
totally independent of different methods of accounting for depreciation and
stocks. Properly calculated cash flows cannot be challenged by anyone.

Accountants do start with rupee coming in and rupee going out when they
write cash book. But when calculating accounting income they carry out certain
adjustments for depreciation, accruals and stock valuations. It is not always easy
to convert the customary accounting profits back into actual cash flows but this
has to be done.
We had seen earlier that cash flow = PAT + DEP but it is not always that
simple in actual practice. Reputed text books have highlighted some basic
principles of cash flows which are summed up below:

 Cash flows should be estimated on an incremental basis. A true worth of a

project depends only on additional cash flows that can be generated if a
project is accepted.

100
 Investments
 It is necessary to take into consideration all incidental effects of a project on and Fund
remainder of the business. Introduction of a new product may affect revenue
of an existing product and therefore we must take into consideration this fact
which is not normally recordable in accounting.

 Sunk costs should be ignored because they do not affect outflow of cash
now. Whether we accept a project or reject it, sunk costs do not change and
should therefore be ignored. For example, if we construct a factory on a
piece of land, which was earlier acquired for another project but not actually
put to use, is a sunk cost. There is no outflow if the same piece of land is
now used for a new project.

 Opportunity costs cannot be ignored. This was hinted at point number two
above. This can be stretched a little further. Suppose a new project starts on
a piece of land, which is not now acquired. However, if it is decided to sell
the land for a sum and if it is not used for the new project then there is an
opportunity cost or an implied outflow. Sale proceeds of the land will have
to be sacrificed to implement the new project.

 Any new project will always entail an additional investment in short term
assets like cash, debtors and stocks. The additional investment to some
extent is reduced to the extent to which short-term liabilities like creditors
increase. The increase in net working capital requirements becomes an
outflow and when the project finally ends, investment in working capital can
be recovered either fully or partly. This will become an inflow.

 Cash flows should always be estimated on an after tax basis.

Inflation, if persisting should always be treated on a consistent basis. This
requires conversion of nominal cash flows into real cash flows.

Check your progress 5

1. Any ___________will always entail an additional investment in short term
assets like cash, debtors and stocks.
a. investment

b. new project

101
 Working
Capital 3.7 Sources of Long Term Funds
Management
and Investment
Tabular Presentation of Sources of Long Term Funds

Fig 3.2 Source of long term fund

Brief Characteristics of the above Diagram:

 Interest on debentures or Term loans has to be paid whether there is any

profit or not.

 Interest is a tax-deductible expense

 Dividend on preference shares is paid at fixed rate only if there is adequate

profit after tax. If preference shares are cumulative then the dividends not
paid will accumulate and will become payable in future.

 On equity shares, there is no fixed rate of dividend. Dividend may be

skipped if profits are inadequate. Dividend may be very high if there is a
bumper profit. Dividend can only be paid after preference dividend
(including arrears if any) are paid and transfer to General Reserve
Debenture and Redemption Reserve are made.

Capital Budgeting work out problems

Question 1
A Company is setting up a plant at a cost of Rs.300 lakhs investment in
fixed assets. It has to decide whether to locate the plant in a Forward area or
backward area.Locating in backward area means a cash subsidy of Rs.15 lakhs
from the Central Govt. Besides, the taxable profit to the extent of 20% is exempt
for 10 years. The project envisages aborrowing of Rs.200 lakhs in either case. The
cost of borrowing willbe 12 in Forward areaand 10% in backward area. However
the revenue costs are bound to be higher in backward area. The borrowings
(principal) have to be repaid in 4 equal annual instalments beginning from the end
of the 4th year. With the help of following information and by using DCF

102
 Investments
technique you are required to suggest the proper location for the project. Assume
and Fund
straight line depreciation with no residual value.
You have to assume:

 Average rate of Income-tax is to be taken at 50%

 The life of the fixed assets willbe 10 years.

 Central subsidy receipt is not to affect depreciation and income-tax.

 No other relief‘s or rebates other than those indicated in the question will be
available to the company.

Question 2
Modern Enterprises Ltd. is considering the purchase of a new computer
system for its Research and Development Division, which would cost Rs.35 lakhs.
The operation and maintenance costs (excluding depreciation) are expected to be
Rs.7 lakhs per annum. It is estimated that the useful life of the system would be 6
years, at the end of which the disposal value is expected to be Rs.1 lakh.

The tangible benefits expected from the system in the form of reduction in
design and draughtsman ship costs would be Rs.12 lakhs per annum. Besides, the
disposal of used drawing office equipment and furniture, initially, is anticipated to
net Rs.9 lakhs.

Capital expenditure in research and development would attract 1005 write-

off for tax purposes. The gains arising from disposal of used assets may be
considered tax-free. The company‘s effective tax rate is 50%.
The average cost of capital of the company is 12%. The present value
factors at 12% discount rate are:-

Year PVF

1 0.892

2 0.797

3 0.711

4 0.635

5 0.567

103
 Working
Capital 6 0.506
Management
and Investment After appropriate analysis of cash flows, please advise the company of the
financial viability of the proposal.

Answer
Evaluation of the financial viability of the proposal (Rs. Lakhs)

Initial Investment or Cash Outflow 35.00

Cost of new computer system

Less: Net realization on disposal of used

Equipment, etc. 9.00

——————
Total Cash Outflow (A) 26.00

========
Cash Inflow Calculations:

(i) Annual and Recurring Savings

Reduction in costs of design etc. 12.00

Less: Maintenance costs of new system 7.00

Savings before tax 5.00

Savings after tax at 50% 2.50

PVF for 6 year annuity 12% 4.108

PV of 6 year cash-in-flows due to annual saving 10.27

(ii) Tax Savings at end of year 1 due to 100%
Write-off of RandD expenditure 50% of Rs.35 lakhs 17.50
PVF for year 0.892

PV of cash-in-flow due to tax savings 15.61

(iii) Terminal Sale Value:

Anticipated sale value of system after 6 years 1.00

PVF for year 6 0.506

PV of cash-in-flow at end of year 6 0.506

Aggregate of PV of cash-in-flows (i) + (ii) + (iii) (B) 26.386

104
 Net present value (NPV) of the proposal (B-A) (+) 0.386 Investments
and Fund
Advice to the company:
The positive NPV indicates that the proposal is financially viable.

Question 3
BS Electronics is considering a proposal to replace one of its machines. In
this connection the following information is available:
The existing machine was bought 3 years ago for Rs.10 lakh.It was
depreciated at 25% p.a. on reducing balance basis. It has remaining life of 5 years
but its maintenance cost is expected to increase by Rs.50,000 p.a. from the 6th
year of its installation. Its present realizable value is Rs.6 lakh.
The new machine costs Rs.15 lakhs and is subject to the same rate of
depreciation. On sale after 5 years, it is expected to net Rs.9 lakh. With the new
machine, the annual operating costs (excluding depreciation) are expected to
decrease by Rs.1 lakh p.a. In addition, the speed of the new machine would
increase productivity on account of which net revenues would increase by Rs.1.5
lakhs p.a.

The tax rate applicable is 50% and the cost of capital 10%. The present
Value Factors at 10% rate of discount for years 1 to 5 are respectively 0.909,
0.826, 0.751, 0.683 and 0.620.
Is the proposal financially viable? Please advise the firm on the basis of Net
Present Value of the proposal.

Answer:
Evaluation of the financial viability of the proposal to replace a machine:
Incremental investment/cash outflow on new machine.

Price of new machine Rs 1500000

Less: Present realization from old Machine. 600000

Net cash outlay 9,00,000

(i) Incremental depreciation

Year Cost/WDV Depreciation at 25% p.a. on reducing

Balance basis

105
 Working
Capital Rs. Rs.
Management
and Investment 1 9,00,000 2,25,000

2 6,75,000 1,68,750

3 5,06,250 1,26,563

4 3,75,687 94,922

5 2,84,765 71,191

(ii) Incremental savings/revenue

Year Saving Increase in Incress in Totale saveing

in revenue maintenance before
opening cost of depreciation
cost existing
machine

Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.

1 1,00,000 1,50,000 - 2,50,000

2 1,00,000 1,50,000 - 2,50,000

3 1,00,000 1,50,000 50,000 3,00,000

4 1,00,000 1,50,000 50,000 3,00,000

5 1,00,000 1,50,000 50,000 3,00,000

(iii) Statement showing computation of present value of cash inflows:-

(iv) Net Present Value

Aggregate of cash inflows 13, 56,941

Less: Incremental Investment 9,00,000

Net present Value 4,56,941

(v) Advice
Since NPV is positive, the proposal is viable

106
 Notes: (1) The expression ―—— is expected to net Rs.9 lakhs‖, has been Investments
and Fund
interpreted as net of tax.
(2) The expression ―—— net revenues would increase by Rs.1.5 lakhs p.a. ― has
been interpreted as net of costs.

Question 4.
Beta Limited is considering the acquisition of a personal computer costing
Rs.50,000. The effective life of the computer is expected to be five years. The
company plans to acquire the same either by borrowing Rs.50,000 from its
bankers at 15% interest per annum or by lease. The company wishes to know the
lease rentals to be paid annually which will match the loan option. The following
further information is provided to you:

 The principal amount of the loan will be paid in five annual equal
instalments.

 Interest, lease rentals, principal repayment are to be paid on the last day of
each year.

 The full cost of the computer will be written off over the effective life of
computer on a straight-line basis and the same will be allowed for tax
purposes.

 The company‘s effective tax rate is 40% and the after tax cost of capital is
9%.

 The computer will be sold for Rs.1, 700 at the end of the 5th year. The
commission on such sales is 9% on the sale value and the same will be paid.
You are required to compute the annual lease rentals payable by Beta
Limited which will result in indifference to the loan option.
The relevant discount factors are as follows:

Year 1 2 3 4 5

Discount factor 0.92 0.84 0.77 0.71 0.65

Answer

107
 Working Computation of present value of total after-tax cash outflow under loan
Capital
option
Management
and Investment (i) Annual loss instalment Rs.50,000 = Rs.10,000

(ii) Interest on Loan 5

Year 1 2 3 4 5

Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs. Rs.

Principal amount
Outstanding at

The beginning of
The year 50,000 40,000 30,000 20,000 10,000

Interest
Since NPV is positive, the proposal is viable

Notes:
(1) The expression ―—— is expected to net Rs.9 lakhs‖, has been interpreted
as net of tax.

(2) The expression ―—— net revenues would increase by Rs.1.5 lakhs p.a. ―has
been interpreted as net of costs.

(3) Annual depreciation on straight-line basis Rs.50, 000 = Rs.10,000

(4) Inflowat the end of year 5

Rs.
Sale Value 1,700

Less: Commission at 9% 153

1,547

Less: Tax at 40% 619

Net inflow 928

(5) Computation of net outflow under loan option

Computation of the annual lease rentals to be indifferent to loan option

Present Value of desired total cash outflows Rs.33,843

Present Value factor for annually at 9% for five years 3.89

108
 Investments
Required annual after tax outflow = Rs.33,843 = Rs. 8,700 3.89
and Fund
Annual lease rental:
Annual after tax outflow = Rs.8,700 = Rs.14,500

(l-t) (1-0.4)
Hence the annual lease rentals should be Rs.14, 500 to be indifferent for the
loan option.

Question 5
Alpha Limited is considering five capital projects for the years 1994 and
1995. The company is financed by equity entirely and its cost of capital is 12%.
The expected cash flows of the projects are as below:-

Year and Cash flows (Rs. ‗000)

Project 1994 1995 1996 1997

A (70) 35 35 20
B (40) (30) 45 55
C (50) (60) 70 80

D - (90) 55 65
E (60) 20 40 50

Note: Figures in brackets represent cash outflows.

All projects are divisible i.e. size of investment can be reduced, if necessary
in relation to availability of funds. None of the projects can be delayed or
undertaken more than once.

Calculate which project Alpha Limited should undertake if the capital

available for investment is limited to Rs.1, 10,000 in 1994 and with no limitation
in subsequent years. For your analysis use the following present value factors:
Year 1994 1995 1996 1997

Factor 1.00 0.89 0.80 0.71

109
 Working Answer
Capital
Management Computation of Net Present Value (NPV) and Profitability Index (PI)
and Investment
(Rs. ‗000)

Project Discounted Cash Flows

1994 1995 1996 1997 NPV PI.

A (70) 31.15 28 14.20 3.35 1.048

B (40) (26.70) 36 39.05 8.35 1.125

C (50) (53.40) 56 56.80 9.40 1.091

D - (80.10) 44 46.15 10.05 1.125

E (60) 17.80 32 32.50 25.30 1.422

Ranking of Projects in Descending Order of Profitability Index

Rank 1 2 3 4 5

Projects E D B C A
Selection and Analysis
For Project ‗D‘ there is no capital rationing but it satisfies the criterion of
required rate of return.Hence Project D may be undertaken.
For other projects the requirement is Rs. 2,20,000 in year 1994 whereas the
capital available for investment is only Rs.1,10,000 based on the ranking. The
final selection from other projects which will yield maximum NPV will be:

Ranking of Projects excluding ‗D‘ which is to start in 1995 when no

limitation on capital availability.
Project E B C A
Rank 1 2 3 4

Working Notes:
(1) Computation of discounted cash flows (Rs. 000)

110
 Investments
Question 6
and Fund
Elite Builders, a leading construction company has been approached by a
foreign Embassy to build for it ablock of six flats to be used as guest houses. As
per the terms of the contract the Foreign Embassy would provide Elite Builders
the plans and the land costing Rs 25 lakhs. Elite Builders would build the flats at
their own cost and lease them out to the Foreign Embassy for 15 years at the end
of which the flats will be transferred to the Foreign Embassy for a nominal value
of Rs. 8 lakh. Elite Builders estimates the cost of construction as follows:
Area per flat 1,000 sq. ft.

Construction cost Rs. 400 per sq. ft.

Registration and other costs 2.5% of cost of construction

Elite builders will also incur Rs. 4 lakh each in years 14-15 towards repairs.
Elite builders propose to charge the lease rentals as follows:

Years Rentals
1-5 Normal

6-10 120% of Normal

11-15 150% of Normal

Elite Builders present tax rate averages at 50%. The full cost of construction
and registration will be written off over 15 years and will be allowed for tax
purposes.
You are required to calculate the normal lease rental per annum per flat. For
your exercise you may assume:
(a) Minimum desired return of 10%

(b) Rentals and repairs will arise on the last day of the year
(c) Construction, registration and other costs will be incurred at t = 0

Answer:
Calculation of normal rental per annum per flat

Outflows and present value of cost of construction, registration and other

costs and repairs:
Rs.

111
 Working Cost of Construction 24,00,000
Capital
Management (6 x 1,000 x Rs. 400)
and Investment
Registration and other costs at 2.5% 60,000

Total 24,60,000
Present value 24,60,000

Repairs cost each in years 14 and 15 Rs. 4,00,000

Less : Tax Savings at 50% Rs. 2,00,000

Net after tax cost Rs. 2,00,000

Present value

(Rs. 2,00,000 x [0.26 + 0.24]) 1,00,000

Total present value of outflows 24,60,000

Inflows and present value

Let the normal lease rentals for all the 6 flats per annum be ‗%‘. Then lease
rentals for the years and present value will be as follows:
Tax savings on cost of construction written off:
Total present Value of inflows:

Rs. 4.4x + Rs. 6,23,200+ Rs. 96,000

= 4.4x + Rs. 7,19,200

Lease rentals = Present value of inflows equals present value of outflows

Or, 4.4x + Rs. 7,19,200=23,60,000

Or, 4.4x = Rs. 18,40,800

Hence , x = Rs. 18,40,800 = Rs. 4,13,364
4.4
Thus normal lease rental per flat per annum = Rs. 4,18,364/ 6= Rs. 69,727

112
Question 7 Investments
and Fund
M/s. Gamaand Co. wants to replace its old machine with a new automatic
machine. Two models Zee and Chee are available at the same cost of Rs. 5 lakh
each. Salvage value of the old machine is Rs. 1 lakh. The utilities of the existing
machine can be used if the company purchases Zee. Additional cost of utilities to
be purchased in that case are Rs. 1 lakhs. If the company purchases Chee then all
the existing utilities will have to be replaced with new utilities costing Rs. 2 lakh.
The salvage value of the old utilities will be Rs. 0.20 lakh. The earnings after
taxation are expected to be:

(Cash in-flows of)

Year Zee Chee P V Factor @ 15%

1 1,00,000 2,00,000 0.87

2 1,50,000 2,10,000 0.76

3 1,80,000 1,80,000 0.66

4 2,00,000 1,70,000 0.57
5 1,70,000 40,000 0.50

Salvage Value at
The end of Year 5 50,000 60,000

The targeted return on capital is 15%. You are required to (i) compute, for
the two machines separately, net present value, discounted payback period and
desirability factor and (ii) advise which of the machines is to be selected.

Answer
Expenditure at Year ( ) (Rs. in lakhs)
(i) Discount Value of Cash Flows

(Rs. in lakhs)

113
 Working
Machine Zee Machine Chee
Capital
Management Year NPV Factor Cash Discounted Cash Discounted
and Investment
@ 15% flows value of flows value of
inflows inflows

0 1.00 (5.00) (5.00) (5.80) (5.80)

0.87 1.00 0.87 2.00 1.74
0.76 1.50 1.14 2.10 1.60
30.66 1.80 1.19 1.80 1.19
40.57 2.00 1.14 1.70 0.97
5 0.50 1.70 0.85 0.40 0.20
0.50 0.50 0.25 0.60 0.30
Net Present Value (+) 0.44 (+) 0.20

Since the Net Present Values of both the machines are positive both are
acceptable
(ii) Discounted Pay Back Period (Rs. in lakhs)

YearDiscounted Cumulative Discounted Cumulative

Cash flow discounted Cash flow discounted

Cash inflows Cash inflows

0 (5.00) —— (5.80) ——

1 0.87 0.87 1.74 1.74

2 1.14 2.01 1.60 3.34

3 1.19 3.20 1.19 4.53

4 1.14 4.24 0.97 5.50

5 1.10 5.44 1.50* 6.00

*Includes salvage value

Discounted Payback Period:

0.66 x 1 0.30 x 1

4 Years + ————————— 4 Years + ————————— 1.0 0.50

= 4.6 Years = 4.6 Years

114
 Machine Zee Machine Chee Investments
and Fund
Rs. 5.44 lakhs Rs. 6.00 lakhs
Rs. 5.00 lakhs Rs. 5.80 lakhs

= 1.088 = 1.034

(iv) The discounted payback period in both the cases is same but the net present
value and also the desirability factor are higher in the case of Zee, it is better
to choose Zee.

Question 8
Swastik Ltd. manufacturers of special purpose machine tools, have two
divisions which are periodically assisted by visiting teams of consultants. The
management is worried about the steady increase of expense in this regard over
the years. Ananalysis of last year‘s expenses reveals the following:
The management estimates accommodation expenses to increase by Rs.
2,00,000 annually.

As part of a cost reduction drive, Swastik Ltd. is proposing to construct a

consultancy centre to take care of the accommodation requirements of the
consultants. This centre will additionally save the company Rs. 50,000 in
boarding charges and Rs. 2,00,000 in the cost of Executive Training Programmes
hitherto conducted outside the company‘s premises, every year.
The following details are available regarding the construction and
maintenance of the new centre:

 Land: Already owned by the company at a cost of Rs. 8,00,000

 Construction cost: Rs. 15,00,000 including special furnishings

 Cost of annual maintenance : Rs. 1,50,000

 Construction cost will be written off over 5 years being the useful life.

Assuming that the write off of construction cost as aforesaid will be

accepted for tax purposes that the rate of tax will be 50% and that the desired rate
of return is 15% you are required to analyze the feasibility of the proposal and
make recommendations.

115
 Working Answer
Capital
Management The relevant Present Value Factors are:
and Investment
Year - 1 2 3 4 5

PV Factor - 0.87 0.76 0.66 0.57 0.50

Hence, it is desirable to build the guest house.

Notes :
1) Consultants‘ remuneration, travel and conveyance and special allowance
will be incurred even after construction of guest house and hence not
relevant.

2) Land value is not relevant as it is a sunk cost.

Question 9
A company is considering which of the two mutually exclusive projects it
should undertake. The Finance Director thinks that the project with the higher
NPV should be chosen whereas the Managing Director thinks that the one with
the higher IRR (Internal Rate of Return) should be undertaken especially as both
projects have the same initial outlay and length of life. The company anticipates
cost of capital of 10% and the net after tax as follow:

Year 0 1 2 3 4 5
(Cash flows Figs 000)
Project X (200) 35 80 90 75 20
Project Y (200) 218 10 10 4 3

Required to:

 Calculate the NPV and IRR of each project

 State with reasons which project you would recommend

 Explain the inconsistency in the ranking of the two projects

The discount factors are as follows

Year 0 1 2 3 4 5
Discount Factors

(10%) 1 0.91 0.83 0.75 0.68 0.62

(20%) 1 0.83 0.69 0.58 0.48 0.41

116
 Investments
Answer
and Fund
(a) Calculation of the NPV (Net Present Value) and the Internal Rate of
Return (IRR) of each project:

NPV

Project X

Years Cash Discount Discounted Discount Discounted

Flows Factors Values Factors Values

@ 10% @ 20%

0 (200) —— —— —— ——
1 35 0.91 31.85 0.83 29.05

2 80 0.83 66.40 0.69 55.20

3 90 0.75 67.50 0.58 52.20

4 75 0.68 51.00 0.48 36.00

5 20 0.62 12.40 0.41 8.20
229.15 180.65

NPV = +29.15 -19.35

IRR (Internal Rate of Return):

At 20% the Net Present Value (NPV) is – 19.35

At 10% NPV is + 29.15

29.15
IRR= 10 + ————————— x 10
29.15 + 19.35
29.15
= 10 + ————————— x 10 = 16.01%
48.50
Net Present Value (NPV)
Project Y
Years Cash Discount Discounted Discount Discounted
Flows Factors Values Factors Values
@ 10% @ 20%

117
 Working
0 (200) —— — —— ——
Capital
Management 1 218 0.91 198.38 0.83 180.94
and Investment 2 10 0.83 8.30 0.69 6.90
3 10 0.75 7.50 0.58 5.80
4 4 0.68 2.72 0.48 1.92
5 3 0.62 1.86 0.41 1.23
————— —————
218.76 196.76
NPV (Net Present Value) = +18.76 - 3.21

At 20% the NPV is – 3.21

At 10% the Net Present Value (NPV) is + 18.76

18.76
Internal Rate of Return (IRR) = 10 + ———————— x 10
18.76 + 3.21
18.76
= 10 + ——————— x 10 = 18.54%
21.97
(b) Both the projects are acceptable because they generate the positive NPV at
the company‘s cost of capital at 10%. However, the company will have to
select Project X because it has a higher NPV. If the company follows the
Internal Rate of Return (IRR) method, then Project Y should be selected
because of higher internal rate of return (IRR). But when NPV and IRR give
contradictory results, a project with high NPV is generally preferred because
of higher return in absolute terms. Hence project X should be selected.
(c) The inconsistency in the ranking of the projects arises because of the
difference in the patter of cash flows. Project X‘s major cash flows occur
mainly in the middle three years, whereas Y generates the major cash flows
in the first year itself.

118
Question 10 Investments
and Fund
SCL Limited, a highly profitable company is engaged in the manufacture of
power intensive products. As a part of its diversification plans, the company
proposes to put up a Windmill to generate electricity. The details of the scheme
are as follows:

1) Cost of the Windmill Rs. 300 lakhs

2) Cost of Land Rs. 15 lakhs

3) Subsidy from State Government to be Received at the end of first year of

installation Rs. 15 lakhs

4) Cost of electricity will be Rs. 2.25 per unit in year 1. This will increase by
Re. 0.25 per unit every year till years 7. After that it will increase by Re.
0.50 per unit.
5) Maintenance cost will be Rs. 4 lakh in year 1 and the same will increase by
Rs. 2 lakhs every year.
6) Estimated life 10 years
7) Cost of Capital 15%

8) Residual value of Windmill will be nil, however; land value will go up to

Rs. 60 lakhs, at the end of 10 years

9) Depreciation will be 100% of the cost of the Windmill in years 1 and the
same will be allowed for tax purposes

10) As windmills are expected to work based on wind velocity the efficiency is
expected to be an average 30%. Gross electricity generated at this level will
be 25 lakhs units per annum. 4% of this electricity generated will be
committed free to the State Electricity Board as per the agreement.

11) Tax rate 50%

From the above information you are required to:

(a) Calculate the net present value [ignore tax on capital profits]
(b) List down two non financial factors that should be considered before taking
a decision.
For your exercise use the following discount factors:

Year 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
Discount 0.87 0.76 0.66 0.57 0.50 0.43 0.38 0.33 0.28 0.25

119
 Working Factors
Capital
Management Answer
and Investment
(a) Working Notes

1. Initial investment Rs. (Lakhs)

Cost of Windmills 300

Land 15
315

2. Units available gross 25

Less : 4% 1 24 Lakhs

3. Cost/Unit

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
2.75 3.00 3.25 3.50 3.75 4.25 4.75 5.25 2.25 2.50

Discounting Cash flow (Rs. Lakhs)

*[50% (50-300)]
Decision : Project is viable

Note :
In the above question in item No 4, it is not clear whether the increase per
unit @ Rs. 0.50 is only upto year 8, or shall continue till year 10. If it is presumed
that the increase of Re. 0.50 per unit in cost of electricity generated is not beyond
year 8, then the cost per unit shall remain stationary (static) at Rs. 4.25 per unit till
the year 10. Hence the net present value will accordingly be changed to +3.58 and
the project will still be viable.

(b) Non-financial factor: The following non financial factors may be taken into
consideration:

 Cost of electricity

 Availability of skilled people

 Insurance coverage

 Velocity of wind and estimate

 Sensitivity of land value. This is strictly not realized.

Company should have a clause in the Memorandum of Articles to generate
electricity.

120
 Investments
Check your progress 6 and Fund

1. _________on debentures or Term loans has to be paid whether there is any

profit or not.
a. Payment

b. Dividend

c. Interest

3.8 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we had a very detailed discussion on the Capital budgeting
techniques which are considered to be a very important tool into the hands of an
investor to know the feasibility of investment in an organisaition.

Here we studied that based on cash flows are more realistic than these
based on accounting profits. NPV approach is considered theoretically superior to
the Internal Rate of Return (IRR) approach.We further studied that the term
Capital budgeting contains the relatively scarce, non-human resource of
production enterprise, and budgeting, indicating a detailed quantified planning
which guides future activities of an enterprise towards the achievement of its
profit goals. Capital expenditure decisions are taken considering the points like -
Creative search for Profitable opportunities, Long range capital planning, Short
range capital planning, Measurement of project work, Screening and Selection,
Control of authorized outlays, Post Mortem, Forms and Procedures and Economic
of capital budgeting.We understood the three different kinds of capital budgeting
proposals like – Replacement, Expansion, Modernization of Investment
Expenditures, Strategic Investment Proposals, Diversification, and Research and
Development.In this unit we covered different capital budgeting decisions that
include- Accept-reject decisions, Mutually Exclusive Project decisions, Capital
rationing decisions. There are different capital budgeting techniques which we
studied in this chapter - Pay Back Method, Average Rate Of Return Method, Net
Present Value (NPV) Method, Profitability Index Method, Internal Rate of Return
Method (IRR). We also covered practical problems to understand capital
budgeting decisions better.
So this unit is going to be of great help for the readers in understanding the
concepts of various capital budgeting techniques and various other concepts
associated to it.

121
 Working
Capital 3.9 Answers for Check Your Progress
Management
and Investment Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-b), (2-a)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-d)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-b), (2-b)

Check your progress 4

Answers: (1-a), (2-b)

Check your progress 5

Answers: (1-b)

Check your progress 6

Answers: (1-c)

3.10 Glossary
1. Capital Budgeting - The process of planning expenditures on assets whose
cash flows are expected to extend beyond one year.

3.11 Assignment
Explain in detail different capital budgeting techniques

122
 Investments
3.12 Activities and Fund

Which are the sources of long-term funds?

3.13 Case Study

How are the capital budgeting decisions helpful in selection of any project?
Explain with suitable example.

3.14 Further Readings

1. Fundamental of financial Management...... Dr. Prasanna. Chandra.
2. Financial Management........ P.V. Kulkami.

3. Financial Management ........Khan and Jain.

4. Financial Management....... Dr. Mahesh Kulkarni.

5. Financial Management...... Ravi Kishore.

123
 Working
Capital Block Summary
Management
In this block we had a very detailed study on working capital, inventory
and Investment
management and on various capital budgeting techniques.
In unit 1 and 2 we discussed about the working capital. These units have
discussed in detail about working capital. It discusses about Meaning and
Definition of Working Capital, Types of Working Capital, Factors Affecting
Working Capital / Determinants of Working Capital, Operating Working Capital
Cycle, Working Capital Requirements, Estimating Working Capital Needs and
Financing Current Assets, Capital Structure Decisions, Leverages. Further unit 2
discusses about in detail about Inventory Management, Purpose of holding
inventories, Types of Inventories, Inventory Management Techniques, Pricing of
inventories, Receivables Management, Purpose of receivables, Cost of
maintaining receivables, Monitoring Receivable, Cash Management, Reasons for
holding cash, Factors for efficient cash management. Lastly in unit 3rd we
discussed about the capital budgeting and its importance in a organisation it
discusses about Capital Budgeting, Principles of Capital Budgeting, Kinds of
Capital Budgeting Proposals, Kinds of Capital Budgeting Decisions, Capital
Budgeting Techniques, Estimation of Cash flow for new Projects, Sources of long
Term Funds.
So this block is going to help a lot the readers in explaining the other set of
few very important topics of financial management.

124
Block Assignment
Short Answer Questions
1. Importance of capital budgeting.
2. Superiority of cash flow concept over accounting profit concept.

3. Comparison of NPV and the Internal Rate of Return (IRR).

4. Purposes of holding the inventories.

5. Types of inventories.
6. Economic Order Quantity (EOQ).

7. Working Capital required for different businesses.

8. Disadvantages of inadequate working capital.

Long Answer Questions

1. Discuss the various ways through which the working capital cycle can be
shortening.

2. What are the factors for efficient cash management?

3. Explain the role of capital budgeting techniques in investment making
decisions.
4. What are types of Capital Structure?

5. What are the techniques of Inventory Management?

6. Discuss cost of maintaining receivables.

125
 Working Enrolment No.
Capital
Management 1. How many hours did you need for studying the units?
and Investment
Unit No 1 2 3 4

Nos of Hrs

2. Please give your reactions to the following items based on your reading of the
block:

3. Any Other Comments

………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………

126
 Education is something
which ought to be
brought within
the reach of every one.

- Dr. B. R. Ambedkar

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

‘Jyotirmay Parisar’, Opp. Shri Balaji Temple, Sarkhej-Gandhinagar Highway, Chharodi,
Ahmedabad-382 481.
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
PGDF-102

BLOCK 4:
INVESTMENT ANALYSIS
AND FINANCIAL PLANNING

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

Ahmedabad
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Knowledge Management and

Research Organization
Pune
Editorial Panel

Author
Prof. Asmita Rai

Language Editor
Ms. Renuka Suryavanshi

Graphic and Creative Panel

Ms. K. Jamdal
Ms. Lata Dawange
Ms. Pinaz Driver
Ms. Tejashree Bhosale
Mr. Kiran Shinde
Mr. Prashant Tikone
Mr. Akshay Mirajkar

Copyright © 2015 Knowledge Management and Research Organization.

All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced, transmitted or utilized
in any form or by a means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying,
recording or by any information storage or retrieval system without written
permission from us.

Acknowledgment
Every attempt has been made to trace the copyright holders of material reproduced
in this book. Should an infringement have occurred, we apologize for the same and
will be pleased to make necessary correction/amendment in future edition of this
book.
The content is developed by taking reference of online and print publications that
are mentioned in Bibliography. The content developed represents the breadth of
research excellence in this multidisciplinary academic field. Some of the
information, illustrations and examples are taken "as is" and as available in the
references mentioned in Bibliography for academic purpose and better
understanding by learner.'
ROLE OF SELF INSTRUCTIONAL MATERIAL IN DISTANCE LEARNING

The need to plan effective instruction is imperative for a successful

distance teaching repertoire. This is due to the fact that the instructional
designer, the tutor, the author (s) and the student are often separated by
distance and may never meet in person. This is an increasingly common
scenario in distance education instruction. As much as possible, teaching by
distance should stimulate the student's intellectual involvement and
contain all the necessary learning instructional activities that are capable of
guiding the student through the course objectives. Therefore, the course /
self-instructional material are completely equipped with everything that
the syllabus prescribes.
To ensure effective instruction, a number of instructional design
ideas are used and these help students to acquire knowledge, intellectual
skills, motor skills and necessary attitudinal changes. In this respect,
students' assessment and course evaluation are incorporated in the text.
The nature of instructional activities used in distance education self-
instructional materials depends on the domain of learning that they
reinforce in the text, that is, the cognitive, psychomotor and affective. These
are further interpreted in the acquisition of knowledge, intellectual skills
and motor skills. Students may be encouraged to gain, apply and
communicate (orally or in writing) the knowledge acquired. Intellectual-
skills objectives may be met by designing instructions that make use of
students' prior knowledge and experiences in the discourse as the
foundation on which newly acquired knowledge is built.
The provision of exercises in the form of assignments, projects and
tutorial feedback is necessary. Instructional activities that teach motor skills
need to be graphically demonstrated and the correct practices provided
during tutorials. Instructional activities for inculcating change in attitude
and behavior should create interest and demonstrate need and benefits
gained by adopting the required change. Information on the adoption and
procedures for practice of new attitudes may then be introduced.
Teaching and learning at a distance eliminates interactive
communication cues, such as pauses, intonation and gestures, associated
with the face-to-face method of teaching. This is particularly so with the
exclusive use of print media. Instructional activities built into the
instructional repertoire provide this missing interaction between the
student and the teacher. Therefore, the use of instructional activities to
affect better distance teaching is not optional, but mandatory.
Our team of successful writers and authors has tried to reduce this.
 Divide and to bring this Self Instructional Material as the best teaching
and communication tool. Instructional activities are varied in order to assess
the different facets of the domains of learning.
Distance education teaching repertoire involves extensive use of self-
instructional materials, be they print or otherwise. These materials are
designed to achieve certain pre-determined learning outcomes, namely goals
and objectives that are contained in an instructional plan. Since the teaching
process is affected over a distance, there is need to ensure that students actively
participate in their learning by performing specific tasks that help them to
understand the relevant concepts. Therefore, a set of exercises is built into the
teaching repertoire in order to link what students and tutors do in the
framework of the course outline. These could be in the form of students'
assignments, a research project or a science practical exercise. Examples of
instructional activities in distance education are too numerous to list.
Instructional activities, when used in this context, help to motivate students,
guide and measure students' performance (continuous assessment)
PREFACE
We have put in lots of hard work to make this book as user-friendly
as possible, but we have not sacrificed quality. Experts were involved in
preparing the materials. However, concepts are explained in easy language
for you. We have included may tables and examples for easy understanding.
We sincerely hope this book will help you in every way you expect.
All the best for your studies from our team!
FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT
Contents

BLOCK 1: BASICS OF FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

UNIT 1 INTRODUCTION TO FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

Finance, Financial Management, Scope of Financial Management,
Finance and Management Functions, Objectives of Financial
Management, Role and Functions of Finance Manager, Changing
Role of Finance Manger, Organization of Finance Function, Liquidity
and Profitability, Financial Management and Accounting, Financial
Management and Economics, Financial Management-Science or Art,
Significance of Financial Management, Strategic Financial
Management, Techniques of Financial Management
UNIT 2 SOURCES OF LONG -TERM FINANCE
Introduction, Types of Capital, Equity Capital, Preference Capital,
Debenture capital, Term Loan, Convertibles, Warrants, Leasing,
Hire-Purchase, Initial Public offer, Rights Issue, Private Placement

BLOCK 2: COST OF CAPITAL AND CAPITAL STRUCTURE

UNIT 1 COST OF CAPITAL

Concept of Cash Capital, Elements of Cost of Capital, Classification of
Cost of Capital, Opportunity Cost of Capital, Trading on Equity
UNIT 2 CAPITAL STRUCTURE THEORIES
Introduction to Capital Structure, Factors affecting capital structure,
Features of an optimal capital structure, Capital Structure Theories,
CAPM and Capital Structure, Adjusted Present Value
BLOCK 3: WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT AND INVESTMENT

UNIT 1 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-I

Introduction, Meaning and Definition of Working Capital, Types of
Working Capital, Factors Affecting Working Capital / Determinants
of Working Capital, Operating Working Capital Cycle, Working
Capital Requirements, Estimating Working Capital Needs and
Financing Current Assets, Capital Structure Decisions, Leverages
UNIT 2 WORKING CAPITAL MANAGEMENT-II
Inventory Management, Purpose of holding inventories, Types of
Inventories, Inventory Management Techniques, Pricing of
inventories, Receivables Management, Purpose of receivables, Cost
of maintaining receivables, Monitoring Receivable, Cash
Management, Reasons for holding cash, Factors for efficient cash
management
UNIT 3 INVESTMENTS AND FUND
Meaning of Capital Budgeting, Principles of Capital Budgeting, Kinds
of Capital Budgeting Proposals, Kinds of Capital Budgeting
Decisions, Capital Budgeting Techniques, Estimation of Cash flow for
new Projects, Sources of long Term Funds

BLOCK 4: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL PLANNING

UNIT 1 INVESTMENT ANALYSIS

Introduction, Investment and Financing Decisions, Components of
cash flows, Complex Investment Decisions
UNIT 2 FINANCIAL PLANNING- I
Introduction, Advantages of financial planning, Need for Financial
Planning, Steps in Financial planning, Types of Financial planning,
Scope of Financial planning
UNIT 3 FINANCIAL PLANNING-II
Derivatives, Future Contract, Forward Contacts, Options, Swaps,

Difference between Forward Contract and future contract, Financial

Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan after EFR Policy is

Determined
 Dr. Babasaheb PGDF-102
Ambedkar
Open University

FINANCIAL MANAGEMENT

BLOCK 4: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS AND FINANCIAL

PLANNING

UNIT 1
INVESTMENT ANALYSIS 03

UNIT 2
FINANCIAL PLANNING- I 16

UNIT 3
FINANCIAL PLANNING-II 24
BLOCK 4: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS
AND FINANCIAL PLANNING
Block Introduction
In this block we shall focus on the investment analysis and various other
financial planning decisions.

This block is divided into three units where unit 1st discusses about the topic
investment analysis in details where as unit 2nd& 3rd deals with financial planning.
Here in unit 1 we have discussed about Investment and Financing Decisions,
Components of cash flows, Complex Investment Decisions.

Unit 2 discusses about the following topics such as, Advantages of financial
planning, Need for Financial Planning, Steps in Financial planning, Types of
Financial planning, Scope of Financial planning. In unit 3Derivatives, Future
Contract, Forward Contacts, Options, Swaps, Difference between Forward
Contract and future contract, Financial Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan
after EFR Policy is Determined.

This block will certainly help the readers in understanding other few very
important concept of finance.

Block Objective
After learning this block, you will be able to understand:

 Investment and financing decisions.

 Distinguish between free cash flow and terminal cash flow.

 Arrive at networking capital.

 Explain financial planning.

 The financial planning process.

 Reason why financial planning is necessary.

1
 Investment
Block Structure
Analysis and
Financial Planning Unit 1: Investment Analysis
Unit 2: Financial Planning- I

Unit 3: Financial Planning-II

2
UNIT 1: INVESTMENT ANALYSIS
Unit Structure
1.0 Learning Objectives

1.1 Introduction
1.2 Investment and Financing Decisions

1.3 Components of Cash Flows

1.4 Complex Investment Decisions

1.5 Let Us Sum Up

1.6 Answers for Check Your Progress

1.7 Glossary
1.8 Assignment

1.9 Activities
1.10 Case Study

1.11 Further Readings

1.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 Investment and financing decisions.

 The components of cash flow.

 Make complex investment decisions.

 Distinguish between free cash flow and terminal cash flow.

 Arrive at networking capital.

3
 Investment
Analysis and 1.1 Introduction
Financial Planning The investment decisions for any firm should be based on Net Present Value
(NPV) rule for which we need to discount the cash flows. Estimation of cash
flows is an important step in investment analysis. A fair amount of efforts in terms
of time and money should be invested by management of a company in obtaining
accurate cash flow estimates. The cash flows are estimated by the financial
manager based on the information provided by the experts of various departments
like production, marketing, accounting, economics, etc. and he is also responsible
for checking the relevance and accuracy of this information.

1.2 Investment and Financing Decisions

An investment may be financed by a firm either by debt or equity, or partly
by equity and partly by debt. However, it should be noted that any earnings or
proceeds from debt or equity is not treated as investment‟s inflows. Likewise, the
payments of principal, interest, dividends, etc. are not considered as investment‟s
outflows and hence are not taken into account while computing investment‟s net
cash flows of the company.
Debt and equity required to finance a firm‟s investment is provided by
creditors and shareholders‟ respectively. So, they expect the rate of return based
on the amount of risk they take. Creditors get the returns in terms of fixed
payments whereas the cash flows that remain after the other payments are made is
passed on to the shareholders. Clearly, the risk taken by shareholders is more than
that of the creditors and so, the rate of return expected by the shareholders is more
than that of creditors. Also, the interest paid to the creditors is tax deductible
whereas the dividends paid are not. As a result, the after-tax cost of debt is less
than that of the rate of interest. This after-tax weighted average cost of equity and
debt is the discount rate which indicates the expected payments to be made to the
creditors and the expected dividends to be given to the shareholders. By deducting
the weighted average cost of debt and equity from investment‟s cash flows, we
ensure that the cash flows yielded from investments are sufficient enough to pay
interests to the creditors and dividends to the shareholders. Any residual cash after
servicing the equity and debt capital adds directly to the wealth of shareholders.

4
 Investment
Check your progress 1 Analysis

1. _________and equity required to finance a firm‟s investment is provided by

creditors and shareholders‟ respectively.
a. Finance

b. Capital

c. Debt

2. An ___________may be financed by a firm either by debt or equity, or

partly by
a. equity and partly by debt

b. Investment

3. As a result, the ___________cost of debt is less than that of the rate of

interest.
a. after-tax

b. Before-tax

4. Any residual cash after servicing the equity and debt capital adds directly to
the ____________of shareholders.
a. Health

b. wealth

1.3 Components of Cash Flows

The three components of a typical cash flow are

1. Initial Investment
2. Annual net cash flows

3. Terminal cash flows

1. Initial Investment
The net cash expenditure made by the company during the period in which
an asset is purchased by a company is called its initial investment. The gross
expenditure or the asset‟s original value comprises of accessories as well as spare
parts and also the installation charges form the major chunk of the initial
investment. Original value is considered for the calculation of annual
5
 Investment
depreciation. The difference between the original value and depreciation forms the
Analysis and
book value of the asset. Also, if the assets are purchased with the aim of
Financial Planning
increasing revenues, then investment in net working capital will also be required.
So, the initial investment is the sum of gross investment and investment in
working capital.

Also, in case old assets are sold to buy new ones, then the cash obtained by
selling the old assets should also be subtracted to obtain the initial investment
figure.
Initial investment also include miscellaneous expenses such as amount spent
on electrification, water supply as well as expenses on preliminary and pre-
operative activities (that must be completed before the company‟s actual work
stars) like promotional expenses, brokerage or commission if any, etc.
Let us take an example of a manufacturing company, say, ABC Pvt. Ltd.
Supposing the project requires land and development of site for building the
factory, the initial investments of the company would be as follows:
(Rs. Lakh)

Property and Site Development 70

Building Factory 900

Plant and Machinery 3630

Erection Expenses 300

Miscellaneous Expenditure 250

Preliminary and pre-operative expenses 100

Contingency 300
5550

Net Working Capital 500

Total Initial Investment 6050

1. Net Cash Flows

Once the initial cash outlay has been done, the investments should start
generating cash flows. Estimation of cash flows should always be carried on after-
tax basis.

Net cash flow (NCF) of a company is nothing but the difference between
receipts of cash and payment of cash and is inclusive of taxes. Though NCF
primarily consists of the annual cash flows that occur from the investment
6
 Investment
operations, any changes in net working capital as well as capital expenditures may
Analysis
also affect it.
To understand NCF in more detail, let us take a simple case where in cash
flows occur only from operations. Supposing that all sales i.e. revenues are
generated in cash and payment of all expenses is also made in cash, then NCF will
be defined as
Net cash flow = Revenues – Expenses – Tax

Note that taxes are deducted for computing NCF. The calculation of taxes is
done on the basis of accounting profit in which depreciation is considered as
deductible expense.

Depreciation and Taxes

Any non-cash item is known as depreciation and needs to be considered in
computation of NCF i.e. after-tax cash flow. It is an allocation of asset cost. It
does not require any cash outflows and involves an accounting entry.
Calculation of depreciation is done as per income tax rules and is considered
as deductible expense for tax calculation. Since it decreases the tax liability of a
firm, it impacts the cash flows indirectly. The outflow of cash for the saved taxes
is in fact the cash inflow and the saving that occurs due to depreciation is called
depreciation tax shield.

Net working Capital

The cash receipts and payments may differ due to changes in working
capital elements like inventories, receivables and payables. For better
understanding, let us consider the following scenarios:

 Change in receivable: The payments delayed by the customers will lead to

increased receivables. Since the revenues are mostly generated through cash
sales, the cash inflows will be overstated. Hence, actual cash receipts should
be computed by subtracting (in case of increased receivables) from or by
adding (in case of decreased receivables) to the expenses.

 Change in inventory: The Company may make payments in terms of cash

for raw material and production of output that is unsold. Cash payments
made for unsold material is not considered as an expense resulting in
understating the actual cash payments. Hence, computation of actual cash

7
 Investment
payments should be done by adding (increased inventory) to or subtracting
Analysis and
(decreased inventory) from the expenses.
Financial Planning
 Change in payable: The delay made by the firm in payment for materials
and sales would lead to increased account payables. And since account
payables are considered as expenses, they lead to overstating actual cash
payments. Hence, actual cash payments should be computed by subtracting
(in case of increased account payables) from or by adding (in case of
decreased account payables) to the expenses.
Thus, it is evident that the changes in the elements of working capital should
be considered while calculating the net cash inflow. Now, here, instead of
adjusting individual components of working capital, simply the change in net
working capital can be adjusted. i.e. we can simply adjust the difference between
change in current assets and that in current liabilities.

Free Cash Flows

In the life-cycle of an investment project, reinvestment of cash flows might
be need in addition to the initial investments. This additional capital expenditure
causes the net cash outflow to decrease.

Fig 1.1 Cash Flow Calculation of JET Airways

The free cash flow is defined as

Free cash flow = after-tax operating income + depreciation – net
working capital – capital expenditure.
In short, the free cash flow is nothing but the cash flow which is
available to serve both the lenders (creditors) as well as owners (share holders)
who have provided funds for financing investments. Free cash flow should be
deducted from an investment‟s NPV.

8
 Investment
2. Terminal Cash Flows
Analysis
Salvage Value (SV)
The market value of an investment at the time of its sale is called its salvage
value and is a typical example of terminal cash flows. In this, the cash earnings or
proceeds on\obtained from the sales of the assets is considered as cash inflow in
the terminal or last year. According to the current taxation law in India, there is no
tax liability on the sale of an asset.

In case of replacement of an existing asset, the current cash inflow will be

increased by its salvage value or the initial cash outlay of the new asset will be
decreased.
Following are the effects of salvage values of new and existing assets:

 The cash inflow in the terminal period of the new asset will be increased by
the salvage value of the new asset.

 The initial outlay of the new asset will be reduced by the salvage value of
the existing asset.

 The cash flow of the new investment will be reducedat the terminal period
by the salvage value of an existing asset at the end of its normal life.

Release of Net Working Capital

Apart from the salvage value, the release of net working capital may also be
included in terminal cost flows. It can be assumed that the funds involved in the
net working capital at the initial stages of investment would be eventually released
at time of termination of the investment. The net working capital may keep
changing during the life of the investment and such changes in working capital
should definitely be considered during computation of annual net cash flows.
Increased net working capital indicates cash outflow while decreased net working
capital indicates cash inflow.

Check your progress 2

1. The net cash expenditure made by the company during the period in which
an asset is purchased by a company is called its ___________
a. Investment

b. initial investment
c. final investment

9
 Investment
2. Original value is considered for the calculation of ___________depreciation
Analysis and
Financial Planning a. annual
b. Half yearly

3. The payments delayed by the customers will lead to

______________receivables.

a. increased
b. Decreased

4. The delay made by the firm in payment for materials and sales would lead to
increased ___________payables.

a. Cash account
b. account
5. The ____________value of an investment at the time of its sale is called its
salvage valueand is a typical example of terminal cash flows.

a. Home
b. market

1.4 Complex Investment Decisions

Many-a-times a company comes across complex investment situations and
need to choose one of the several alternatives. In such situations, the usage of
NPV can be extended to handle such complex investment decisions.

Existing asset replacement

The decisions to replace an existing asset must be monitored by necessity
and economic considerations. An existing asset must be replaced when there is
availability of more economic alternative.
Normally, many companies approve new machinery only when the existing
one refuses to perform well. In other words, they follow a simple norm of
replacing the machinery only when the old one is totally out-of-service and has
gone beyond repair.

Cearly, it‟s not the firm who decides when to replace, but the machinery
decides for them and so is extremely incorrect and wrong policy of replacement.

10
 Investment
Based on the economic consideration, management should decide when to
Analysis
replace.
An economic analysis may tell the company to replace a machine say after 5
years. But, if the company replaces the machine say after 15 years when it has
gone beyond repair, then the company not only incurs extra costs but also loses
extra profit for 10 years.

Investment decisions under inflation

For the prudent investment decisions, it is always wise to assume inflation
for all the practical investment purposes. Inflation should be considered while
estimating cash flows and discount rates.
Since the investment decisions are taken for a long term and in India (being
a developing country) the two digit inflation number is common and hence
inflation should be factored in the decisions related to long term investments.

Inflation has adverse effect on the working capital. Increasing costs like raw
material, more investment is required for raw materials and receivables.
A wise investment policy takes into account the rising prices (inflation) and
this should be considered while taking capital budgeting decisions.

Investment decisions using capital rationing

Due to limited financial resources, the companies have to select profitable
projects from the various choices available.

There are 2 types of capital rationing:

1. External capital rationing

2. Internal capital rationing

Example 1:
Assume the amount provided for investment is limited to 50,00,000.

Project Investment Total Net Present

(Amount) Investment Value

Capital A 20,000,000 4,000,000

Rationing
Solution B 20,000,000 3,800,000

C 10,000,000 50,000,000 1,500,000

11
 Investment
Analysis and Best Solution D 10,000,000 1,000,000
Financial Planning
E 8,000,000 68,000,000 400,000

F 8,000,000 300,000

Under capital rationing, only projects A through C calling for 50,000,000

investment although projects D and E have positive net present value they will not
be accepted.

Example 2:

Project I. (milss) NPV PI Rank

A 500 110 0.22 1

B 150 -7.5 -0.05 6

C 350 70 0.20 2

D 450 81 0.15 4

E 200 38 0.19 3

F 400 20 0.05 5

In case the cash available for capital investment is 1,100m, the projects A, C
and E will be selected.
Exhibit – Capital Rationing
Source – Financial analysis revised, cbdd.wsu.edu

1. External capital rationing

External capital rationing is all about mismatches in capital markets. That
means there are companies which are dependant heavily on debt financing and so
they fear losing the control if they go for equity financing. In this case, there are
limited choices available for the company in selecting the projects.
There are companies in the area of biotechnology, gaming industry, nano
technology where the companies are upbeat about the profitability and
sustainability of the projects. But the investors think exactly opposite and so, it
would be difficult for the company to raise the equity capital.

12
 Investment
Do companies face capital rationing problem in India?
Analysis
 In a study of Indian Companies, it is revealed that most companies do not
reject projects on account of capital shortage. They face the problem of
shortage of funds due to the management‟s desire to limit capital
expenditures to internally generated funds or the reluctance to raise capital
from outside.

 Most companies do not use mathematical approach to select projects under

capital following. The basis to choose projects under capital rationing are :
o Profitability

o Priorities set by management

o Experience

 Some companies satisfy the criteria of profitability and strategic

considerations for allocating limited funds.
Generally companies do not reject profitable projects under capital
rationing; they postpone then till funds become available in future.

Check your progress 3

1. ____________means there are companies which are dependant heavily on
debt financing and so they fear losing the control if they go for equity
financing.

a. External capital rationing

b. Internal capital rationing

2. An economic analysis may tell the company to replace a machine say after
__________ years.
a. 1

b. 5
3. A wise investment policy takes into account the
_________________(inflation) and this should be considered while taking
capital budgeting decisions.

a. rising prices
b. Discount Prices

13
 Investment
4. ________________has adverse effect on the working capital. Increasing
Analysis and
costs like raw material, more investment is required for raw materials and
Financial Planning
receivables.

a. compression
b. Inflation

5. Normally, many companies approve new machinery only when the existing
one ____________to perform well.

a. Refuses
b. Uses

1.5 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we had a very detailed explanation on few of the very crucial
aspects of financial and investment decisions.

Here we studied about the three important cash flows - Initial Investment,
Annual net cash flows And Terminal Cash Flows. Here we even studied about the
net cash expenditure made by the company during the period in which an asset is
purchased by a company is called its initial investment. We also studied the
equation Net cash flow = Revenues – Expenses – Tax. Depreciation is non cash
expenditure and needs to be considered for the part of net cash flow. In this unit
we even studied and learned the equation of free cash flow that is
Free cash flow = after-tax operating income + depreciation – net working
capital – capital expenditure; which is important for capital investments. Not only
this we even studied about complex investment decisions like Existing asset
replacement, Investment decisions under inflation, Investment decisions using
capital rationing (which includes internal and external rationing) are the part and
parcel of today‟s financial management and it is imperative for the management
student to study all these techniques to arrive at the decision.
So this block is going to be of great help for all the readers in understanding
few of the very important concepts.

14
 Investment
1.6 Answers for Check Your Progress Analysis

Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-c), (2-b), (3-a), (4-b)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-b), (2-a), (3-a), (4-b), (5-b)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-a), (2-b), (3-a), (4-b), (5-a)

1.7 Glossary
1. Yield to Maturity (YTM) - The rate of return earned on abond if it is held
to maturity.

1.8 Assignment
Explain the three components of the typical cash flow.

1.9 Activities
Describe the complex investment decisions.

1.10 Case Study

Read the annual report of a public limited company and study its cash flow
statement and note your observations.

1.11 Further Readings

1. Financial management- ICFAI.

2. Financial management – I.M.Pandey.

15
 Investment
Analysis and UNIT 2: FINANCIAL PLANNING- I
Financial Planning
Unit Structure
2.0 Learning Objectives
2.1 Introduction

2.2 Financial Planning

2.2.1 Advantages of Financial Planning

2.2.2 Need for Financial Planning

2.2.3 Steps in Financial Planning

2.2.4 Types of Financial Planning

2.2.5 Scope of Financial Planning

2.3 Let Us Sum Up

2.4 Answers for Check Your Progress

2.5 Glossary
2.6 Assignment

2.7 Activities
2.8 Case Study

2.9 Further Readings

2.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 Explain financial planning.

 Realize the importance of financial planning.

 Discuss financial planning process.

 Describe the scope of financial planning.

 Reason why financial planning is necessary

16
 Financial
2.1 Introduction Planning- I
Today, everybody should have his or her financial plan which will give a
road map for the secure future.
According to McGee Financial, Financial Planning is “a process of money
management that may include any or all of several strategies, including budgeting,
tax planning, insurance, retirement and estate planning, and investment strategies.
In effective financial planning, all elements are coordinated with the aim of
building, protecting, and maximizing net worth”.

The derivatives are most modern financial instruments in hedging risk. The
individuals and firms who wish to avoid or reduce risk can deal with the others
who are willing to accept the risk for a price. A common place where such
transactions take place is called the „derivative market‟.

2.2 Financial Planning

2.2.1 Advantages of Financial Planning
1. Upgraded living

2. Money management
3. Consumption

4. Securing future
5. Building wealth

1. Upgraded living: A person can maintain income and expenditure if he

knows his financial plan. Due to increase in income and consumption
pattern, the standard of living is increasing.
2. Money management: Any income can be either saved for the future
purpose or consumed for the current needs financial planning helps in
guiding the person when to invest and when to consume.

3. Consumption: Consumption includes spending money on the basic

necessities like food, shelter, and clothing. It also includes buying luxury
and semi-luxury products. Normally, the average propensity to consume
(the average inclination of an individual to spend rupee of income on the
current needs than to save for the future needs) decreases when the income

17
 Investment
increases. This results in increased saving and so, financial planning helps
Analysis and
the person in chalking out the plans for the future.
Financial Planning
4. Securing Future: As we have seen in the above point that the propensity to
consume decreases when the income increases resulting into increased
savings. This increased saving is invested in different financial and real
assets. The idea is to give higher returns on these investments to safeguard
from increasing prices (inflation) and from rainy days.

5. Building Wealth: Financial planning helps a person to create a plan for the
future by investing in assets and keeping the current income intact. There
are many luxurious products like car, which, in long term may not give any
returns; however, it provides convenience to the person. There is another
asset like real estate which gives higher returns to the person by capital
appreciation.

By having the right mix of such assets, an individual can build the wealth
over time with the help of proper financial planning.

2.2.2 Need for Financial Planning

Every individual is different in his educational background, age, gender,
attitude, values, and basic needs. Needs can be different based on the above
factors.

Fig 2.1 Investment Planning

18
 Financial
 Real estate Planning
Planning- I
 Credit management

 Tax management

 Managing cash and savings

 Health and life insurance

 Investing in equities and fixed income securities

 Investment in mutual funds

 Contingencies

 Retirement planning

 Marriage

 Buying luxurious and domestic products

2.2.3 Steps in Financial Planning

Any financial planning process should be systematic, result-oriented and
easy to follow.
Following are the steps in financial planning:

Fig 2.2 Steps in Financial Planning

19
 Investment
 The first important step in financial planning is to have a clear picture of
Analysis and
your goals and finalize those goals. Factors like expected age of retirement,
Financial Planning
income expected after retirement, amount of income you would like to keep
for your surviving better half, etc. can help you define your goals more
clearly.

 Second step involves gathering as much information as possible. The

information should be pertaining to insurance policies, tax returns, wills,
trusts, etc. The more information, the better will be your financial plan.

 Once you have adequate information, explore and process that information.
Appropriate advisors may be consulted for the same.

 Adopting a good all-inclusive financial plan can help you meet your goals
more easily as it provides you with appropriate strategies and examples.

 Once the plan has been decided, next important step is to execute that plan.
Plan can be executed by using the strategies which you are comfortable
with.

 Finally, the plan must be monitored and altered periodically with the
changing conditions.

2.2.4 Types of Planning

Following are the different types of planning according to his or her
requirement at the different stages of life.

 Asset acquisition planning

 Liability and insurance planning

 Savings and investment planning

 Employee benefit planning

 Tax planning

 Retirement and estate planning

2.2.5 Scope of Financial Planning

Following are the areas that come under scope of financial planning:

 Central and state government

20
 Financial
 Tax policies
Planning- I
 Regulatory environment

 Businesses

 Consumer preference

 Macroeconomic factors

 Business cycles

 Change in prices and interest rates

Check your progress 1

1. _________includes spending money on the basic necessities like food,
shelter, and clothing.

a. Saving
b. Investment

c. Consumption
2. Any ______________process should be systematic, result-oriented and easy
to follow.
a. Marketing planning

b. financial planning
3. ______________planning helps a person to create a plan for the future by
investing in assets and keeping the current income intact.
a. Financial

b. Marketing
4. A person can maintain _________________if he knows his financial plan.

a. Expenditure
b. income and expenditure

21
 Investment
Analysis and 2.3 Let Us Sum Up
Financial Planning In this unit we discussed about financial planning in very detail. We
discussed that it is a process of money management that may include any or all of
several strategies, including budgeting, tax planning, insurance, retirement and
estate planning, and investment strategies. In effective financial planning, all
elements are coordinated with the aim of building, protecting, and maximizing net
worth.
We studied the various advantages of financial planning.The benefits are
upgraded living, Money management, Consumption, Securing future and Building
wealth among others. Financial planning is more than money management; it is all
about managing the current needs and to be prepared for the future needs and the
contingencies as well. An individual needs to do financial planning mainly for the
reasons like - Real estate Planning, Credit management, Tax management,
Managing cash and savings, Health and life insurance, Investing in equities and
fixed income securities, Investment in mutual funds, Contingencies, Retirement
planning, Marriage, Buying luxurious and domestic products. More, we discussed
on the financial process and studied that the financial process starts with a clear
picture of your goals and then gathering as much information as possible. Third
step is to have appropriate advisors. The next step is adopting a good all-inclusive
financial plan and then to actually execute that plan. Final step is to monitor and
taking the corrective steps.
So this unit is going to be of great help for students in understanding more
about financial planning and making decisions in this regard.

2.4 Answers for Check Your Progress

Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-c), (2-b), (3-a), (4-b)

2.5 Glossary
1. Zero Coupon Bond - A bond that pays no annual interest but is sold at a
discount below par, thus providing compensation to investors in the form of
capital appreciation.

22
 Financial
2.6 Assignment Planning- I

Explain the financial planning process with all the steps.

2.7 Activities
What are the advantages of financial planning?

2.8 Case Study

Write a financial plan for yourself stating the different stages in your life
and how do you plan to meet the requirements at different stages including
education, marriage, buying a house, health and other contingencies.

2.9 Further Readings

1. Personal Financial Planning – ICFAI University.

23
 Investment
Analysis and UNIT 3: FINANCIAL PLANNING-II
Financial Planning
Unit Structure
3.0 Learning Objectives

3.1 Introduction
3.2 Derivatives
3.2.1 Future Contract
3.2.2 Forward Contacts

3.2.3 Options
3.2.4 Swaps

3.3 Difference between Forward Contract and Future Contract

3.4 Financial Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan after EFR Policy
is Determined
3.5 Let Us Sum Up

3.6 Answers for Check Your Progress

3.7 Glossary

3.8 Assignment
3.9 Activities

3.10 Case Study

3.11 Further Readings

3.0 Learning Objectives

After learning this unit, you will be able to understand:

 Basic derivatives

 That practical financial planning becomes easier if we project the financial

statements for the near future.

 How EFR can be calculated

 How funds can be raised through different sources.

 The Difference between various derivative products

24
 Financial
3.1 Introduction Planning- II

Understanding of financial planning and preparation of financial plan after

EFR policy is determined.
This unit will begin with introduction of derivatives. We will also learn how
to prepare financial plans to support a targeted level of sales.

3.2 Derivatives
The derivatives are most modern financial instruments in hedging risk. The
individuals and firms who wish to avoid or reduce risk can deal with the others
who are willing to accept the risk for a price. A common place where such
transaction takes place is called the „derivative market‟.

Fig 3.1 Structured and Derivative Investment Products

Source – BNP Paribas website

Derivatives are those assets whose value is determined from the value of
some underlying assets. The underlying asset may be equity, commodity or
currency.
They derive their value from some underlying instrument and have no
intrinsic value of thereby won. Forwards, futures options, swaps, caps and floor
are some of more commonly used derivatives.

25
 Investment
Analysis and
Financial Planning

Fig 3.2 Future Contracts

It is a standardised agreement to deliver or receive a specified amount of

specified currency at specified price (exchange rate) and the date. The buyer of
the future contract receives the currency while the seller of the future contract
delivers the currency.
Only the members of the future exchange can engage in future transactions.
The members of future exchange can be classified as either commission brokers
or floor traders. Floor brokers execute order for their customers, while others
work independently. Floor brokers (also called locals) trade on their won account.
A future contract provides both a right and an obligation to buy or sell a
standard amount of a commodity, security or currency on a specified future date at
price agreed when the contract is entered into. A key element of any successful
traded futures contact must be the characteristic of standardisation; it is this
element which makes the agreement tradable. The only negotiable, changeable
element must be the price agreed when entering into the contract.

 It is a standardised specific sized contract.

 The contract has a standard maturity date. At International Money Market

(IMM) Chicago, contracts mature on the third Wednesday of March, June,
September and December.

 Collateral requirements: the purchaser must deposit a sum as initial deposits

called „margin‟ as collateral. In additions to initial margin, the customers are
required to deposit the maintenance margin.

 Customers pay commission to their brokers to execute the order.

26
 Financial
 Clearing house as counter party- All future contracts are agreement between
Planning- II
clients and the exchange clearing house rather than the two parties involved
in the transaction. Thus there is no default risk.

 Settlement on the final date of delivery. Only 5% of the contracts are settled
by physical delivery of foreign exchange between buyers and sellers offset
their original position prior to delivery date by taking an opposite position.
Future price = spot price + costs of carrying

Costs of carrying are the aggregate of storage, insurance, transport costs,

finance costs, etc.

Types:

 Commodity futures: Where the underlying is a commodity or physical

asset such as wheel, cotton, butter, eggs, etc. such contracts began traded on
Chicago Board of Trade in 1860‟s. India too futures on soybean, black
pepper, spices have been trading for long.

 Financial futures: Where the underlying such as foreign exchange interest

rates shares, treasurybill or stock index.

Participants in future market

 Hedgers: Hedgers wish to eliminate or reduce the price risk to which they
are already exposed. The hedging function solely focuses on the role of
transferring the risk of price changes to other holders in the futures markets.

 Speculators: Speculators are those classes of investors who willingly take

price risks to profit from price changes in the underlying.

 Arbitrageurs: They profit from price differential existing in the markets by

simultaneously operation in two different markets.

3.2.2 Forward Contacts

A forward contract involves an agreement today to buy or sell a specified
amount of foreign currency at a specified future date at a rate agreed upon today
(the forward rate). The typical forward contracts are for 1 month, 3 months or 6
months. With 3 months being most common. Forward contracts for longer periods
are not as common because of the great uncertainties involved.

27
 Investment
It is a fixed price contract made today for delivery of a certain amount of
Analysis and
currency at a specified future date. The specified date is the settlement date. The
Financial Planning
agreed upon price is termed as forward rate.

No money changes hands today. The exchange takes place on future date.
The forward contract stipulates that the full amount need not be exchanged on the
settlement date. Only the difference between the forward rate and the spot rate
prevailing on settlement date will be paid.

Hedging and speculation are the main activities, which pertain to forward
market.

An agreement made today between abuyer and seller to exchange the

commodity or instrument for cash at a predetermined future date a price agreed
upon today.
A forward foreign exchange contract used to hedge a future payment in a
foreign currency entails delivery of a certain amount of one currency in exchange
for a certain amount of another currency at a certain future date.
A fixed-price contract made today for delivery of a certain amount of a
currency at a specified future date. The specified date is the settlement date. The
agreed upon price is termed the forward rate.

No money changes hands today. The exchange takes place on a future date.
The forward contract stipulates that the full amount need not be exchanged on the
settlement date. Only the difference between the forward rate and the spot rate
prevailing on the settlement date will be paid.

Forward exchange contracts may be used to hedge a future import payment

or export receipt. It can also be used for speculation. The bank may engage in a
forward contract as a service to customer the bank will then offset the forward
seeking to profit form the spread between currency bought and currency sold. The
financial- market participants seek to take advantage of an apparent inefficiency in
the currency or money markets.

Forward exchange contracts are amazingly versatile. They are available in

two dozen or more currencies and for maturities ranging from one week to several
years. Many individuals and even institutions are drawn to the currency future
market, because it entails far less default risk.

Default risk in forward contracts arises because such a contract commitment

for future performance and one or the other party may be unwilling or unable to
honor that commitment.

28
 On the settlement date, one party in effect owes the other party a net Financial
amount. The net amount and who owes whom cannot be determined in advance. It Planning- II
depends on the direction and extent to which the currency has moved in the
interior.
E.g. on march 1, A agrees to buy one-pound sterling from B. 3 months
forward at a price of $ 1.75. as a convenience to both, they agree that on the
settlement date ( June 3) only the net amount will be exchanged the net amount is
defined to be the difference between the forward date ($ 1.75) and the spot rate,
whatever it is, in 3 months time (June 1). If the pound is above $ 1.75, B pay A
the difference; if the spot rate turns out to be below $ 1.75, A pays B the
difference. Either way, the payment will take place in dollars again, as a
convenience.

3.2.3 Options
Contracts between sellers and buyers, which obligate the former to deliver
and entitle the latter without obligation to buy stated quantities of assets with
stated quality at some future dates at todays contracted prices.
The option market is not only extended to stock dealings but also to foreign
currencies, commodities, etc.
An option is right but not an obligation to enter into transaction.

Features:

 The option is exercisable only by the owner, namely the buyer of the option.

 The owner has limited liability.

 Owners of options have no right affordable to shareholders such as voting

right and dividend right.

 Options have high degree of risk to the option writers.

 Flexibility in investors needs.

 No certificates are issued by the company.

There are 2 types of options:

 Call Option

 Put Option

29
 Investment
A put option gives the right to sell the share at a further date at the pre-
Analysis and
determined price. A call option gives a right to buy the share at predetermined
Financial Planning
price at future date. Both these options are derivatives or secondary instruments.
The value of which will be different from the value of the share on which it is
based.

3.2.4 Swaps
“A swap can be defined as the exchange of one stream of future cash flow
with another stream of cash flows with different characteristics.”

“A swap is an agreement between two or more people/ parties to exchange

sets of cash flows over a period in future.”

Swaps can be divided in two types:

 Currency swaps: the currency swaps are agreements whereby currencies

are exchanged at a specified exchange rate and specified intervals. The basic
purpose of swaps is to lock in the rate.

 Interest Rates Swaps: An interest Rate Swap is an agreement whereby one

party exchange one set of interest rate payments for another. Most common
arrangement is an exchange of fixed interest rate payment for another rate
over a time period. The interest rates calculated on notions calculated of
principal.

Check your progress 1

1. The __________are most modern financial instruments in hedging risk.
a. Swaps

b. Derivatives

c. Options

2. “A swap is an agreement between two or more people/ parties to

______________sets of cash flows over a period in future.”
a. exchange

b. Buy
3. An option is ____________but not an obligation to enter into transaction.
a. Wrong
b. Right
30
 Financial
4. _________________, one party in effect owes the other party a net amount.
Planning- II
a. Buy date
b. On the settlement date

5. The ________________, changeable element must be the price agreed when

entering into the contract.
a. only negotiable
b. Market

3.3 Difference between Forward Contract and

Future Contract

Forward contract Future contract

It can be for any amount as per the A future contract is not available for a
requirement of individual parties. particular amount, because it is
required to be for a prescribed amount
only.

It can be in non-standardized form at. It is always in a standardized format.

It is not regulated through any It is regulated by an exchange legally

statutory empowered to enforce the contract.

A forward contract is not transferable It can be traded officially on the

to the other partied. It can be cancelled exchange on which it is enforceable.
or extended by mutual consent of the Therefore a future contract can be
parties. Therefore it is not very liquid considered more liquid even though
or flexible respect in respect of the there is no flexibility in it‟samount.
amount for it.

Forward contract were originally There is always a margin payment at

designed without involving any the time of entry and there are
marginal payment, but these days periodical variation payments, which
are payable by one party and
banks insist on some marginal deposit.
receivable by another party. These
These are not periodical variation variation payments proved an
payments and therefore there are umbrella of protected to both the
greater risks of default. parties.

31
 Investment
Financial statements are useful in understanding past as well as providing
Analysis and
the starting point for developing financial plan for the future.
Financial Planning
Financial plans begin with the firm‟s product development and sales
objectives. A corporate entity can possibly aim at either a normal growth plan,
which aims at a percentage growth in sales. This probably does not aim at making
inroads into competitor‟s share. If it is an aggressive growth plan which calls for
increased market share or entry into new areas and new products will call for
heavy investment in machinery, equipment, land, building, etc.
Sales forecasts, in any case, need to be translated in future cash flows. If
future operating cash flows are insufficient to cover the planned investment in
fixed assets and working capital and to meet planned dividend payments, then the
balance has to be made good by borrowing or by the issue of new shares.
In chapter I, we had discussed EFR (External Funds Requirement). This was
an introduction to what is now understood as financial plan. We will sum up four
steps involved:
Step 1: Project next year‟s operating cash flow assuming the agreed percentage of
increase in sales.
Step 2: Project additional investment in working capital and fixed assets that will
be necessary to support the higher level of activity. At this stage, also take into
consideration the dividend payout.

Step 3: Observe the difference between the projected operating cash flows as per
step 1 and projected uses of funds as per step 2. The difference represents the cash
to be raised either by borrowing or by issuing shares.
Step 4: Once it is decided about mix of debt and equity it is necessary to prepare a
projected balance sheet that will incorporate new levels of assets, revised retained
earnings and new debt as well as equity.

In actual practice it is possible to set up a spreadsheet, which can project for

the next five to seven years in terms of projected income statements and projected
balance sheets.
The financial plan established will become financial goal and should be
taken as a benchmark for evaluating performance in subsequent years.
The process of financial planning will force the management to combine
effects of the firm‟s investment as well as financing decisions. This is very
important because these functions, namely, investment, financing and dividend
are not independent of each other and must interact.

32
 It should be carefully noted that the financial plan model does not Financial
necessarily lead to optimal financial strategy. In actual practice, it has been Planning- II
experienced that financial planning generally proceeds by trial and error. The
primary purpose of financial statements is to produce accounting statements but
good finance managers can make use of the financial plan to achieve maximum
possible growth in shareholder‟s network.

Check your progress 2

1. __________ can be for any amount as per the requirement of individual
parties.
a. Future contract

b. Forward contract

2. _______________, in any case, need to be translated in future cash flows.

a. Sales forecasts
b. Buy forecasts

3. The ____________established will become financial goal and should be

taken as abenchmark for evaluating performance in subsequent years.

a. financial plan
b. Marketing Plan

4. ______________is regulated by an exchange legally empowered to enforce

the contract.
a. Forward contract

b. Future Contract

33
 Investment
Analysis and 3.4 Financial Planning and Preparation of Financial
Financial Planning Plan after EFR Policy is Determined
External Funds Requirement [EFR] leading to financial planning.

The EFR Model assumes that if the sales have to go up then the investments
in all assets should proportionately go up.

This is generally true for the Current Assets but not true for Fixed Assets
and therefore the Model is defective to some extent.

The Model also assumes that if the sales go up, spontaneous liabilities will
also go up proportionately. This is also logical. A formula is available for
calculating EFR but it is advisable to understand the fundamentals behind it. We
can calculate EFR by preparing a projected B/S for the sales, from the past
turnover.

Financial Forecasting Planning

Problems for Practice

1. The balance sheet of Pradhan Company at the end of year 19x2, which is just
over, is given below: (Rs. „000)

Share Capital 50 Fixed assets 130

Retained earnings 60 Inventories 90

Long term loans 80 Receivables 80

Short term borrowings 60 Cash 20

Trade Creators 50

Provisions 20

320 320

The sales for the year just ended were Rs. 4,00,000. The expected sales for
the year 19x3 are Rs. 5,00,000. Net profit margin is 5% and the dividend pay out
ratio is 50%.

34
Required: Financial
Planning- II
a. Determine the external funds requirement for Pradhan for the year 19x3.
b. How should the company raise its external funds requirements, if the
following restrictions apply?

 Current ration should not be less than 1.33.

 The ratio of fixed asset to long term loans should be grater than 1.5.
Assume that the company wants to tap external funds in the following order:
short term back borrowing, long term loans, and additional equity issue.
2. The Balance sheet of Damodar Chemicals Limited as on 31st March, 1992 is
given below:

Liabilities Rs. In Assets Rs. In Lakhs

Lakhs

Share Capital 75 Fixed Assets 200

Retained Earnings 90 Inventories 100

Term Loans 40 Receivables 75

Short-term Bank 100 Cash 25

Borrowings Accounts 70
Payable

Provisions 25

400 400

The sales of company for the year ending 31.3.1992 amounted to Rs. 500
lakhs with a profit margin of 6 per cent. The dividend payout ratio was 50% and
the tax rate was 60%. The company expects its sales to rise by 30% for the year
1992-93. The ratio of assets to sales and spontaneous current liabilities to sales is
forecast to remain unchanged. The profit margin ratio, the tax and the dividend
payout ratio are also expected to remain unchanged.

Required:

 Estimate the external funds requirement for the year 1992-93.

35
 Investment
 Assuring that the external funds requirement would be raised equally from
Analysis and
term loans and short-term bank borrowings draw up the projected balance
Financial Planning
sheet as at 31st March, 1993.

3. The balance sheet of Pragathi Limited as on 31st March, 1992 is given

below:
(Rs. In lakhs)

Liabilities Rs. Assets Rs.

Share Capital 25 Net Fixed Assets 100

Retained Earnings 35 Inventories 50

Term Loans 60 Accounts Receivables 35

Bank Borrowings 30 Cash 15

Current Liabilities

Accounts Payable 40

Provisions 10

200 200

Net sales for the year 31st March, 1992 was Rs. 400 lakhs and the projected
sales for the year 1992-93 is Rs. 500 lakhs. The net profit margin on sales is 5%
and dividend payout ratio is 60%. The tax rate for the company is 50%.
a. Estimate the external funds requirement for the next year (1992-93)

b. Prepare the following statements, assuming that the external funds would be
raised equally from term loans and short-term bank borrowings.

 Projected balance sheet

 Projected income statement

 Projected sources and use of funds statement.

36
4. The balance sheet of Exotica Limited as on March, 31, 1993 is given below: Financial
Planning- II
Liabilities Rs. Assets Rs.
Lakhs Lakhs

Share Capital 100 Fixed Assets 250

Retained Earnings 70 Inventories 150

Long Term Loans 180 Receivables 120

Short-term Borrowings 100 Cash 30

Payable 60

Provisions 40

Total 550 Total 550

Sales for the year 1993 were Rs. 600 lakhs. For the year 1994 sales are
expected to increase by 20%. The profit margin and dividend pay-out ratio are
expected to be 5% and 60% respectively.

Required:
a. Determine the external fund requirement for the year 1994.

b. How should the company raise its external fund requirement if the following
constraints are to be satisfied?

 Current ratio should be at least 1.33

 The ratio of fixed assets to long-term loans should at most be 1.5

 Long-term debt to equity ratio should at most be 1.2 Assume that the
company wants to tap external funds in the following order.
Short-term bank borrowing, long-term loans and additional equity issues.

5. The assets to sales ratio of Hi-Fly Company is 0.8 and the ratio of
spontaneous liabilities to sale is 0.6 for the present year. Existing sales
revenue is Rs. 1,000. The company follows a retention ratio of 0.4.

If the company plans to achieve a 10% increase in sales without taking

recourse to external funds. What would be the profit margin?

37
 Investment
6. The balance sheet of Manjusha Limited as at the end of March 31, 1993 is
Analysis and
given below:
Financial Planning
Liabilities (Rs. Assets (Rs.
‘000) ‘000)

Share Capital 100 Fixed Assets 200

Retained Earnings 120 Inventories 140

Long Term Loans 100 Receivables 120

Short-term bank 80 Cash 20

Borrowings

Payables 50

Provisions 30

Total 480 Total 480

The sales for the year ended 1993 were Rs. 6,00,000. Expected sales for the
year 1994 Rs. 7,50,000. The profit margin is 5% and dividend pay-out ratio is
50%.

Calculate the external fund requirement for the year 1994

Check your progress 3

1. _____________leading to financial planning.

a. External Funds Requirement [EFR]

b. Financial forecasting

2. The ________________assumes that if the sales have to go up then the

investments in all assets should proportionately go up.

a. FER Model
b. EFR Model

38
 3. The Model also assumes that if the sales go up, _______________liabilities Financial
Planning- II
will also go up proportionately.
a. premeditated

b. spontaneous
4. A ___________________is available for calculating EFR but it is advisable
to understand the fundamentals behind it.
a. formula

b. Mathode

3.5 Let Us Sum Up

In this unit we studied about the derivatives in very detail.After going
through this detiled unit the readers will get sufficient insight of derivates.
Here we studied the different type of derivatives is like future contracts,
Forward contracts option and Swaps are explained in this topic these types of
contract and markets are helpful for the investors as well as regular traders in the
market. The derivatives are most modern financial instruments in hedging risk are
those assets whose value is derived from the value of some underlying assets. The
underlying asset may be equity, commodity or currency.We even studied the
various types of derivatives products such as Future contracts, Forward Contacts,
Options, and Swaps are traded in the Indian market. A detailed discussion was
also made on EFR Model under which we studied that this EFR Model assumes
that if the sales have to go up then the investments in all assets should
proportionately go up. This is generally true for the Current Assets but not right
for Fixed Assets and therefore the Model is faulty to some extent. In option
product, there are two types of options- call option and put option.The Model also
assumes that if the sales go up, spontaneous liabilities will also go up
proportionately. This is also logical. A formula is available for calculating EFR
but it is advisable to understand the fundamentals behind it. We can calculate EFR
by preparing a projected B/S for the sales, from the past turnover.
So this unit is going to be of great help for the readers in understanding the
concepts relating to derivates.

39
 Investment
Analysis and 3.6 Answers for Check Your Progress
Financial Planning
Check your progress 1

Answers: (1-b), (2-a), (3-b), (4-b), (5-a)

Check your progress 2

Answers: (1-b), (2-a), (3-a), (4-b)

Check your progress 3

Answers: (1-a), (2-b), (3-b), (4-a)

3.7 Glossary
1. Accruals - Continually recurring short-term liabilities especially accrued
wages and accrued taxes.

3.8 Assignment
Explain the concept of derivatives with its different types.

3.9 Activities
How the Future Market Transaction is beneficial to the investors/ traders?
Explain with an Example

3.10 Case Study

How the Future Market Transactions/Future contracts are beneficial for the
traders? How they are contributing in the development of Indian capital market?

3.11 Further Readings

1. Financial Management ….Ravi Kishore.
2. Financial Management …..I. M. Pandey.

40
Block Summary
In this block we had a detailed discussion on few of the very important
topics such as investment and financing decisions and few other very important
topics.

Here in this block under unit 1 a detiled discussion was made on about
Investment and Financing Decisions, detailed analysis was made on Components
of cash flows, discussion was also made on the complex Investment Decisions.
Further in unit 2 a detiled discussion was made on Advantages of financial
planning, Need for Financial Planning, Steps in financial planning, Types of
Financial planning, Scope of Financial planning. In unit 3 Derivatives, Future
Contract, Forward Contacts, Options, Swaps, Difference between Forward
Contract and future contract, Financial Planning and Preparation of Financial Plan
after EFR Policy is Determined.
After going through this unit students must have got sufficient information
on these vital topics.

41
 Investment
Analysis and Block Assignment
Financial Planning
Short Answer Questions
1. Components of Net Working Capital.
2. Free Cash Flows.

3. Terminal Cash Flows.

4. Scope of financial planning.

5. Definition of financial planning

6. Need for financial planning.

7. Explain in detail the concept of future contracts and the different types of
participants in this Market?

8. Give in detail the importance of financial Planning.

Long Answer Questions

1. Discuss Investment decisions using capital rationing

2. What are the steps involved in Financial Planning?

3. Explain forward contracts and options

42
Enrolment No.
1. How many hours did you need for studying the units?

Unit No 1 2 3 4

Nos of Hrs

2. Please give your reactions to the following items based on your reading of the
block:

3. Any Other Comments

………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………
………………………………………………………………………………………

43
 Education is something
which ought to be
brought within
the reach of every one.

- Dr. B. R. Ambedkar

Dr. Babasaheb Ambedkar Open University

‘Jyotirmay Parisar’, Opp. Shri Balaji Temple, Sarkhej-Gandhinagar Highway, Chharodi,
Ahmedabad-382 481.